SECTION 7

7.1 GE Fanuc PLC Hardware

 ..- -

..
I
'

GE Fanuc Automation
Warnings, Cautions. and Notes
as Used in this Publication
GFL-002

! Warning !
\o\'arnlng notices arc used In this pul>lIcatioli to emphaslz.e that
Programmable Control Products hazardous voltages. currents, temperatures. or other condltluns that
cou ld cause personal InJury exist In t hi s equlpmellt or may be
associafCd willi Its u se.
In si tuations where Inattentio n could ca use either personal InJury o r
damage to equipme nt . a Warning notice Is used .

! c~~tio;; !
Ca ution noti ces are used where eq uipment might be damaged Ir care Is
not taken.

Note
NOl es merely ca ll all('nrion to Infor mmlon that Is especially sign Incant to
understa nding and operati ng the equipment.

T his document Is based on Information available at the time of tis publica tion . While
e fforts h ave bee n made to be accurate. the Information contained herein does not
purpon to cover all details or varia tions In hardware or softwa re. nor to provide for
every possible contingency in connection wit h Installation . operation . or maintenance.
Features may be described herein which are nOt present In all hardware and software
systems. CE FanucAulomation assumes no obli gation o f notice to holders of thiS
Series 90'" -30 PLC documen t wllh res pec t to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty. expressed, Implied . or
Installation and Hardware Manual statu tory with respect to. and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy. completeness.
s umclency, or usefulness of t he Information contained herei n. No warrantles o f
merchantability or fitn ess for purpose shall apply.

The following are trademarks or CE fanucAutomatlonNorth Amerlca.lnc.

Ahlm\M6~ter Gtnlus ProLoo!, S!'rluThr~

CIM PLlCITV IlelpnJntf' PROMACRO Vf'rSAMa.x
CI1-.tPUCITY 90 ADS LoglcmRstff SP.I"I" sFI\lf! Ver",I'ro
GF~0356P October 1999 CIMSTAR Motielmllster Serles90 \\iMa~ter
FI.ld Control MInion ~tRt!' S.,..If'50Ile Workmlu!'r
CEII!'t Powf'rTRJoC Strlf'5SI~

Copyright 1989 1999 GE ~'III1U C AutnnulllolINnrth Amerlca, lnc.

All RI8hl.~ Reserved
 r
"

Preface

RFI Standards

The Series 90'" 30 PLC and Its associated modules have been tested and found to meet
or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule. Part 15. Subpart J. The federal
Communications Commission (FCC) re<lulres the following nOIC to be published
according to FCC guidelines.

NOTE

This equipment generales, uses, and can rndiatc radio frequency energ)' and if nOI
insta lled in accordance with Ihis instruction mBnuB I, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. II has been tested and found \0 comply
with the limits for a CIRSS A digital device pursuanllo Pan 15 of the FCC Rules.
which arc designed to provide reasonab le protection against harmfu l interference
when opcnucd in 8 commercial environment . Opemtion of Ihis equipment in a
residential area is likely to eause harmful inttrferenee, in which case the use r will
be requi red to correct the interference at his own expense.

The following note Is required to be published by the Canadian Department of

Communicat ions

NOTE

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limiu for radiO noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio intcrferenee regu lations
of the Ca nadilln Department of Communications.

The following sla temenlS are required to appear In the Series 90'" -30 Installa!lonManual
and the Series 90'~ -30 I/O 5pecffica fiollS Manua/for Class I Dlv 2 Hazardous Locatlons.
I. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I. GROUPS A, B, C, and D,
DIY. Z HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SU ITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I. DIVISION Z,
GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION S ONLY,
Z, WARNING , EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTIO N OF COMPONENTS
MAY IMPAIR SUITABIUTY FOR ClASS I, DIVISION Z:
3, WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQU IPMEr-IT
UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON -HAZARDOUS,
ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES MUST BE POPULATED WITH FILLER
MODULES, IC693ACC3IO, OR EQUIVA LENT

CFK-0356P 11/ Iv Strlrs 90-30 PLe Installation and HardwBrt M,ltltlal CFK-0356P
 Preface
T h is marlual describes the CE Fanuc Series 90'" 30 Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) . It contains it descriptio n of hardware compo nents and provides basic hardware
Installation procedures The Series 9030 PLC Is a member o f the Series 90'" fam ily of
Progra mmable Logic Controllers from CE Fanuc.
For a list of prod uct standards, refer to data sheet CFK08678 or later, C FilnucApprovals.
Standil1rfs, Cenera l Specincations which IlslS all of the sta ndardS for CE Fanuc products.
Installation Instructions in this manual are provided for Insta llations that do lIot require
special procedures for noisy or hazard ous envi ro nments For Installations (hat must
conform ( 0 more stringent requirements (such as CE Mark) . see C FK 1179, Instal/allon
Requ/f'fm~f1ls for Conformance to Stalldards.
What's New in This Manual
This manual has been rearranged Into 13 chapters. each covering a specinc topiC
such as Install allon. Baseplates. Powe r Supplies. CPUs. Optio n Modules. etc.
Chapter 5 contains Inrormatlon about CPU 1lI0deis IC693CPU363 a nd IC693CPU364
and CPU nrmware release 9.00 reatures ror CPUs 350 - 364.
Chapter 7 contains Inrormatlon aboutlhe IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver
module
Prelimi nary Information aboul Option modu les IC693DSM31 4 and
IC6931'TM 100 / 101 (Chapter 8). and Power Supply IC693PWR328 (Chapter 4) h a~
bee n added .
Chapter 6 contains Informa llon on memory backup strategy and on the backu p
ballcry, [ncludl ng such things as reading ballery date codes and esllmatlng battery
lire
Chapter 10 Includes additional Information on bot h new and old ca bles . including a
cablelo-product crossreference table
Chapter 12 Introduces a new subject. System Design. to this manual. It describes
ractors to conSider and spectnc8tlons needed ror designing a Seri es 9030 system.
Chapter 13 prese l1ls Information on the subject of mai ntenance and troubleshooting
and Includ es information on obtaining techn ica l help and Inrormatlon via the Web
slle . Fax Link. a nd Tec:hn lca\ Support telephone numbers.
Appendi x C discusses new pori isolator IC690ACC903.
A new section d esc ribing how to calculate Series 90 30 heat diss[pallon can be rou nd
In Appendix H.
A produci to publlcallon numbe r cross refere nce has bee n added (Appendix I) to
help you nnd documentation fo r Series 90-30 products.
Appendix Jl ncludes Inrormatlon on Ihe new Terminal Block Quick Con nect
(IC693ACC377) and associated cables ror 32po lnt mod ules.
Appe ndi x K covers the subject or SN P MultIdrop.
Appendix L contains d ata on Ethernet Transceivers lC649A EAI02a nd IC649AEAI03
Appendix M contai ns useful tables and formulas.
So," ~ o! 'h ~ n~ "'odu /~s Imdlor other pruducts r~!u~ n c~ d Qbolt '""Y notlu Q~"Uab/~ wlttn
this ,""nlla/ is prlnttd. FDr tu"~nt Q"oUabillt)' D!!tO'Urts and p rDdu~ts consull )'uur 10('0/
G/;: FQnllc PLe distributor or GE FQnllc soltll rtprt!ltn,atil"r.
CFKOJS6P Prrface
Preface
Content of this Manual
Chapter I. Overview or the Series 90 30 PLC: This chapter provides you wil li an
Introduction to the Se ries 9030 Programmable Logic Controller producLS and an
overvIew o r how they fit together Into a system .
Chapter 2. InstaUalion: Provides Inrormatlon such as mounl lng. wiring. and grou ndi ng
Series 9030 components.
Chapter 3. Oase plau:s: Baseplate types. descri pt ions. and specificat ions.
Chapter 4. Power Supplies: Power supply types, descripti ons, and speci fi cations.
Chapter 5. CPUs: CPU types. descriptions. and specifications.
Chapter 6. Memory Backu p and Backu p Battery: Discusses various mcmory backup
strategies as well as bauery Issues. such as battery life estimatio n a nd date code
Interpretation
Chapter 7. Illput and OUtjHU Modules: Covers an overview of these modules This
chapter refers you to the Series 9030 liD Module Spedncal /ons Manua l (CFK0898) ror
details on these modules.
Chapter 8. Option Modules: Covers an ove rview or these modules. This chapter rerers
you to the varlOliS manua ls that cover these mooules In detail.
Chapter 9. State Logic Products: Covers an overview or these modules nIls chapter
re fers you to the various manua ls thai cover these modules [n detail
Chapter 10. Ca bles: Contains a cableloproduct cross reference tab le as well as data
sheelS ror the Series 9030 cables
Chapter I I. Prograll1mer Hardware Products. Discusses sucl1 things as WSI boards.
PCIF cards. and converters a nd Isolators
Chapter 1Z. System DeSign: Factors to consider whe n designing a Series 9030 PLC
system. Includes speclncal lons and layou t Inrormatlon needed for the design process.
Chapter 13. Maintenance: Features or Series 9030 hardware and sortwa re that are
userul ror troubleshooting. Also contains tables or spare parts and preventive
maintenance suggestio ns. and a ruse tomodule cross-reference. Includes Information
o n accessi ng CE Fanuc techn ical help resources such as Fax Link and our Web sUe.
Appendix A. C lossary: Cont ai ns terllls releva nt 10 the Se ries 9030 PLC and to
Programmable Logic Control lers in general .
Appcndlx 8 . Commonly used Acronyms.
Appendix C. Serial Port and Cab lt!s: Se rial pOrt and cable specl nca tlons
Appendix O. IC690ACC900 Converter: Contalns detailed InformaUon about th is obsolete
producl.
Appendix E. IC655CCM590 Isolated Re peater/Converter: Contains detailed
Inrormatlon about th is obsolete product
Appendix E JC690ACC901 Mln lconverter Kit; Produci descriptio n and speclncatlol1s.
AppendlJc C . IC690ACC903 Port lsoialor: Product description and speclncat lons.
vi Series 9030 PLe Installal/on and Hardware Manual CFKOJS6P

Preface
Appendix H. Series 9030 Heat Dissipation: How to calcul.ue heat dissipation for lhe
purpose of sizing enclosu res
Appe ndix 1. Catalog Number to Publlcalloll Cross Reference: Lists applicable
publications for Series 9030 product ca talog numbers.
AIJpcndlxJ. Terml nal 810ck Quick Connect. Describes the Terminal Block Quick
Connect system, w hich consists of an Interposing terminal block, facep late. and cable.
This assembly allows faster wiring ofso01 e discrete 1/0 modules.
Appendix K. SNP Multidrop. Explains how to con nect a programming unit to Illultlple
PLes and/ or Option modules
Appendix L. Ethernet Transceivers . Data on the two transce ivers sold by C E Fanllc.
Appendix M. Tab les and Formulas. Contains Information s uch as Fahrenheit to Cels ius
te illperature conversion, AWe wire sizes to Metri c conversion, ASCII codes, Metric to
English units co nversio ns, etc ,
Appe ndix N, 44A720084 001 EM I Line Filler, Describes the optional EMIline Oller that
was used on some early versions of the Se ries 9030 PLC to meet FCC EMI requirements
for no nlnd ustrlal applica tions.
CFK0356P P~(aCt vII
--
Preface
Related Publications:
Fo r more Information on Serles 9030 products. refer to these publications (note : a
publication to produ ct ca tal og number cross referen ce Is provided In Ap pendix H) '
CFK-OZ55 Series 901'\4 PCM nnd Support Sortware User's Manual
G.'K0256 McgaBaslC fI" Programming Reference Manual
CFK-0293 ~es 901').130 High Speed Counter User 's MalUml
G FK~I Vobrkll1o'l5ler1!> II PLC Programming Unll Culde to Operation
CFK0402 Series 90'''30 and 00-20 PlC HandHeld Progranuner User's Manual
CFK041 Z. Cenlus Comrnunic.atJons ~'l oduJe User's Manu.11
CFK-0466 Loglcrnasler90'" Series 9O'w30I2OMIO"O Programming Sortware User 's Manui\l
CFK-O>tfi1 . SerIes 00"" Xlm:l.Mlcro Pmgrnnun.1bJe COl1lrollcl'S Reference Manual
CFK.Q487 . Series 90"" PeM De . . elopment Sonwal't' (PeOP) User's Mnnual
CFK-0499 CIMPUCrrYC!P 9Q.ADS AlphanulOenc Displ..1Y Systl!lfI User 's Manual
CFK.0582 Series 901'\4 PLC Serial CommunlcaUons U5e!"S Manual
CFK.()631 ' Series 9O.30 1.0 UNK Il1Ierface User's Manual
CFK.()641 . CIMPlICllY 9{).ADS Alphanumeric Dl<iplay S~" m Rererence Manual
CFK0664 Series 90' ... 30 PLC Axis Positioning Modulc Programmer's Manual
GFK-0685 Series 00'''' Progra mlllabl eControllers FlowColilputer User s Manual
GFKOG95 Series 90'" -30 Enhanced GenlusCOllllTlunlcallonsModu le User '$ Manua l
CFK01Z6 Series 90''''30 PlC Statc LogiC Processor User 's Guide
CFK013Z $erles90""30 PLC ECLIPS User 'sManunl
CFK-0747 Serles 90').O 30 PLCOnTOP User 'sCulde
CFK0750 OnTop for Series 90N .30 (State Logic) Progra ll1User's Manual
CFK0181 . Molion Mate'" APM 300forSerles90' '' 30 PLC FolJowerMode User '5 Manual
CFK08Z3 Series 90' ... 30 I/ O LI NK MasterModlil e User 's Manual
CFK08Z8 Series 90' " 30DlagnosllcSystl!m User 'sMnnual
CFK- 0840 Motion Mate T.. APMJOO rorSeries 90').030 PLC Standnrd Mode User 'sMo nual
CFK.Q861 . CE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals. Standan;h, Ceneral Spedflc.atlol\s
CFK0898 . Series 90''' 30PlC I/ OMocluleSpeclnCatIOns
CFK IOZ8 Series 901'\4301/ 0Prcx:essorModule User 's ~hnual
GFK 1034 . Series 901'\430Cenius<Bi Bus Comroller User 's Manual
CFK-I 031 . Series 90flol 30 Fir Remole I/ O Scanner User 's Manu al
GFK, 1056 Series 90T)j30 Slale Lagle Control System User '5 Manual
GFK 1186TCP/ IPEthernet Communications for the Series 90'" ,30 PLC SI8110n Manllger Manual
CFK- 11 19 Serles90'''' PLC InstallatlonRequlrelllenuforConformance toStandarc\s
GFK \464 Motion Male DSM30Z for Series 90 ' 30 PLCs User'sManual
CfK 1466 Temperature Control Module for the Sl!'rtes 90'" 30 PLC User 'sManual
CFK 1541 rcpl iP Ethernet Comm unications ror the Series 90'" PlC User 's Manual
viii Strlts 9030 PtC /IIslaJJar/on and HanJwa~ Mal1ual CFK0356P
 Preface Preface

We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions

AI. GE Fanuc Automation. we strive to produce quality technical documentation . After
you have used this manual. pl ease take a few moments to complete a nd return the
Reader 's Com ment Card iocated o n the nex t page .

Thomas W. Myrrlr
Senior Tec hn ical Writer

CFK0356P Prtf,cr Ix x Series 9030 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual CFK0356P
 ,
,--.

Contents Contents

Chapler 1 Overvi ew of lhe Series 90-30 PLC ..... . ........ _....... . ..... . 1-1 Chapler 3 Basepiales .. . . .......... . .. . ... _... . _. . .. . ..... . ...... 3-1
The Basic Parts of a Series 9030 PLe 1 1 Baseplate Types . ..... . .. 31

Assembling a Basic Series 9030 PLC System 12 Baseplate Terms Explained 3 3

1-6 CPU Basep la tes . 34

What else would be needed to make thiS basic system functional ?
Expa nsion Baseplates (Figures 36 and 37) 38
W hat If Ihe application requires more than nvc modules? .... 16
Remote Baseplates (Figures 38 and 39) 3 10
Whal if the appilcation requires more Ihan ten modules? . 17
Expansion Rack Connection Exampl e J 16
What Is the Difference Be{Wcen Expansion and Hemote baseplates? 1-8
Expan!llon and Remote Basep lates Connection Example . 3- 17
What if t need to cover more than 700 feel (213 meters)? ., . 1-9
Baseplate Mounting Dimensions . 3- 18
Load Ratings. Temperature. and Mou nting Position . 3-2 1
Chapler 2 Installation ........ . ...... . . . . ..... .. . .......... . . , 2- i Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19 ~ Rack Mounting 322

Receiving yOUf Products - Visualinspeciion 21

Chapler 4 Po \verSuppli es ............... . . ..... ....... . ...... .. ..... . 4-1
Pre-Installation Check 21
WarranlY Claims . 2-1 Power Supply Categories .. 4-1
Power Supply Feature Comparison . 4-1
Working wUh Series 90 30 Modules 2-2
AC / DCl nputPower Supplies 42
Baseplate Mounting ... 2-8
IC693PWR321 Stand ard Power Supply. 1201240Vft.C or 125 VDC Input . 4 2
MOllntlng a Baseplate to a Panel 28
IC693PWR330 High Capaci ty Power Supply. 12012 40VPC.I 125 VDClnput -14
Mounting a Baseplate to a 19~ Rack 28
Field Wiring ConnectIons for the AC / DClnputPower Supp lies 45
Crou ndlng Procedures 2-1 1 DC Input Only Power Supplies .... 47
System Grounding Procedures 2-11 CalculatIng Input Power Requirements ror IC693PWR322 48
Series 9030 PLC Equipment Grounding 212 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR328 4 11
Module Shield Grounding 214 IC693PWR33 1 High Capacity Power Supply. 24 VDC Input 413
General Wiring Gu ideli nes ... 2 17 Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR331 4- 15
Discrete 1/ 0 Module Connection Methods . 2 18 field Wiring Connections to the DC InputO nly PaWN Supplies .. 4 16
Connections 10 1/ 0 Module Terminal Boards 218 COOllllon Series 9030 Power Supply Features 4-17
Output Vollage Connections to Backplane (All Supplies) ... 4-18
Termlnill810ck Quick Connect Installation for 16Polnt Discrete Modules 219
Installation of 32Polnt Discrete, 50Pln Connector Modules. 2 19
IrlSlaliation of Discrete 32Polrll. Dual 24Pln Connector Modules 220
General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules 221
Analog Input Module Wiring Methods . ........ .. 221
Analog Output Module Wiring ..... 222
PC. Power Source Connections. 223
Speclal lnslallatlon Instructions for Floallng Neutral (I'D Systems . 225
OeOnltion of Floating Neutra l Systems ... 225
Usc These Speclallnstallatloll Ins trucllons for Floating Neutral Systems 226
DC Power Source Connections ..... .......... 227
Basic Ins tallation Procedure .. 228

GFK0356P Table ofCOlltellts xl xII Series 9(}30 PLe /listallalion and Hardware Mallual- October /999 CFK0356P
 .---.

Contents Contents

Chapter 5 CPUs" , . . .................... , .. .. .... ............ .. 5-1 Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules .............. . . ...... .. . . ........ . 7-1
CPU 'Iypes for Series 9030 PLCs ............. . 5 1 Baskl / O Module 'lYpes .. 7- 1
DlscretellOModu ies . 73
Embedded CPU s 5 1
Wi rIng Methods for 32Polnl DIscrete I/O Modules 7-8
ModlJiar CPUs 51
AnalogModule Featurcs 7-10
Ge neral CPU Features 53 Wiring Methods for Analog Modules 711
Series 90-30 CPU Capaci ties 5 10 I/ 0Moduie Power Supply Current Draw , 7-11
User Memory Addresses (References) 511 I/ 0ModuleWIre Routing ,."., ... 7- 11
Difference Betwee n a Memory Address and a Nickname 5- 11 lC6930VM300 Digital Valve Driver Modu le. 7 14
User Me mory Reference lYpes 5 11
ChapterS OplionModulcs .. . .. , .. , ..... , ................. . . ...... . . . , 8-1
350 - 364 CPU, 5-13
IC693CMM301 Genius Comm unIcations Module (GCM) 81
Hardware Featu res of the 350364 CPUs 5-18
Status LEOs . 81
CPU3S0 and CPU 3GO Hardware Features 518 IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (CCM ... ) 84
CPU35 l, CPU352, and CPU 363 Hardware Features 519 IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Comfoiler (CBC) 8-6
CPU364 Hardware Fea tures . 511 IC693 BEM340 Fir Bus Controller (FSC) Module . 8 10
CPU Data Sheets 51 4 IC693BEM330 FIP Remote 110 Sca nner Module 8 11
CPU31 3 Catalog Number IC693CPU313 516 IC69JA PUJO I1302 MouonMateAxls Positioning Module (A PM) . 8-15
CPU 323 Cata log Number IC693CPU323 517 IC693DSMJ02 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (OSMJ02) .' 817
IC693DSM3 14 MOtion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM3 14)
CPU33 1 Catalog Number IC693CPU33 1 518 - Preliminary . 810
CPU340 Catalog Number IC693CPU340 5-19 lC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSCl Module 824
CPU341 Catalog Number IC693CPU3l l 5-30 IC693BEM320 1/ 0 LINK Interrace (Slave) Module 8-15
CPU350 Cata log Number IC693CPU350 53 1 IC693BEM32 1 110 LINK Master Module 816
CPU35 1 Catalog Number IC693CPU35 1 5-31 IC693APU305 1/ 0Processor Module . 818
CPU351 Cata log Number IC693CPU352 5-33 lC693CMM321 Ethernet Inter face Modu le 830
IC693PCM300/301/31 Programmable Coprocessor Modu le (PCM) 831
CPU360 Catalog Number lC693CPU360 534
IC693CM M311 Co mmuni cations Coprocessor Module (CMM) 8-34
CPU363 Catalog Number lC693C PU363 535 IC693ADC3 11 Alphanumeric Disp lay Coprocessor (ADC) 835
CPU364 Ca ta log Number IC693CPU364 536 IC693TCM3021303 Temperature Control Modules (TCM) .. . 837
IC693PTM IOO/ lOIPowerTransd ucer (PTM)- Prelimin ary .. . 840
Chapler6 Memory Backup and Backup Battery ........... , ... .. . .... . .. . 6-1
Chapter 9 Stale Logic Products . 9-1
Backup Battery ror RAM Memory (A ll Supplies) . 6-1 State Logic Overview 91
Batter y Replacementlnslructlons . . ......... . 61 State Logic Products 9-1
BaneryReplacement / Memory Protection Factors . . ............... . 63 AD693CMM301 State logic Serial Commun ications Module (SCM) 91
Fac tors Affecting Battery Life 6,,1 IC693S LP300 State Logic Processor Module . 94
Low Battery Warning Methods 6-4 State Logic CPUs .. 9-8
Operati ng Without a Memory Backup Battery 65 Sta te Logic CP U Data Sheets 9-13
CSE311 Cata log Number lC693CSE311 9-14
Determi nIng Battery Age Using Ballery Datc Code . , 66
CSE313 Catalog N\lmber IC693CSE3 13 9-15
RAM Memory Battery Backup Connecti on Path . , .. , . 66 CSE313 Cata log Number IC69JCSE323 9-16
Mai nta ini ng RAM Memory DurIng Storage or Shipment of a CPU 67 CSE33 1 Ca tal og Number IC693CS E331 9 17
Balterl es in Power Su pplies on Expansion or Remote Racks, 6-9 CSE340 Cata log Number IC693CSE340 918

CFK0356P Tableo fConcents xIII xlv Series 9030 PLe Installation Rnd HanJlI'are Maf/ual - Octo/)cr J999 CFK-0356P
 Contents Contents

Chapter 10 Cables ..... , .. ...... . ..... .... . . . .. ... ...... . ... , . . .. . 10 1 Chapter II Programmer Hardware Products .... . . . . .. . ..... .. . , . , , . .. , , , 11 1 .
Products Discllssed In this C hapter ... . 11 - 1
Cable Data Sheets 108
IC640WM1310/320Work Station Interface Board:. ., 11 -2
IC647CBL704
Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU (SN P Port) Ca ble 109 Replaci ng Workmaster Computers 11 3
IC690ACC900 RS4221RS-485 to RS-232 Converter .. 11 4
IC690C BL701
peM. ADC. CMM to Workmaster (PCXT) Cable 10 13 IC(i90J\CC90 1 Mlnlconverter Kit 11 5
I)CM to Programmer Cable insta llatto n 10 14 lC693 PRG300 Hand Held Progra mmer (HHP) .. 11 -6
HHP Featu re:. . 11 7
IC690CBL702
PC AT 10 PCM. ADC. CMM Cable. 10 15 HH P Memory Card (IC693ACC303) 11 -7
HHP Modes o r Opera lion 11 7
pe M to Programmer Cable Installation 10 16
IC693PIF30 11 400Personal Computer Interface (PCIF) Cards 11 -8
IC69OCBL705
IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater IConvertcr 11 10
Workmaster II IPSI2) to PCM . ADC. CMM Cable 10 I7
lC690ACC903 Port Isolalor . ., .. 11 10
PC~ I to Programmer Cable Insta llallon 10- 18
IC690C BL714A MuhldropCable .. 10 19 Chapter 12 System Design ................ " .. . .... . . .. .. . .......... . 12-1
Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable 102 1 lntrodllctlon 12 1
IC693CBL300/30 1/302131 21313/ 31' Step l ' Planning Your Sys tem 12 1
lI D Bus Expansion Cables 10-23 Step 2: Determining lID Requirements 12 1
Building Custom Length liD Bus Expansion Ca bles 1025 Ste p 3: Selecting Optio n Modules . 122
IC693CBL303 Ste p 4: Se lecti ng a CPU 12 <1
Hand-Hand Progralnmer and Convert er (lC690ACC900) Cable . 1034 Step 5: Se lecting Baseplates .. 126
IC693CBL304 / 305 Step 6: Se lecting Power Supplies. 126
Port Expansion (WYE) Cables ror peM. ADC. and CMM 1036 RedUCing PLC Module COlint by Usi ng Oeher GE Fall uc Produces 127
IC693CBL306/307 Deslgnil'8 For Sa rety . 128
Extension Cables (50 Pin) for 32 PoI nt Modu les . 1039 Numbe r o( Modules Per Series 90-30 PLC Syste m 12 11
IC693C BL308/309 Calcu lali ng Power Su pply Loading . 12 12
110 Cables (50Pin) for 32 Polm Modules .... 1041
Scan (Sweep) TlmeCalcu latioll 12- 16
IC693CBL310 Calculati ng PLC Heat Dissipation 12 16
J/ Ol nterface Cable (24 -PII1) (or 32 Point Modules 1042
System Layout Guidelines " .. 12 17
IC693C BL311 /3 17/3 19/ 320 Series 9030 PLC Layout Example 12-20
I/O lnterface Cables for Power MateAPM Modules .. 10 45
PLC Mou nting Positio n . 122 1
IC693CBL3 15
I/ Olnterface Cable (24-Pln) for 32 Poi nt Modules . 1049
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting , . , . 13 1
IC693CBL316
Serial Cable, 9 Pln O-Shell to RJ- ll Connector ... 1053 Troubleshooting Features o f Series 9030 Hard ware . 13-1
Module LED indlcalors ............ , .. , , , .. , 13-2
IC693CBL32 1/ 3221323
I/ OFaceplate Connec tor to Terminal Block Connecto r, 24 Pln 1054 Troubleshoollng Features of Progra mming Sof"vare , 133
IC693C BL3271328 Re placi ng Modu les ... 134
1/0 Interface Cables w ith Right Angle 24 PITI Co nnector 10-57 Series 9030 Product Repair 134
IC693C BL329 1330 1331 1 332 /3 33/ IMb les Module Fuse list 135
24 1'11\ I/ OFaceplate Connector to Term inal Block COlin ector . 1062 Spare/Re placemel llParts. 1J.6
IC693CBL340/34I Prevent ive Maintenance Suggestions 1).7
PTM Inte rface Ca bles - Preliminary In(ormatlon 1065 Getting Additional Help and information 138

CFK-0356P Tablr of Colilt illS xv xvi Strles 90-30 PLe Jllstal/a f lOIl and Hard\\art M atlual- October 1999 CFK035GP
 """I

Contents Contents

Appendix A Glossary . . . ................................... . ......... A-I Appendix F IC690ACC901 MlniconverterKiI ... . . . .... . .. ..... .. . . ...... F- I
Glossary of Terms for the Series 90 30 PLC A I
Appendix G IC690ACC903 Port Isolator . . .... .. . . . . . . .... .... . . .. .. ... . . . . G- I
Appelldlx B Acronyms and Abbreviations . , , .. , ... , , .. . .. .. . ..... . . .. .. . . . B-1
Appendix H Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation. H- I
Appendix C Serial Port and Cables . . . ... . C- I
Appendix I Catalog Number to Publication Cross Reference .... . ........ . . . I- I
What thi s A ppendix Contai ns C I
RS-422 Interface . C t Appendix J Terminal Block Quick Connect Components ." .. , .. , .... ,.,., . J-I
Ca ble and Cor' nee tor SpcclOcallons C-2
Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16POlnt Mod ules J2
Series 90 PLC Serial Pon C-3
Termi nal 13Iocks , , J2
Worklllasier Serial Port CS
Cable Cu rrent Rati ng . J2
IBMAT I XTS<rla IPon C6 Cable Selection and Cross Re ference J3
RS-232 / RS- 48SConverter C1 I/ OFace ])Iate for I 6 Pol nt Mod ules . J3
Serial Cable Diagra ms C-1 1I0Face Plate Installation J3
RS-232 Polnt -to Pol nt Connec tions C1 Mod ule Wiring Information H
RS-422 Pol nt -to -Polnl Connection CtO Cab le Information H
Mu ltid rop Connecl lons . C II Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Modu le Ter minal . JS
Termi nal Block Information JS
Appendix D IC690ACC900 Converter 0 -1 Termi nal Block Quick Connect Co mponents for 32Po lnt Modllies J II
Features , 0 1 Termi nal Bloc k j-l l
Fu nctions 0 1 Cable Selectio n and CrossReference j-l 2

Location In System 0 1 Cable Current Rating . .... J12

Cable Data , ., ... J-t2
Installation 0 2
Term inal Block Data , . , J-t2
Cable Description . 0 3
Logic Diagram .. 0-6 Appendix K SNP Multidrop .. . .... . .. . K-I
Jumper ConOguration ,. 0 1 SNP Mu ltidrop Overview . K I
Cable and ConneclOr SpecJnca fions K-2
Appendix E IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter E-I SN P Multidrop Examples ., .. K4
Descrlpllonof the Isolated Repeater/Convener Et COllflgur lng and Connecting a Programmer La a Muilldrop Network K-S
Logic Diagra m of the Isola ted Repeater/ Co rwertcr . . E3 SNP MultldropTroublcshootl ng K6
Pin Asslgmncnts for the Isolated Repeat er/ Converter E4
System Configurations ES Appendix L Ethernet Transceivers . , ....... . .. . L-I
Cable Diagrams E-1 IC649AEA I02 Ethernet IOBASET Transcelver L I
lC649AEA I03 Ethernet IOBASE2 Transceiver L2

Appendix M Tables and Fonuulas ............................... . . .. . ..... M-I

Appendix N 44A720084 -001 EMI Line Filter .. . . ... . .. . . . .. . .... ... .. .. . .. N-I
44 A720084001 OptIonal EM I Line Filter ., Nt

CFK0356P Tablt of Co menu xvII x."m Strles 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Mallual - October 1999 CFK-0356P
 Contents Contents

Figure 11. Flve-Slol CPU Baseplate . 13 Figure 312. Example or Connecting Expansion Baseplates ........ . 316
Figure 12. Power Supply Module 13 Figure 3IJ Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplale~ . 3 17
Figure 13. CPU Module 14 Figure 3 14. Model3l1 and J IJ 5Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements 3 18
Figu re 14. \IOModule J.4 Figure 3 15 Model 323 IO-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spaci ng Requirements 3- 19
Figure 15. Assembling the System ' 5 Figure 3 16 Modu lar CPU . ExpanSion. and Remote 5Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing
Requirements ... 3 19
Figure 16 A Basic System . 16
Figu re 317. Modular CPU , Expansion. and Remote 10S10I Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing
Figure 17. len-Slot Rack '7 Requirements 320
Figure 18. 110 Bus Expansion Cab le 1-7 Figure J- IS. IC693ACC30S Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation 3-22
Figure \ -9 Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates 1-8 Figure J-19 Dimensions ror 191 Rack Mounting UslnglC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket . 323
Figure '10 Connccling Illes Using CSC orCMM Modules 1-9 Figure 3-20. lC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket .. 3-2 3
Figure 2- 1. Features of Series 9030 Module 22 Figure 41 Sta ndard AC / DClnputPower Supply IC693PWR3Z 1 4-2
Figure 2-2. Installing a Module . 2-3 Figure 42. High Capacity AC / DClnputPower Supply IC693PWRJ30 44
Figure 2-3. Removing a Module 2-4 Figure 43. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap , ... 46
Figure 2-4 Insta lling a n 1/ 0 Module 's lerl1llnalBoard _ 25 Figure 4-4. Series 90-30 24 / 48 VDC Inpul Power Supply IC693PWR322 47
Figure 25 Removing a Module's Terminal Board 2-6 Figure 45. Typical Ernclency Curve ror 24 / 48 VDC Power Supply ... 48
Figure 2-6. lerminai Board wit h Holding Scre ws 27 Figure "6. Series 90-30 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWRJ28 . . 4-10
Figure 2-7 IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation 29 Figure 4-7 lYpical Ernclency Curve ror IC693PWR3Z8 Power Supply 4-11
Figure 28. Dimensions for 191 Rack Mounting Using ICG93ACC308Adapter Bracket 29 Figure 4-8. Series 90-30 24 VOC Input High Capacity Power Supply IC693PWR331 4 13
Figure 2-9. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket 210 Figure 49. 5 VDC Current Output Derating ror Temperatures above SOC (122F) 4 14
Figure 2 10 Recommended System Grounding 2-11 Figure 410 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . 4-'8
Figure 21 1. Baseplate Grou nding 212 Flg~lre 4 11 Inte rconnection of Power Supplies . 4 ' 8
Figure 212 CPU 351 or 352 . Attaching Ground Wire 2-14 Figure 4-12 Timing Diagram ror all Series 9030 Power Supplies. 419
Figure 2 13. CPU 35 I or 352 . Mounti ng Grou nd ing Bracket 215 Flgure"13 Serial Port Connector .. 420
Figure 2 ''' . CPU 363 or CPU364 . Attaching Ground Wire 216 Figure 4-14 . Backup Battery for RAM Memory 4-2'
Figure 215. Power Supply Terminal Boards 2-24 Figure 5-1 . Models 31 1 and 313 (5Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates 52
Figure 2-16 Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . 224 Figure 52. ICG93CHS397 5Slot Modular CPU Baseplate 53
Figure 3 1 COlllmon Baseplate Features . 3-2 Figure 53. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply 54
Figure 32. Models IC693CPU31l and IC693CPU3l3 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates 3-5 Figure 5 ~ . CPUs 35 1. 352, and 363 . 5 19
Figure 33 ModcllC693CPU323 (lO-slol) Embedded CPU Baseplate 35 Figure 61 Backup Battery ror RAM Memory 61
Figure 34 . lC693CHS397 5510t Modular CPU Baseplate .. . . 36 Figure 62 . Installing the Battery Accessory Kit 68
Figure 35 IC693CHS39I 10Slot Modular CPU Baseplate . 37 Figure 71 . Example or Series 9030 Standard Density Discrete Output Modu le 74
Figure 36 IC693CHS398 5Slot ExpanSion Baseplate 38 Figure 72. Example or 32'Point lI D Module (IC693MDL654) With Dual Connectors 76
Figure 37 IC693CHS392 10S lot Expansion Baseplate. 39 Figure 73 . Exampleor32Polnt li D Module (IC693MDLG5J) With Si ngle Connector 77
Figure 3-8. IC693C HS399 5Slot Remote Baseplate .. 3-10 Figure 7 4. 50PIN, 32 Point 110 ModuieConnection Method . 78
Figure J9. IC693C HS393 105101 Remote Baseplate 3-11 Figure 75. Example or Series 9030 Analog Current Output Module .. 7 11
Figure 310. lI D Bus Expansion Cables 312 Agure 76. IC693DVM300 Dlgllal Valve Driver Module . 7 14
Figure 3- 11 . Rack NUlllber Select lOTI SWitch (Shown with Rack 2 Selected) 3 15 FIgure 81. Tile ICG93CMM30 1 GCM Module , .. 82

GFKOJS6P TitbIt orCOn/tlllS xix xx Strlts 90-30 PLe Installation and Hart/waf! Manual- October /999 GFK-OJS6P
 r-.

Contents Contents

Figure 82 . Genius Bus Wlrlng5chematlc 83 Figure 107. PCM, ADC . or CMM to Workmaster or PCAT Serial Cable 101 5
Figure 83 E)(am ple of Genius Commu nications Network 83 Figure 10-8. PCM to PCAT Personal Computer . 10 16
Figure 8-4 . Enhanced Ge nius COlnnlunlcatlons Module 84 Figure 109. PCM. ADC. or CMM to Workm aster Ilor PS/2 Serial Cable 10 17
Figure 85. Ge nius Bus Controll er Module " .. ,"',. 86 Figure 10 10. PCM to Workmaster II Co mputer or PS/2 Compu ter 10 18
Figure 86. Example of FIP l i D System ConOguratlon 810 Figure 10 11 Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable IC690CBL7 14A 1020
Figure 87 . Series 9030 FIP Bus Co ntroller 811 Figure 10 12 Multidrop Arra ngement (or Series 90-30 Redundant System 1021
Fi gure 8-8, Example of FIP Remote 110 Scan ner System ConOguralio n . 812 Fi gu re 10 13. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with lCS90CBL7 14A Cab le. 10-2 1
Figu re g.g . FIP Bus Interfa ce Module 813 Figu re 10 14. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 9070 TMR Redundant System 1022
Figure 810. Mollon M ate APM Module 8 15 Figure 10- 15. Detail of 1/0 Bus Expansion Cables 1023
Figure 8- t I Example of Motion Ma le APM Servo System 8 16 Figure 10 16 How to use Spllt Rlng Ferrules for Fa ll and Braid ed Cable Shield . 1027
Figure 8 12. Mollon Male DSM302 Module 8 17 Figure 10 11. Polnt ToPolnt Cable Wiring for Co ntinuous Shield Custom Length Cables 1029
Figure 8-13. MOllon Male DSM314 Module 820 Figure 10 18. Polnt -To -Polnt Cable Wiri ng Diagram for Applica tions Requiring Less Noise Immunity 1029
Fi gure 8-14. High Speed Coun ter (HSC) 824 Figure 1019. Earlier Versions or Remote Baseplate C us tom WYE Cable WIring Diagram 1030
Figure 8 15. Exampl e of a Se ries 90-30 ,lLC In a Fa nuc lID LIN K Configuration 825 Figure 10-20. Currell! Remote baseplate (IC693C HS393 / 399) Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram 10 31
Fi gure 8 16. Exampleofl / O LINK Master System Connguratlon 826 Figure 10 21. Example of Co nnecling Expansion Baseplates 1032
Figure 8 11 I/ O Processor Module 828 Figure 1022. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates 1033
FIgure 818. Et hernet Interface Module .. 830 Figure 10-23. Wiring Connection!> for IC693CB L303 and Custom Bullt Cables . 1035
FIgure 8 19 Programmable Coproc~ssor Module (PCM) 832 Figure 1024 Hand Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90-30 PLC 1035
Figure 8-20. Commu nications Con trol Module 834 Figure 10-25 . Wye Cab le 1036
Figure 82 1 Alphanumeric Display Cop rocessor Module (ADC) 8-35 Figure 10-2S. Wye Cable Con nections 1037
f'lgure822 . ICS93TCMJ02/303Te mpera ture Control Module (TCM) 837 Figure 1027. 32 Point I/ O Module to WeldmullerTerllllnal Block Assembly 10 40
Flgure8 23. IC693PTMI00 / JOI Compo .lents. 8-41 Figure 10-28. ICS93CBL310 Cable 10 42
Figure 8-24. IC693PTMlOO/ I0 1 Co mpo nent Mounting 842 Fi gure 1029. Dimensions for Depth of Connector In fro ll! of PLC ... 1044
Figure g l. AD693CMM30 I Sta te logic Seria l Communications Modu le .. 92 Figure 10-30. 1/0 Connector Cable Specl ncatlons 1045
Figu re 92 . IC693CBL305 WYE Cable 93 Figure 103 1. IC693C BL315 Cable 1049
Figure 9-3. IC693S LP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series go30 94 Figure 10-32 Dimensions for Depth o r Connector In front of PlC . 1052
Figure 94 State Logic Processor Module User Details . 96 Figure 10 -3 3. ICS93CBL31SA Serial Cable illustration and COI1I1e{tor Plnouls 1053
Figure 9-5 Model CSE31 1 or CSE3 13 5-Slot Embedded CPU Base plate 99 Figure 1034. Connector Orien tation o n I/O Faceplate .. 1055
Figure 96. Mocl el CS E323 10Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate. 99 Figure 1035. I/O Faceplate to Term inal Bl ock Cable 1055
Figure 97 CPU Models CSE 33 1 or CSE 340 910 Fi gure 10-36. Dimensions for Depth of Connector In front or PLC .. 1056
Figure 98 Serial Port Connector 9 11 Figure 1037. IC693CBL3271328 Cables .... 1057
Figure 10 1. Serial Port to Work Statio n Interface Board Cable Connec tio n . 109 Figu re 1038. Dimension for Depth of Co nnector for IC693CBL327 /328 1058
Figure 10-2. Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Se rial Cable .. 10 10 Figure 10-39. Dimens io ns ror Depth of Co nilector In front o( PLC for Custom Buill Ca bles. 106 1
Figure 10-3. Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter . 10 11 Figure! 0401C693CBL329/ 330/33 1/3321333/33Cables . 1062
Figure 104 Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8Wlre Multidrop . Serial Data Connguratlon 10 12 Figure 1041 . Dimension ror Depth of Connector 1063
Figu re 105. PCM. ADC . or CMM to Workmaster or PCXTSerlal Cable ..... 10 13 Fi gure 10-42. ICS93CBL340/ 34 I PTM In terface Cab les 1065
Figure 10S. PCM to Workmaster Com puter or PCXT Personal Compu ter 10 14 Figure 1043 IC693PTM l OO PTM Com po nent Mounting 1065

CFK0356P Tableof Cotltt1lls KXI xxii Series 90-30 pte Installatiof} and HanJware Manual - Ocrobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 Contents Contents

Figure 11 1. WSI Board for the Wurkmaster II Computer ......... . . 11 2 Figure F l . Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Mlnlconverter F I
Figure 11 2. Location of WSll n a Series II 9030 PlC System 112 Figure F2. Minlconverter to PCAT . F3
Figure 113. Examp le of IC690ACC900 Converler Connection 11 4 Figure F-3. Mlnl convertcr to Workmaster II. PCXTPS I2 F3
Figure 11 -4. IC690ACC90 1 Series 90 SNP Pon to RS232 Adapter , 11 5 Figure F-4. Mlnlconverter to g-Pln Workmaster or PC -XT Computer . F3
Figu re 11 -5. Hand Held Progra mmer for the Series 9030 PLe " 11 6 Figure J I. lYplcal T8QC Ternllnal Block . J I
Figure 11-6. Example of pelF Interface to Series 9030 1/ 0 118 Figure 1-2. T8QC Faceplate J5
Figure 12- t. Hard-Wired MeR Circuit Example . 129 Figure J3. ICG93ACC329 T8QC Terminal Block . J6
Figure 12-2 Allowable location of Modules . 1219 Figure J-4. IC693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block . J.)
Figure 12-3. Series 9030 Example Layout ... 1220 Figure J. 5. ICG93ACC33 1 TBQC lerml nal Block J8
Figure 124. Recommended PLe Mounll ng Orienta tion 122 1 Flgure].6. IC693ACC332 TBQC Termln.1 Block .. J9
Figure 125. Derated PLe Moumlng Orientation 122 1 FigureJ .7. IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block . JIO
Figure 13-1 Relatio nship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Conncctions 13 1 Figure jo8. ICG93MDLG5~ 32Polnt Module HI
Figure C , Series 90 PLe. RS 422 Serial Pori Connector ConOguration .
Figure jo9. IC693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block J 13
C3
Figure K-1. Series 9030 Multidrop Example ... K I
Figure C2. Workmaster RS 232 Serial Port Connector Conng uraUon C5
Figure K-2. Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram K3
Figure C -3. IBM AT / XTSerlal Port C6
Figure K-3. Con necti ng CPU a nd APM (0 Programmer with IC690CB1714A Cable K'I
FIgure C-4 IBM AT (compatibles) l>Crsonal Computer to Series 90 PLCs C8
Figure K-4. Muhldrop Arrangement for Series 9070 TMR Redu ndant System K4
Figure CS Workmaster or IBM XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs C9
Figure K-5. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System K5
Figure C G. 'typical RS 422. Hosl to PLC Connecllon. with Handshaking C IO
Figure Ll . IC649AEA I 02 Et hernet 10BASE TTransceiver L I
Figu re C-7. Workmaster II / Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection C II
Figure L2. IC6'19AEA 103 Ethernet l OBASE2Transcelver. L2
Figure C-8. Workmaster/Series 90 PLC Multid rop Connection C12
Figure N I. 41A720084 00 1 line Filter Connections to Series 9030 Power Supply N I
Figure C9. IBM -AT /Serles90 PLC Mu ltldrop Connecl lon C 12
Figure N2. Equlvalcm Circuit for 44A 720084001 Line Filter N2
Figure C IO IBMXr /Serles90 PLC Multidrop Connection C 13
Figure N-3 44A720084001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions . N2
Figure 0 1 Front and Rear View of Converter D2
Figure 0 2 'lYplcal Con nguraUon with Series 9070 PlC 0 3
Figure D 3 Typical ConOguration wit h Series 9030 PlC 0 4
Flgur~ 04 . RS 4221RS485 to RS232 Converter Logic Diagram 0 6
Figure 0 -5. location of Jumpers for User Options . D )
Figure E I . Isolated / Repeater Converte r E2
Figure E 2 RS 422 Isolated Repeater/ RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram E3
Figure E-3. Example RS 422 Isolated Repeater/ RS-232 Converter Con nection . E5
Figure E4 Simp le System Conngurallon Using the Isolated Repeater/Convener .. E6
Figure 5. Complex System Connguration Using the Isolated Repeater/ Converter EG
Figure EG. Cable A: RS-232 CMM To Converter E)
Figure E 7. Cable B. RS122 CMM To Cunverter E)
Figure E8. Cable C : RS4221\vlsted Pair E8
Figure Eg. Cable 0 ; RS4221wlsted Pair Eg
Figure E IO. Cable E: RS-232 Converter to CMM Eg

CFK0356P Tablt of Coll ttllfS J()(II/ xxi" Strlts 9030 PLC insrallM/on atld Hardwart Mallual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 ,

Contents Conten ts

Table 3-1. Rack Number Se lection Switch Seulngs 3-1' Table 11 1 Personal Computer In ter face Ca rd Co mparison Table 11 8
Table 32. Series 9030 Baseplate Comparison 3-2' Table 121 . Power Supply Feature Comparison Table .. 127
Table 4 1. Power Supply Comparison Tab le ' -1 Th ble 122. Max imum Number of Modllies Per System 12 11
1ablc 42. IC693PWR32 1 Power Supp ly Capacities .. .-2 Table 123 . Load Requirements (In mil liamps) 12 13
lable 43 5peclncatlons for IC693PWR3 21 Standard AC / OCl nput Power Supply ' -3 Table 13-1. Fuse Li st for Series 9030 Modules 135
'Ia ble 44 IC693PWR330 Power Supply Capacities
litble 4-5 . 5peclncallons for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC/ DClnpulPower Supply .
.-.
' -5
Table 132. Spare/ Replacem ent Parts
Table C l . Connecto r/ CableS pectn catlons
136
C2
Table 46 lC693PW R322 Power Supply Capacltles ' 7 Table C2 Series 90 PLC. RS422 Seria l Port Pin-out C,
Table ,, 7 SpcclOcatlons for IC693PWR322 Power Supply Table C3. Workmaster RS232 Serial PorI Pins-out C-5
' 8
lhble 48. IC693PWR328 Power Supp ly Capacities Table C4 IBM AT/ XTSeriaIPon Plnsout C6
' 10
Table 4-9. Spednca llons for IC693PWR328 Power Supply 4 11 Table 0 -1. RS 232lnlerface for Convener .. D'
Table 4 )0 IC693 PWR331 Power5upplyCapacities Table 0 2. RS4221 RS485 Interface for Converter . 0 5
' -13
Thble 0 3. Jumper Co nOgu ration for RS-422 / RS485 to RS232 Converter . 08
'!able 4 11 . Spec/Orations for IC693PWR33 J Power Su pply
Table 5-1 . EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers
'1' Thble 0 4. Speclflcations for IC690ACC900 Convener 0 -9
59
Thble EI. Isola ted Repeater/ Converter Pin Assignments . E- '
Th bl e 52 Series go30 CPU Capacities . 5 10
Table F1. Mlniconve rter RS232 Port . . . f 2
Table 53. Range and Size of User Rderences for CPU Models 311 -3 41 5 11
Table F2 Mlnl co nverter RS-422 Pon f 2
Tabl e 54 Ra nge and Slzl' o f User References for CPU Models 350 through 364 5 12
Table 55. Pon 1 (RS232) . 5-2 I
Table F3 Mlnlconvencr Speci ficat ions f'
Thble 11 TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table ) 2
Tabl. 5-6_ POri 2 (RS-.85) 52 1
Table KI Connector and Cable Spec lO cations K2
Table 7 1. IC693DV M300 Spectncal lons 715
Table 72 IC693DVM300 Connecllo ns 716
Thble 73. Se ries 9030 Discrete I/ O Modules 7-17
'Iable 74. Serles 9030 Analog I/ O Modules 7 17
Table 8 1 Comparison ofTCM302 and TCM303 839
Table 9 \ System Spcctncatlon'l for Se ri es 9030 Sta te logic CPUs . 9 12
Table 10 ] Series 9030 Cable CrossReference 10 1
Table to 2. Expansio n Port Pin Assignments . 1026
'Ihble 103 Wire L1sl for 32 Polnt l/ OCables . 1041
Table 104. Wire L1sl for 24l'ln Co nnectors 10, 3
Table 105. Catalog Numbers fo r 24Pln Connector Kits . 10'6
Table 106 I/O Cable Wire Cod ing for IC693CBL3 11 and IC693CBL319 1047
labl. 10-7_ I/ O Cabl. Wire Coding ror IC693CBL317 and IC693CBLlZO 10' 8
Thbl e 108 Ca talog Numbers for 24Pin Connector Ki ts ... 1050
Table 109. Wire List ror 24 -Pln Connectors 1051
Table 10 10 Catalog NU lnbcrs for 24-Pln Con nector Kits . 1059
Table 10 11. Wire List for 24Pln Connectors 1060
Table 1012. TBQC Cable Cross Reference Table 10G3

CFK-0356P Tablt orCoIJttnts xxv xxvi Strlts 90-30 PLC InstlJllatlon and Hardware Milflual - Ocrobtr 1999 CFK0.156P

Chapter Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC
1 are buill Into basep lates, but most arc con tained In plug-In modules. In some cases, the
TIle Series 9O T... . 30 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Is a member of the CE Fanuc
Series 90'" PLC family,
The Basic ParIs of a Series 9030 PLC
The Series 9030 PLC Is very versat ile because (J) Ills programmable. and (2) II Is
assembled from a wide variety o f modular, plug-togethe r components . Therefore , by
choosing the correct components a nd df've loplng an appropriate program, the PLC can
be used for an almoSI unlimited varlelY of applications. Altho ugh there are many
choices of IndiVidu al hardware components to use In 8 system, there are Just a few basic
ca tegories Each of these compo nent categories Is covered In detail In a scpo rate chapter
In th is manual. They are Introduced In this chapter so you ca n see how they nt together:
Baseplates
Power Supp lies
CPU.
I/ OModuies
Option Modules
Cables
Baseplates
The baseplates are the foundatio n o f the PLC system beca use most other components
mount on them. As a basic minimum , every system has at least one base plate, which
usua lly contains the CPU (In w hich case. It Is referred to as "the CPU Bascplate~) . Many
systems require more modules than ca n be mounted o n one baseplate. so the re are also
Expansion and I~emote baseplates that connect together. So, there are three different
categories of basepla tes; CPU, Expansio n. and Remote. Also. each o ft hcse Is available In
two sizes. 5'5101 and 10sI0t. named according to Ihe number of modu les they can hold .
Power Supply Modules
Every basepla te. w hether a CPU , Expa nsio n, or Re mote baseplate. and whether a 5-s10 t
or 10slot size, must have Its own power supply. The power supply always mounts In a
baseplate's left most slol. There are several power supply models available to meet a
variety of reqUirements.
GFK0356P /./
"""'
o
CPUs
The CPU Is the manager of the PLC. Every PLC system must have one. A CPU uses the
Instructions In Its nrmware and application program to direct the PLC 's operation a nd to
monitor (he the system to make sure there are no basic faults. Some Series 9030 CPUs
CPU resides In a I'ersonal Computer using a Personal Computer Interface Card Ihal
Interfaces to Series 9030 Input, Output, and Option modules
Inpllt and Output 010) Modules
These modules enable the PLC to Interface with Input and ou tpu t field devices such as
switches, sensors, relays. and solenoids . They are ava ilable In both discrete and analog
types.
Option Modules
The~e modules extend the capabillty of the PLC beyond the basic fllncllons These
provide such things as co mmu nications and networking options, motio n cOlma!. hi gh
speed counti ng. temperature co nl rol. Interfacing to operator Interface stations. etc.
Cables
These co nnect the PLC componen ts toget her or to other systems, Many sta ndard
prefabricated cab les are available from CE Fanuc. They are primarily used to
Interconnect baseplates
Connect a programmer to the CPU or to an option module
Connect option modules to neld devices or other systems.
Assembling a Basic Series 9030 PLC SYSlem
LeI'S assemble, on paper, a basic system using the rollowlng components:
Baseplate
Power Supp ly Inodul e
CP U module
Some l /O moduies
We'll sta rt with the baseplate. To keep It simple, we'll use a 5s101 size. Note that a 5-510t
baseplate actually has six slots, but the power su pply slot Is not numbered . Note also.
that this baseplate has a CPU slot , which Is slot number I. and It has an expansion
connector o n the right end , which Is used for connec ting to another basep late If the
system has more than one baseplate.
/2 Series 9030 PtC Installation arid Hardwart Manual - Occobtr /999 GFK0356P
 --.....

OJ o
Then. a CPU module . A CPU l1lodulecan only mount In baseplate slot 1, next to the
power supply. Sial 1 has a unique connector that will only Ot CPU or special Option
...'" modules.

~
CPU304D

"~?~,\"lI

Memory 9ac~up =
...u .....-....
_ o_~".
!lOBus
Expansion

~,
. ... \ .. 1 .... .
Warning Libel 'o,, ~_~ Connector

~ o~. 0_ '-0
--- CPU SIOI (Slot 1)

figure 1-1 . flveSlot CPU Baseplate

""
figure H . CPU Module
Next. we'll add a powcrsuppJy module It mounts In the unnumbered sial on the left
n,
end o r the l,1a..epla te This slol has a unique conneCtor thai will only a power supply 10 nnlsh, we wtll add some 110 mod ul es to baseplate SIOlS 2 through S.
module

[EJ

figure 1-4. UO Module

figure 12. Power Supply Module

CI'K0356P Chapltr J O~'er"ltlV of the StrltS 90-30 PLC }3 }4 Strles 9030 PLC ll1sta/larlon and Hardware Manual- October 1999 CFK0356P
 OJ CD
this:

1====== ...
""

IIJ '~~~I~

0)
,o:ll
_~f_"" :t
::

i~- 'ii

/
7 Figure 1-6. A Basic System

An assembly of baseplate and modules such as (his one Is called a "Rack"

What else would be needed to make this basic system functional?

1b make this basic system functional. you would need :
Mounting, Sa fe. secure mounting for the PLC. preferably In a prOH!Clive enclosure.
Wiring. This Includes properly Installed Incoming power to the power supply, as
we ll as wiring from the 1/0 modules to ncld devices such as switches. sensors.
solenOids. rclays. etc.
Program An application program for the PLC to run. This Is developed with CE
Fanue PLC programming software.

What if the application requires more than five modules?

Powe r Supply You could use a 10-5101 baseplate. shown In the next picture:
CPU

Figure ' 5. Assembling the System

When assembled. the system wlJilook like ...

CFKOJS6P Chaplef I Overview or tilt StrltS 9030 PLe J-S 1-6 $tries 9030 PLe Installation alld Hardwsll! Manual- October 1999 CFK-OJ561'
 OJ o
. ~" The next figure shows a system that has a CPU baseplate. one Expa nston rack and three
Remote racks. Notice that the last rack, the one at the end of the (/ 0 Expansion Bus.
must be terminated. A convenien t way or termlnatlng the bus Is with an !C693ACC307
1/0 BusTermlnator Plug. as shown.

CPU
BAS EPLATE
pA~ITirrn II ~I "~ M'~~

Milmrm .r~
EXPANSION
BASEPLATE

MAXtMUMOISTANCE
110 Bus Expansion Connector FROM CPu=SO FEET
(1S METERS) 11
Figure 1-7. TenSlot Raok

REMOTE BASEPLATE rtJ ~

~I b(
What if the application requires more than ten modules? REMOTE
BASEPLATE
YOli ca n add one or more Expansion or Remote racks to thiS system Some CPUs can
support up to seven additional racks. If you added seven addltional l Oslol racks, you
RA 111 111111 ..

1Jm+~
could have 70 more modules.
Racks are Interconnected In a "dalsychaln" cabli ng arrangement. Th is interconnection
system Is called the " 110 Expansion Bus," The connections are made rrom one REMOTE
baseplate's 1/0 Bus ExpanSion ConneclOr (shown In the Ogure above) to the next ones. BASEPLATE
The I/ O Bus Expa nsion Cables, shown below, have a double COlllleClor on one end to

r.
facilitate these connecllons.

FEM,t,LE REMOTE
CONNEC TOR
BASEPLATE

D==c
.----------, REMOTE BASEPLATE

MAXIMUMOISTANCE
FROM CPU- 700 FEET
(213METERS)
R~ 111111111 ~I "" ~~~'~~~OR "IIIIl""'" . - - - - PLUG
IC693ACC307

"".
CO'oI"ECTOft "'"
CO~NECTOIt

Figure 19. Coonecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates

Figure 18. VO Bus Expansion cable
What is the Difference Between Expansion and Remote baseplates?
The maI n factor to conSider Is distance. How far will the baseplate be rrom the CPU
baseplate? If the cabling dIstance from the CPU baseplate Is 50 feet (15 meters) or less.
use an Expansion baseplate. The Expansion baseplate is preferable because of Its h igher
communication s peed with the CPU basep late. However, If a baseplate must be located
where It requires a cabling distance from the CPU rack In excess of 50 feel. an Expansion
baseplate wl1\ nol work - a Remote baseplate must be used . The limit for a RemOie
basep late Is a cabling distance of 700 fecI (213 meters) fr om the CPU baseplate to the
farthest Remote baseplate .

CFK0356P Chsl'ttr I OVt'rvltw of rllt' St'ries 9030 PLe /7 / 8 Strit'S 9030 PLC Installaf/on and Hardware Manua/- Ocrobtr /999 CFK035GP
 IT]

I2
What ill need to cover more than 700 leet (213 meters) ?
You ca n cover much grealer dlsta llces by using Series 9030 communications option
modules For exam ple. Cenlus Bus Contro ller Modules (CRC) can communicate a l
distances up to 7.500 feet (2.286 meters) over a s hielded twistedpalr (able. as s hown In
Example I below. Or. serial communica tions with Commu nications Coprocessor
Mod ules (CMM ) using the RS485 standard ca n cove r up to 4.000 feel (1.219 meters). as
Ch ter !l::::n::::st::::a::::
l1a::::t::::
io::::
n========================
shown tn Examp le 2 below. And virtually unlimited communication distances ca n be
attained with mode ms and telephone lines or radIo transmluers. Also. there are
numerous networking options available such as Et her net or WorldFIP.
Thlschaptcr d iscusses Installation details only, Ot her Infor mation about the products
such as hardware descrlpllons and speclncatlons, are covered In the applicable chapter,
Exa mple 1 - GBC Example 2 - CMM - Important Note -
The Insfallarlan InSlrucrians described In eMs chapler apply ca PLe insfa/Jatlans

,~ ..,
Series 90-30 PLC
,~
S.rI.s~30PLC

,-
chat do noc requ/rr special proctdurrs for noisy or hazardous envlronmems. For
IllsrallatJoru Ihac must cotJform to more sCritJgclIf requlremetJts (such as CE
Mark). see GFK-11 79, lnsta llauon Req ulrenlt nuforCollformanct to

h~ l~
Stnndards. Alsosee CFK-0867, CE Fanuc Produce Agency Approvals,
Sea ndards,Ct neralSpec mca UOIIS.
0 0

Receiving your Products - Visual Inspection

l
Shlekled, TWltted-PairClbll, 7,500 "
l
S.rlalCable,4 ,OOOFul (1,219 "
When you receive your Series 9030 PLC system . carefully Inspect all shippi ng contai ners
for damage that may have occurred duri ng s hi pping. If any part of the sys tem Is
damaged, noU fy the carrier Immediate ly. The damaged shipping cont ai ner should be
Flel (2. 268 Melersl Ma!dmum Lenglh MeIers) Mall/mum Length saved as evidence for InspeCtion by the carrier.
As the conSignee. It Is your responsibility to register a cla im w ith the carrier for damage
that happ ened during sh ipment. However, CE Fanuc will full y cooperate with you If
such action Is necessary.
Setlel9030 PLC S.nN~30PLC Pre-installation Check

~~-111111111 ~ , ~~-II ~ III II ~ ,

Nter unpacking Series 90-30 PLe racks. cables. modu les. etc" record al l serial nu mbers,
Serial numbers are printed on the module packaging. Serial numbers are required to make it
claim during the warranty period of the equlpmellt. All software product reglstratkm cards
should be completed and returned to CE Fan uc. See the ~ Module Features~ section in thls
chapter for location of module serial numbers. See the ~Co mmon Baseplate Features
M

section In the "Ba.scplates citaplcr for locat iOn of basep late serial numbers.
You should verify that all components of the system have been received and that they
agree w ith your order. If Ihe parts received do not agrec with your order. call
Programmable Co nt rol Customer Service, loll free. In Charlo ttcsv ille. VA al
1800432 7521 . A Customer Service representative will provide further Instructions
figure 1-10. Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules If you require assista nce w ith your Installa tion, the GE Famlc Teclmlcal Service Horllne
personnel In Charlottesville. VA are available to help you, North America n customers
should ca ll toll free at J800CE FANUC (18004332682). International customers
sho uld dia l direct 8049786036, The GE Fan uc web site support address Is
M

www.8tfanuc.comlsupportlpIcChapterI3 . Malntenance and Troubleshootlng has

additional telepho ne numbers a nd troubleshooting Information.

Warranty Claims
Record the serial number o f the defective Item and contact your distributor for
Instructions,

CFK0356P Chapter J Overview of rhe Series 9030 PLC / 9 CFK0356P 2- /

o o
Working with Series 9030 Modules Installing a Module
Module Features
o @ o o- @
-
[waming I

CD
"" lr1 :::----
- -c:::::J
I

r------- r-- - 0)
00 not Insert or rr:nlOVI! modules wllh powerappllcd. This could
cause the PLC to SlOp or ma lfunct lun. Injury to perso n nel and damage
to Ihe module or baseplate may result . Also. attempts to fo rce a
module into an Improper sial type will result In damage to the modu le
anti/or Ih e baseplate. Modul es "", III 1II0U I11 III the correct slot type
easily. with a minimum of force.

111111111111111111 0 Use the followil1glnslructlons as a guide wilen Inserting a module Into a baseplate slot.
ICMlCPUXJ(X 0
CD - ... CPU~ULE
n"'"
Check thaI module ca lalog number matches slot connguratlon. Each slot Is. or will
be. assigned a particular module type during connguratlo n. A Power Supply
module must be Installed In the left end unnumbered slot o nly, and a CPU module

-0 0
LISTED a nd some special Option modules can only be Installed In Sial I of a CPU base plale
o - 12~~IH

110 Modules and most Opt ion modules Insta ll In 51015 numbered 2 and higher.
Grasp the module nrmly with terminal board toward you a nd w ith rear pivot hook
, -- @ facing away from you.
11111111111 Align the module w ith the desired baseplate slot and connector. Tilt the modulr
.- .. 11loIS4!'
upwards so that top rear pivot hook of the module engages the baseplate's top
module retainer.

o . Swi ng the module downward ulllll the module's connector engages the baseplate 's
backplane connector. and the release lever on tht:' bottom of the module snaps Into
place In the baseplate 's bottom module retainer.
0 Visually Inspect the module to be sure that lilt properly seated.
CD (1-1--- c:::::J It

I I I I
o 00
FMJure 21. Features of Series 9030 Module
I. Pivot hook BACKPLANE
2. Ci rcuIt board ho ld ing tabs (two on each side of module) CONNECTOR
3, Catalog number and description secll on of label
4, Certlncatlon (U L, CE, elc.) sectio n of label
S. Module connector - plugs Into baseplate backplane connector
6 Release lever - spring loaded
7. Ventilation openings In module case (top and bottom)
8. Front cover holding tabs (two on each side of mod ule)
9 Front cover (shown) or terminal board (for 1/ 0 modules) .
lQ, Frunt cove r faceplate or hinged cover for ter minal board ,
11 . Lens cap (some modules d o not have) .
12 Lens ca p hold ing tabs (one o n each side of module)
13 Module label
14 Serial Number - used to determine module warranty status. Note thaI o n some
modules. the Se ria l Number may be on a small tag on the back of the module. Figure 22. Installing a Mod ule

22 Suits 9030 PLC iflstallaf/ofl and Hardwart Manual - Oclobtr J999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter 2 Instal/allan 23
o o
Removing a Module
,-warning,
00 not Insert or remove modul es with power app li ed. Thi s could
cause the PLC to stop or malrunction . Injury to personnel and dam age
10 the module or baseplate lIlay result. Also pOiemlally da ngero us
vo ltages rrom user d evices maybe present on a module's screw
termi n als even though power to the ra ck Is turned orr. Care must be
taken any time that you are handling the module 's removable ter minal
board or any wires connected 10 It.
If the module has wiri ng. remove the modu le's terminal board (NOTE: You do nOl
have ro unw ire the termina l board) or cables. The procedure for removing a
terminal board is described laler In this section.
Locate the release lever at the boltom of the module and n rrnly press It up. towards
the module.
Whlle holding the mod ule nr rnly at Its top a nd rully depreSSi ng release lever. swing
(pivot) the modu le upward (releasE' lever musl be fr ee o f lIs retaining sial)
Disengage pivot hook allhe lOp rear of the module by moving the modu le up and
away from the basepl ate
Installing a Module's Tenninal Board
Note: Modules IC693MDL730F (a nd later) and IC693 MDL731 r- (and later) have special
terminal boards that are equ ipped whh holdi ng screws For Insta lla tion and Removal
Instructions, please see the seella n ~ Installi ng a nd Removi ng Termi nal Boards wIth
Hold Ing Screws later In this chapter.
To install a termi nal board:
Hook the plVOl hook<D. located on the bottom o r the terminal board. to the lower
slot on the module.
I'ush the termina l board towards the nlod uleQ> until It s naps in to place.
Open the termina l board coverQ) and ens ure that the latch on the mod ule 15
securely holding the termina l board In place
Caution'
Compare the modul e catalog number on Ihe labe l on the back of tile Illnged
dour (see Figu re 26) and Ihe labe l o n the side or the module (see below) to
ensure Ihalthey match. If a wi red termina l board Is Instal led on the wrong
module ' YI)e. damage to th e module may occur when the system Is powered
up.

~~~
PI VOT H OO K

"
o
Modul.
LIMI
-----+-+-

PRESS
RELEASE LEVER

Figure 23. Removing a Module

figure 2~ . Inslalling an VO Module's Terminal Board
Note
Modu les in ex pansion o r remote base plates ca n be added. removed. or
replaced while the PLe Is In RUN mode If powe r Is nrsl removed from
Ihe expansion or remOte baseplate. liD dala to/ fr om Ihls basepl ate will
not bt' updated w hile power Is removed .

2-4 Suit'S 9030 PLC Insrallaflon and Hardwat't' M anual. Ckcober 1999 CFK-OJ56P CFK-OJ56P C/Japrt'r 2 i nstallallou 2-5
o [1]
Removing a Module's Terminal Board 110 Module Terminal Board PoslS
To re move a termI nal boa rd: Notice that the te rm Inal board has th ree posts a ll the left sIde. The top and bottom posts
hold the terminal board cover In place. The purpose of the m iddle POSI is to keep the
Open the plastic termi nal board cover. te rmi nal board wiring In place. This midd le post ca n be easily snapped o ff If you do not
Push up o n the Jac king lever to release the tenn lnal block. requ ire It to ho ld the w irI ng In place.
Since minimal force Is requ ired to snap ofT the midd le post yo u should be ca refu l that
~~
,-- .~
M'" you d o nmi nadvencmly snap It ofT If you arc usI ng It to keep you r wi rIng In place.

,.~~ ..,~ ~r--- Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws
Discreteou tplil modules IC693M DL730F (and la ter) and IC69 3M OL7J IF (and later)
have a specla ller ml nal board that Is eq ui pped w ith holding screws. s hown In the ngure
below These sc rews prevent the ter min al board ta-module connectio ns rrom
d eteriorati ng In applica tions w here the PLC Is subjected to severe vibrati on .
..3011:8

:;~~: ::::F
,_ II,,..,C_

R_MlI.T_lao.,d - 1 -

Grasp pu ll tab and pu ll It towards you u ntil co ntact.!. have separated rrom mod u le
housing and bottom pivot hoo k has disengaged
.=.

PJ II1 1']1 """"",,,M"",.',C"".. N._.

I

Figure 2-6. Terminal Board witl1 Holding Strews

RemOVing: To Remove these terminal boards. n rstloosen the two hold ing scr('ws on
the rront or the terminal board, then rollow the sta nda rd removal Instruct ions In the
seci!on ~Removl n g an 110 Mod ule's ler m lnal Board." The ho ldl nB screws are held
ftgure 25. Removing a Modute's Terminal Board ca pt ive In the te rmi nal board and do not have to be completely removed,
Installi ng: To Install these terminal boards, rollow the stand ard Installation
Instructions In the secllon "Installi ng an 110 Mod u le's Term inal Boa rd." then tighten
the two holding screws to 8 to 10 Inch po unds (I Newlonmeter) o r torq ue,

26 Sules 9030 PLC {nstallatlon and Hardware Manual. OCloiJer 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter 2 Installation 27
 --..

IT] [}]

Baseplate Mounting "')7"'"

InI.ff fK.V .croWl (I ., /Cp, , . , bOllorn)
trom ~cJ/ or~.. IIn/f ""Ougll 0. vrll'f
. nd MeA.! 1,9n1'II.aII.... /0 UCUI.
fNltcbr 10 c." uM

[ Warn51
Be sure to roll ow base pl ate grou nd ing Instructions In this chapter.
Fa ilure to properly grollnd Ihe PlC can res ult In Imprope roperal lon ,
damage to c<lul pment . a nd Inju ry (0 personnel.

Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel

Use four good -qual ity 832 x 112 (4 x 1211101) machine screws, lock washers and nat
Note; e .. eplate I. shown wllh cove r removed for illustration purpose . II
\Va~h ers Install the screws In four 832 tapped holes. The M Baseplates chapter has
M

Is not n.e .... ry 10 remove the baseplate eov.r to InstaU the brackat.
the applicable dimensions and mou nting clea rances. Alterna tely. 10-5101 baseplates
can be mounted In standard 19-1nch racks by using the appropriate adapter. This Is
also discussed in the M8asepiaies chapter.
M

Figure 2-7. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation

A vertlca llllou ming o rientation Is preferred for maximum heat dlssipallon. Other
Illoullt lng orie ntations will req u ire derating the Power Supply current capabil ities. Dimensions ror rack mounting a lOslot baseplate wit h the IC693ACC308 Front Mount
See Chapler 12, "Syste m Design. - ror details. Adapter Bracket are shown in the following ngll re.
All baseplates m ust be groUlldcd . The Basep lale Sarety Cro llnd ln8~ section or thi s
chapter has details
18.89
.1
.. ~,

~
(480)
18 47 _ _- ,
The Rack Number Selecllon switch must be set on each Expansion or Remote

J J J J Jd-1
basep late A CPU base pl ate docs not reqLllre Ihls switch, Rack numbers should be

~I
ass igned by the system d es igner. Failure to set the Rack Number Selection switches
properly will resui lin system malruncllon See Ihe "Baseplates- chapter rOf details I
o n setti ng these switches. I'-' "
I r-
Mounting a Baseplate to a 19" Rack
I
I
1\vo optional Baseplale Adapter Brackets allow a 10-slot baseplate to be mounted In a 19

~n
I
Inch rack. Each baseplate Inslallallon requires only o ne or IIle adapter brackets. @ C;
I
IC693ACC308 Front Mou nt Adapter Bracket. Used to mount a baseplate to the --'
rront race o r a 1 9~ rack Install the adapter bracket by Inserting the tabs at the lOp
and bottom of the adapter brac ket Into the cor respond ing SIOIS at the top and DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES)
bOllom or tht' plastic baseplate cover. NOTE: Alth ough the n gure below shows the
plastic baseplate cover removed , th is Is ror illustrat ion purposes only. It Is not Figure 2-11. Dimensions for 19" Rack MOl.I1ting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket
necessary to remove the cove r to Install the bracket. VVlth the bracket tn p lace, Insert
and tighten the two screws (Included w llh the bracket) through the back or the
baseplate holes Into the threaded holes In the bracket
IC693ACC3 13 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to rC(css mount it baseplate
Inside a 19" rack. A baseplate mounts 0 11 the rear panel or this adapter bracket using
four 832 (4 mm) screws, nu ts, lockwashers and nat washers. The Adapter Bracket
bolts thro ugh Its four sloucd ho les to the rac!" of the 19- rack using applicable
hardware (lockwasllers recommended) .

28 Series 9030 PLC Installation and HardwBrf Matlual- OctoiJtr 1999 CFK0356P CFK-0356P Chapter Z tlJSrallat/oll 29
 ,-

o IT]
01 .. totl ... .
Grounding Procedures
System Grounding Procedures

[. waming-I
In addition to the foll owing grounding Information , we strongly urge
that yo u follow al l app li cabl e codes that apply to your area. For
examp le. In the United Statu, lIlost areas have adop ted the Naliom,1
Electrlc,,1 Code standard and speci fy that all w iri ng co nform to lis
requirements. In other counlrles. different codes wil l apply. For
maxi mum safety ( 0 perso nnel alld property you muS( fo llow Ihese
OI'-llNSIONS I'" INeHlS tllllLUlliUE'" r... P"",,,HTt<SU)
cudes . Failure 10 do so can mean Injury or dea th to perso nnel, damage
to pro perty, or both.
All componenls of a programmab le logic cOnlrol system and the devices II Is controlli ng
must be properly grounded This Is particularly Important for the following reasons.
A low resistance path from all paris of a system to earth minimizes exposure to
shock In the even! of short Clrcul LS or equipment malfunction .
The Series 90-30 PLC system requtre~ proper grounding fo r correct operation.
The imparlance ora propergroulJdingcatllJot beover-emplJasized.

GroundConductors
Figure 29. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket Ground conductors should be connected In a tree fashion with branches routed to a
central eanh ground poi nt. shown In the ngure be low. This ensu res that no ground
conductor carrlcs currellt frol1l any other branc h. This method Is shown In the
following figure
Ground conductors should be as shari and as large In size as possible. Braided
straps or ground cables (typically green Insulation with a yellow tracer AWG NI2
(3.3 rnl1l z) or larger) ca n be used to mlnhn lze resistance. Cond uctors must always be
large enough to carry the maximum short circuit CU I rent of the path being
considered
M
""
SERIES 90-30 MOTOR DRIVES MACHINERY
PLC CABINET AND OTHER
ELECTRICAL
~ CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
PROGRAMMING
DEVICE
~

SIGN~ M-IO POWER

CONNECTIONS
ARE NOT SHOWN

Figure 210. Recommended System Grounding

2 /0 Strt~ 90-30 pt e Installation and HanflVare Manual - Octobtr 1999 GFK0356P GFK0356P Chapur 2 IllsraIJalion 211
 ;-
,-. . .--....

o o
Series 9030 PLC Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below. TIlcse
grounding procedures must be properly followed for safe. proper operaLion oryour Series
9030 PLC system.
Baseplate Safety GrWlling
nle following recommendations are orrered. but appUcab\e ~ felY codes for your area or
equipment type should also be consu lted . The baseplate's metal back must be grounded
using a separate Inductor: the baseplate mou nt ing screws are not considered 10 an
All baseplates grouped together In a Series 9030 PLC system must have a common ground
connectIOn . TIlls is especially Important ror ba:,.cplates thaI are not mounted In the same
control cabinet.
Grounding 19" RackMounted Baseplates
There are two Adapter Brackets used for mounting a IOslot Series 9030 baseplate to a
1 9~ Rack. Regardless of w hich of the tWO Adapter Brackets Is used. the 1 9~ Rack should
be grounded as per the [nstruclions In "System Grounding Procedures. ~ Includ ing Figure
2 10. (For details on the Ada pter Brackets. see the "Mounllng a Baseplate to a 19" Rack M

acreptable ground connection by thcmsetves. Use a minimum AWe ' 12 (3.3 mm~ wire
Wllh a ring ter minal and star lock washer under the head of one of the basepla te's two
lower mounting holes. nlcse two Iloles have openings \0 the side 10 allow connecLing a
wire and ring terminal under the head of a mounting screw Connect the olher end of this
ground wire to a Lapped hole In the panel that the baseplate Is mounted 10. using a machine
screw. Sl iH lock washer. and Oat washer. Ahernately. If your prlnel has a ground stud. II is
recommendcd you use a nut and star lock washer for each wire on tile ground stud 10
ensure adequate grounding. Where connections are made 10 a painted panel. the paint
should be removed so clean. bare metalls exposed at the connection point. Terminals and
sec lion ea rlier In thiS chapter.)
Nlneteen lnch Rack mo unted PLC baseplates s hou ld be g rollnded accordi ng to the
M
guidelines In the "Basep late Sa fety Ground lng section. us ing a separate grou nd wire
from the PLC baseplate as shown In the previous n gure (Fig 211) .
If uSi ng the Recessed Moum Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC3 13). the ground wire can
be Installed as s hown In Figure 2 11 with the ground attached to the Recessed
Mount Adapter Bracket. An add itional grou nd wire connecting the Adapter Bracket
to a solid chassis grou nd ol1lhe 19 Rack should be Installed . Use the same or
M

hardware used should be: rated to work with the aluminum baseplate material. equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown In Figure 2 11 .
If using the Surface Mount Adapter Bracket (I C693ACC308) , the grou nd w ire
s hould be run from the baseplate as shown In Figure 21 1. to a solid chaSSiS ground
on the 19 " Rack Use the sa rne or eq uiva lent hardware a nd paint removal scheme as
s hown In Figure 2 11.

I~ 'm~:tt"I~'
Programmer Grounding
For proper operation. the compu ter (programmer) running the PLC software must have
CiiiiiiiJ a g round connection [n common with the CPU baseplate. Normally. this com mon
~~
g round connection Is provided by ensu ring that the programmer 's power cord [s
AWGI'12or
La'gerWlre connected to the same power sou rce (with the sa me grou nd reference point) as the

"
., _. bastpla te. If It Is not poss [ble to ensure th is COlllmon grollnd scheme. use a port Isolator
(lC690.A.CC903) between the programmer and PLC se rial connection. If the programmer

cl,_
C""'" li'Oo~ IOJ"""""""" 100-0
- _T ground is at a different potential than the PLC ground, a s hock ha7.ard could exist Also.
o ........ o damage to the portS or converter (I f used) coulcl occu r w hen the programmer serial cable
Is connected between the two.
/
Screw. Slar Lock washer.
A"erNlle IOcallon
for Ground conneclion I Waming I
\ FhU Walher. Ring TermInal.
Inl talled in tapped hole
PatntRan'\Oved
From Panel Here
Failure to follow programmer grou nding recoll1me ndatio ns cou ld
result In personal Injury. e<lu lpmcnt damage. o r b oth.
Figure 211 . BasoplaleGrounding

I Warning I
All baseplates must be grounded to minimize electrlcal s hock hazard.
FaUlI11! to do so un result In severe personal InJury.

2 12 Strit5 9030 PLe JlIstaJJatloll a/Jd Hard",,/! Manual - Oclobtr 1999 GFK0356P GFK0356P Cliapter 2 Installation 213

o IT]
M<XUe Slield Gromcing
In general. the alu minum PLC baseplate Is used for module shield grounding, On some
Series 9030 modules. shield connections to the user terminal connector on the module
are routed to the baseplate through the module 's backplane connector. Other modules,
such as CPUs 35 1. 352. 363. and 36~. require a separate sh ield ground. These are
discussed In the next several sections.
Shield Grounding Information for CPUs with External Pori Connections
CPUs with external port connections. the 351. 352, 363, and 364, must have a separate
shi eld ground connection which provides shi eldi ng for these ports. The design of the
ground connection for the CPU35 1 and 352 Is different from that of the CPU363 and 364-
so each grounding method Is discussed in a separate heading.
CPU351 and 352 Shield Grounding
The CPU 35 1 or 352 module ll1ust be connected to frame ground at the slot w here II Is
Instailed Two methods are provided for making this ground connettlon. Each CPU
cOllles with all EMC Grounding Kit (4 4A737591GOI) that contains a ground wire.
grounding bracket. and screws.
The connection from the CPU 10 frame ground can be made using the ground wire
(part nUlllber 44A735910001 ROI) that cOllle~ w ith the module In the EMe
Groundi ng Kit This wire has a stab on connector on one end for connection to a
mating terminal on the bottom of the CPU. and a ri llg terminal on the other end for
connection 10 a grounded enclosure_ Where the ring terminal comaCls a palmed
enclosure panel. either a star lock washer can be Installed between the terminal and
the panel to cu t through the paint. or the paint can be scraped away down to clean,
bare metal to ensure a good contact Note: The sta r lock washer method is
suitab le ror a shie ld ground, but 02UUllable Cor a safelYground
",V"OHO,.!
M600VE ....!HT UNClf"
II:IHG IfllM' ........ OIIIINSfAI.I.
'IA" lOCI(W"-SII!" IflWtlN
u" ... '.......
AAION.NII!L
Figure 2 12, CPU 351 or 352 Attaching Ground Wire
214 SerIes 9030 PLC IlIslalJarlorl ilnd Hardware ManuBI- Oct~r 1999 CFK~0356P
~-
2. The second method. which can be used for systems In noisy environments consists
of Installing the green ground wire and the optional grounding bracket (part
number 44C715646001ROI) This bracket attaches to the CPU using two 14
threadrolling screws (part mllnber N666P9004BG) and to the grounded enclosure
using IwO JIG thread -rolling screws (parl llulllbcr N666PI3006B6) . 'Rvo holes must
be drilled In the enclosure for mounttng th is bracket. Also. trthe bracket will be
attached to a painted surface, Iht> paint sho uld be removed down to bare metal
under the bracket to ensure good contact between the bracket and the surface. See
the next ngurt",
.... !I~\ . A
'M\
CPU35' or 352
44C115B4~a1Ra1
8RACl<ET "''1'11 "lo,oQ\llO""I!"
'lII.AC.:fT...c)UNlSfO ..... U
"","
......
'llIIUoIl IIOltlHO
,-.5Cf11EWI
Figur. 213, CPU 351 or 352 Mounting Gr...,ding Bra cket
Note: When the grounding bracket Is used. pin I of the cabl e connector that plugs Into
the Port 2 connettor should not be connected . A metal connector shell must be used on
the cable for this pOri. and the cable shield must be terminated at the metal shell Instead
of pin I of the connector.
CPU363 and CPU364 Shield Grounding
The CPU363 and CPU364 modules must be connected to frame ground at the slot where
they are Installed. Each module comes with a grounding wire for thiS purpose . These
modules do not SliPPOr! or require the use of a grounding bracket. If the ring terminal
on the grounding wire Is to be mounted to a painted surface. remove the paint under
the ring termina l to ensure good contact. or place a star lock washer between the ring
terminal and the painted surface . See the next ngure. Note: The star lock washer
method Is suitab le for a shield grou nd . but om suilabl e fo r a sau: ty K[QumL
CFK0356P Chapter 2 Installar/oll 215
 -.....

o o
General Wiring Guidelines

I Warning I
In addition to the following w iring suggestio ns, we stro ngly urge that
you follow ,,11 wiring and safety codcs that apl) ly to yO UT area or you r
type of equipment. For example. In Ihe United States, most areas have
" ' - ' :0+<01.1
adopted the Nationa l Electrica l Code standard and spedfy that all
wiring conform to Its requirements. In other countries, different codes
lIe.woVl!""INJIJO<IOIIII will app ly. For maximum safety to personne l and property you must
II'!40 I"IIIIMitW.01'1 IH5T"ll
lTotJIlOCJt .......... III.fWf.EN
lI"1Ortl'l" '<AI.AAIO~l follow these codcs. Failure to do so ca n lead 10 personalll1Jury or
d eath. propen y damage or destruction , or both.

Color Coding Wires

These color codes are com mo nly used In Industrial equipment manufactured In the
Figure 214. CPU 363 or CPU364 Attacf1ing GrO<l1d Wire Uniled Stales , They are clled here as a reference. Where they are In connlct w llh codes
that apply to your area or your Iype of equipment. you shou ld follow your applicable
codes Instead Besides sati sfying code require ments, wire color coding makes testi ng
Additional Modules with Shield Grounding Requirements and trou bleshooting sa fer. faster. and easier

Some of the Series 9030 Optio n modu les, such as the FIP Remote I/ O Sca nner Gree n or gree n with strlpe- Ground
(l CG93 BEM330), and DSM modules (IC693DSM302 and IC693DSM314) also have shield Blac k - Primary AC
grounding requirements, These Inod ules come equipped with su itable grou nd ing
Red - Secondary AC
hardware. Please refer to eac h modlll e's user 's manual for grounding Instructions,
Appendix I contai ns a prod uct to publication cross-re ference 10 help you Identify the Blue - DC
correct manual White - Comlnon or neutral
Yellow - Secondary power source not COlli rolled by the main disconnec t. Alerts
maln tcna nce personnel thaI there may be power present (from an external
source) even If the equipmen t Is disconnected from Its main power source.

Wire Routing
To reduce no ise coupling a mong PLC wires. II Is recommended you keep electrically
no iSYwiring. such as AC power w iring and Discrete Output Module wiring, physically
separated rrom low- level slgn,,1 wiring such as DC and Analog Input module w irIng or
communica tions cabl es. TIlls ca n be accomp\lshed by grou ping separately, w here
prac tical, the foll owing categories orwlrlng'
AC powe r wiring. This Includes the AC Input to the PLC power supply, as
well as olher AC devices In the control cablne!.
Ana log Input o r Output Module wiring, This should be s hie ld ed to rurt her
reduce noise cou pling See the Series 90-30 VO Module SpecJncatlofls Manual.
GFK 0898 for details ,
Discrete Output Modul e wiring. These often switc h Inductive loads that
produce noise spikes w hen switched ofT.
DC In put Module wiring. Although suppressed IllIernally, these low level
Inputs sho uld be furth er protccted against no ise coupli ng by observing
these wiring practices.

2 16 Series 9030 PLC /"stal1a r/o" alld Hardware Ma lluil! - Ocrober J999 GFK0356P GFK0356P C/raprer 2 instal/alion 2 17
IT!
Communications Cables. Wiring slich as Cenlus Bus or seria l cables should
be kept away from noise-producing wiring.
Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near nolsesensltlve signal wiring
bundles. avoid running them beside each other. Route them so that. If they have to
cross, they do so al a rlglll angie. This wtll minimize coupling between thell1 .
GroupingModules to Keep Wires Segregated
If practical. grouping similar modules together Inlhe PLC racks can help keep wiring
segregated . For example. one rack could contain on ly AC modules. and a dlrrerent rack
only DC modules. with further grouping In each rack by Input and output types. For
smaller systems. as an example, the left end of a rack could contain Analog modules. Ihe
middle could contain DC modules. and the right end could contain AC modules.
Discrete 110 Module Connection Methods
For modules with 16 points or less. the standard method Is to use the removable
terminal board whIch comes with these modules. The removable terminal
board makes It easy to prewl re neld wiring 10 the user supplied Input and
ompul devices. and to replace modules In the neld without disturbing existing
neld wiring.
Some discrete 16-polnt I/O modules can be used with an opllonallermlnal Block
Quick Connect (TBQC) assembly. This assembly contains a module raceplate.
with bulltln co nnector. that replaces the removeab\e terminal board. The
assembly also contains a DIN ra ll mounted terminal block and a cable to connect
the module to the terminal block. The advantage or this method Is that It saves
about two hours or wiring tllllt per module compared wllh hand wiring from a
module's removable terminal board to a user-supplied. panel-moumed terminal
block or strip
Older 32point I/O modules have a ile 50 pin connector 011 the rront or the
module Ihat Is either connected by a cable with a connector on each end to a
Weldmu ller panel mounted terminal block (Wtldmuller catalog no. 912263). or Is
connected by a cable with stripped. tinned leads to a usersupplled terminal
block or strIp.
Newer 32'polnt 1/0 modules have two 24-pll1 connectors on the rron! or the
module. These module may be wired In one or three ways. (I) Use a pair of
cables (IC693CBL327/328 - see data sheet In Cables chapter) to connect the
module to a usersupplled , panel-moumed terminal block or strip. These cables
have a 24 -pln conne<:tor on one end. and stripped, tinned leads Wllh wire
markers on lhe other end. (2) Use a pair or dual connector cables to connect the
module to a Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) termInal block
(lC693ACC377) . See Appendix J for details. (3) Make your own custom cables
Instruct lOlls are round In the IC693CBL327 /328 data sheet In Chapler 10.
Connections to 1/0 Module Terminal Boards
SerIes 9030 PLC 1/0 terminal boards have either 10 or 20 screw terminals Ihat w ill
8ccept rrom two AWe 1122 (036 nlln2) to two Awe '16 (1.3 mml) . or one AWe '14 (2.1
nlln'1 copper 90C (194F) wlre(s). Each terminal ca n accept solid or stranded wires. but
the wires Into any given terminal shou ld be the sa me type (OOth solid or both stranded)
2 18 Series go30 PLC Instal/arion and Hardwal? Manual- October 1999 GFK0356P
o
to ensure a good connection. Wires are routed to and rrom the terminals out or the
bOllom or the terminal board cavity. The suggested torquc ror the I/O terminal board
connection screws is from 9 6 In-Ibs to 11 .5 Inlbs (I. 1 - 1.3 Newton meters) .
For 24 voh DC Input modules. an Internal 24 voh power connection Is provided on the
terminal board to supply a Ihnlted number or input devices. Also. a 24 volt DC output
I~ avallable on the power supply modulc's terminal board to supply a limited number or
output devices.
Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16-Point Discrete Modules
TIle Terminal Block Quick Connect (fBQC) Assembly Is an option ror certain Series 9030
discrete 1.0 modules. See Appendix J ror more Inrormation .
Rernove standard terminal board rrom module.
Install TBQC raceplate (It has a 24 pl n connector) .
Moullt the TBQC terminal block. It has a 24-pll1 connettor and a terminal Strip. and
mounts on a standa rd 35 mm DlNrall
Connect a TBQC cable between the T8QC raceplate connector on the module and
the co nnector on the TBQC terminal block .
Wire 1/0 devices to the terminal block
Installation of 32Point Discrete. 50Pin Connector Modules
These 50 Pin modules are an older design and arc not generally used on new systems.
unless to rulnl1 standardization requirements They are mainly used as replacements ror
existing Installations. For new Installatlons. we recommend the dual 24-pln connector
style because they have additional reatures not rou nd on tht older modules (LED
Indicators. TBQC). and It Is much casler to rabrlcate custom lengt h ca bles ror them .
Installatlon Inrormatlon Is provided here ror the convenience or those stIli uslllg these
modules
Using Weidmuller #912263 Terminal Block
NOle: The TBQC Is nOt avaI lable ror these modules. but you may purchase a Weldllluller
'9 12263 rrom your electronics distributor ror this applJcatJon .
Mountlhe Weldmul ler'912263 ter minal block. It has a 50-pIn connector and a
terminal strip, and mounts o n a standard 35 mm DIN rail.
Connect an ICG93CBL306/307 cable between the module 's raceplate connector and
the connector on the Weldmuller terminal block. See Chapter 10 ror cable data.
Wire I/ O devices to the termina l block. See the Series 90-30 PLe 110 Module
SptCtncl1tlotlsManuai. eFK0898. for pin-out In formatlon.
GFK0356P Chapter 2 Instal/atlon 219
o IT]
Using Generic Terminal Block or Strip
Mount terminal block /s trip 10 the enclosure panel .
Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable, or a custom made. cable. to the module 's
faceplate conneclor and wire the stripped ends of the cable to the terminal
block /s trip. See Chapter 10 for cabl e data
Wire 1/0 devices to the Icrmlna block/slrlp.
Direct Method
Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable, or a custom made cable. to the module's
facepla te connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the neld
devices See Chapter 10 for cable data . See the Strlts 9030 PLe VO Module
Spec!ncM/onsMsllual. GFK0898, for pin-out Informal Ion .
Installation of Discrete 32Point, Dual 24Pin Connector Modules
Using a TBQC
Mount two T8QC terminal blocks Each has a 24-pln connector and a terminal strip.
and mounts on a sta ndard 35 mm DIN-rail.
Connect a pair o flB QC cables (lC693CBL329 - 334) between the modu le's
faceplate connector and the conneclors o n the IWO TBQC terminal blocks. Note that
both a right side and left side cable Is required . See Appendix 1 for a list of cables
Wire I/ O devices 10 the terminal blocks See the Series 9030 PLC VO Module
SptClficalloTlSMallual. G FK0898. for pln,ollt Information .
The Termina l Block Quick Conned [fBQC) Assembly Is an option for certain Selies 9030
discrete 1.0 modules See Appendix J for more Information.
With a Generic Terminal Block/Strip
MOllllt terminal block / strIp to the enclosure panel .
Connect an IC693C8L327 / 328 cables. or a custom made cables. to the module's
faceplate connectors, and wire the stripped ends of the cables to Ihe terminal
block/ strip. Note that bo th a right side and lefl side cable is requIred . See Appendix
J for a list of cables See Chapter 10 for cabl e data sheets.
Wire 1/ 0 deVices to the terminal block /strip. See the ~rles 90-30 PLC I/O ModuJt
Spt('lficalionsMalluaJ. GFK0898. for pill-out Information .
Direct Method
Connect an IC693CBL327/328 cables. or a custoillmade cables. to the module's
faceplate connectors. and wire the stripped ends o f the cable directly to the neld
devices See C hapter 10 for cable data . See Ihe Ser/~s 9030 PLe liD Module
SptclflcatlonsMallual. CFK0898. for pln oullnformatlon.
220 Series 9030 PLC Installar/oll and Hardw.re Manual- October 1999
General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules
1\vlsled, shielded Instrumentation cab le Is s trongly recommended for analog module
Input or output signal connections. Proper grounding of the shield Is also Important.
For maximum electrica l noise suppression, the cable shield shoul d only be grounded at
one end o rthe cable . For Input modules. ground the end that Is In the noisiest
environment (which oftcn Is at the neld devi ce end) . For Output modules, ground at the
module end. SCi! CFK0898, Series 9030 PLC I/O Module Sptclflcar/otls, ror more shield
grounding Information.
Analog Input Module Wiring Methods
Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trlal-anderror routine .
However, In general, It is generally be~t to ground the cable shield as close to the source
of the noise as possible. which Is usually at the device end . In troubleshooting noise
problems. sometimes Ills bellenclal to experiment wllh Ihe s hield grounding polm
location. Remember. the cable s hield should be grou nded at one end only. Also. It is best
10 keep Ihe length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of
unshielded conductors thai will be exposed to the noisy env ironment. See the Series
9030 PLC lIO Module SpeclfiCBrlofis M.1tJual. GFK0898 for additional detail s.
Using Generic Terminal Block or Strip
Mount a terminal strip Inside the comrol enclosure and run a shIelded cable from
the terminal strip to each Input circuit o n the module's terminal board terminals.
ConnC('t each cable's shie ld to tile Illetal panel next to the termlnalslrlp. 00 do nOl
connect the s hields at the Illodule end (cut shield off at module elld of cable and
Insulate with shrink tubing)
Wi re the neld device to the terminal strIp with a shielded cab le. grounding the s hield
at the device end only (Cllt sh ield off atlermlna l strip cnd of cable and Insulate wllh
s hrInk tubl ng)_ Also. keep Ihe lengt h of exposed (outside of shield) leads at the
terminal strip and device ends as short as possible
Direct Method
Run a shielded cable from the neld devlcc (transducer. potentiOmeter. etc.) directly
to the module.
Connect the conductors 10 the applicable screws on the module 's terminal board .
Ground the shield at the neld device end. exposing a minimum amount of
conductor to the noisy environment 00 not COllnect the shield at the module end
(cut shie ld off almodule end of cable and Insulate with shrink tubing) .
TBQC
The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly Is not recommended for use wit h
analog modules due to cable shielding requirements.
GFK0356P GFK0356P GImpIer 2 Installallon 2-21

o o
Analog Output Module Wiring
General
Each output should be connected using a good quality s hIelded wire with the cable
shield grounded at the module end . See CFK-0898, 5t'rles 9030 PLC lIO Module
Speclficarions. for more Inrormatlon .
Using Generic Terminal Block or Strip
Mount a termi nal strip Inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from
the terminal st rip to each output circuit on the module's terminal board terminals.
Crou nd each cable's shield at the module end only Do do not connect the shields al
the terminal strip end (cut shields off at terminal strip end of cables and Insulate
with shrink tubing) .
Wire the neld device to the terminal strip with shielded cables, groundln8 the
shields at the terminal strip end only (cut shIelds ofT at fi eld devIce end of cables and
Insulate with shrInk tubing) Also, keep the lengt h of exposed (out side of s h ield)
leads at the terminal strip and device endsas short as possible.
Direct Method
Run a shielded cable from ea ch neld device (transducer, potcntlornell'r. etc.) direct ly
to the module
Connect the conduc tors to the applicable screws on the module 's terminal board.
C round the shIeld at the module end only. exposing a minimum amount of
conductor to the noisy environment Do nOt connect the shield at the device end
(cut shield offat device end or cable and Insulate with shrInk tubi ng).
TBQC
The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly Is not recommended ror use with
1'nalog modules due to cab le shielding requlremerlls
222 Strlts 9030 PLC itlSfllllalJon and Hardware Matlua/- Octobtr J999 CFK0356P
,
AC Power Source Connections
AC Input Wiring to AC/DC Power Supplies
[ Warning I
If the same AC l)Ower source Is used to provide AC power to other baseplates
In a Series 90 30 PLe System, ensure that all AC Input COlIlICCUons are
Identical at each rack. Do not cross Une 1 (LI ) and Une 2 (L2) . A resulting
difference In potential can Injure personnel or cause damage to equipment.
Each baseplate must be connected to a common ground.
Ensure that the protC(tlve cover Is Insta1lcdovcrall tcrmlnaJ boards. Ow-log
normal operation with all AC power source either 120 VAC or 240 VAC Is
present on UIC AC Power Supply. The cover protects against accidental
shock hnard w hich could cause severe or fatal hllury to the operator or
maintenance pcrsomlci.
Both the Standard (IC693PWR321) and High Capacity (IC693PWR330) AC/OCpower
suppIJescurrently have six terminals for user connections. Early versio ns of some Series
9030 power supplies had nve terminals (see next ngure) . The wirIng methods for both
nve termlnal and slxtermlnal types Is similar. except that step 3 below does not apply to
the nveterllllnaltype
T he power supply terminal boards will accept oneAWG 1114 (2. 1 mm~ortwoAWC jl6
(1,3 10m 2) copper 75 C (167 F) wires. Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires,
but tht> wires In any given terminal s hould be the same type . The suggested torque for
the power supply termInal board Is 12 In lbs (1.36 Newlon meters) . Ope n the door
protectIng the termi nal board and make the rollowl ng connections from the AC power
source. and ground connections (system grounding requirements are described In detail
later In this chapter).
I. These are wide range )upplles that can operate frolll an AC power source within the
nomi nal range of 100 VAC to 240 VACat50/60 Hz. T his may vary -15% to "t'10%
for a total maximum range of 85 VN:,. to 26 4 VPC, These are auto ranglng su pplies
that do nOt requIre jumper or swItch settings for select ion of power source voltage .
2. Connect the hot and neutral wires or lines LI a nd L2 to the upper two termInals on
Ihe termInal board. Connec t the safety ground wire to the grou nd terminal, which
Is the thIrd terminal from the top. and Is marked with a ground symbol
3. For power sllpplies with sIx terminals. the fa ctory jumper between the 3rd and 4th
terminals (see figure below) , should be lert In place for normallnsta!1atlons.
However. thIs Jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors Installed In
InstallatIons wIth a ~Floatlng Neutral ~ Input . Please see the sectIon -Special
Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems later in this chapter ror details
4. After all connections to Power Supply terminal board have been completed. the
protectIve cover plate should be carefully reinstalled .
CFK0356P Chapttr Z InstaJJ.1tlofl 223
 ~

"""
o [1]
Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems
When the AC Input power supplies listed below are Installed In a system where the
InputP0W81 lopul Pow" { Neutraillne Is not rererenced to Prolective Eart h Ground. these speclal lnslallaUon
Instructions must be followed 10 prevent damage to the power supply.
F8Ctory Jumper -4--~

24 VDe Output
For 110 Modules
24 VDC Output
ForIJOModules
{

.
w_, - IC693PWR321S (or later version)
IC693PWR330A (or later version)

Definition of Floating Neutral Systems

Six-Terminal Board Five-Terminal Board
A Flootlng Ntuftal SYSfl'm ls a system of power dlstributlon wiring where Neu tral and
Protective Earth Ground are nol tied together by a negligIble impedance . In Europe th ls Is
Figure 215. Power Supply Terminal Boards referred to as an IT system (see IEC950). In a FloorJ/lg Neutral System. VOltages measured
frolll input terminals to protl'ctlve earth ground may exceed the 264 VoltsAC maximum
Input voltage specined In the power supp ly speclncatlons In Chapter 24!n thls manual.
Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices
nle overvoltagc protection devices for this power supply are con nected Internally to pin 4 Example of Floating Neutral SySiern
all the user terminal board. Th ls pin Is normally cOllnected 10 frame ground (pIn 3) w ith
the supplied Jum per strap which Is Installed at Ihe factory If overvoltage p rotection Is not
required oris supplied upstream. this feature can be dIsabled by leaving pin 4 unconnected
by removing the jumper strap. Also, this jumper must be removed a nd external surge
suppressors Ins talled In Installations with a "Floatlng Neutral~ Input. please sec the
(ollowl ng seclion "Specia ilnsiruciions for Floating Neutral (In Syslell1s~ laler In this
C"
-N

chaptcr ~PE

If you wanl to HI pot test Ihls supply. o\ler\loltage protection must be d/sabJeddurlng the
test by removing Ihe terminal board sirap. Reenable overvoltage protecllon after T his system must be installed using the special Installation instructions on the following
tesllng by reinstalling the strap. page.

~" . Systems In w hich one leg o r the power distribution wiring I!> tied to Protective Eart h or a
tap between two legs or the power distribution wiring Is tied to Protective Earth are n ot
Floating Neulral Sysfems.

Examples of N2n Floating Neutral System

~::
" r- L

JvmpOl SUII(l Come!:'"

OYfllVoIlIIQtPro'KtIor1
Oe'o'lceltoF,_Gtovod
[3 4
I
~
N
PE
I-NIPE
PE

Se, .... r... m ... on '",",lnll bId

Thcse non-noatlng neutral systems do nOI require these special Installatio n Instructions.
Figure 216. Overvollog< Protection Devices and Jumper Strap

2 24 Series 9030 pte Installation alld Hardwarr Mal1ual- October J999 GFK0356P GFK0356P Chapttr 2 Instal/at/Oil 225
IT]
Use These Special Inslallation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems
I. The Input power terminals should be wired according 10 the Instructions In the Mpc'
Power Source Connectlons section of this chapter.
M
Z. The factory insta lled Jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the Power Supply module
must be removed If using one of the Power Supplies that have this feature. See the
Overvoltage Proteclion Devices" section of the Power Supplies chapter fot details.
Voltage surge protection (Ievlces, such as MOVs, MUSI be Installed between the
following terminals:
From L1 to earth ground
From L2 (Neutra l) to earth ground
The ...ohage surge devices must be rated such that the system Is protected from power
line transients Ihat exceed LJne vOIfSgf + IOOV +{N-PEh.IAX.
The eKpresslon N-PE refers to the voltage potential between neutral and Protectlve
Eart h (PEl grou nd
For example. in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral noatlng SOY above earth ground . the
transient protecllon should be rated at
240V - lOOV .50V - 390V
226 Serlts 9030 PLC Insrallatlon and Hardw~rr Malllla/- (krobtr 1999
o
DC Power Source Connections
DC Input Wiring to ACIDC and DC Only Power Supplies
DC Input power can range from 12 to 30 VDC for the 24 VDC supply. 18 to 56 VDC for
the 24 / 48 VDCsupply or 100 to 150 voe for the 125 VDCsupply. All Series 9030 power
supplies have DC Input capabilities. The following connection Information applies 10 all
of them:
Connecllhe$o and - wires from the power source to Ihe top terminals on the terminal
board (... to lhe top terminal. - to the second terminal) Connect the third terminal
from lhe top to system ground .
+24 VDC Output (All Supplies)
The boltom two terminals are connected to the isolated 24 volt DC output that can be
used to supply power to Input circui ts (within power limitations of the supp ly) .
I Warning I
If the sa me DC Input power source Is used to provide power to two or
more power supp li es In a Series 9030 PLe System. ensure that
connecllon polarity Is Iden tica l at each rack (lOp terminal + and seco nd
termina l -) . Do not cross the Positive (+) and Negative (-) lines. A
resuhlngdlfference In pOlenlial c3n lnJure personnel or cause damage
to eq uipme nt. Also. each basep lale must be connected to a common
sysltm ground. described earlier In Ih ls chal)(er.
CFK0356P CFK0356P Cllapler 2 /nsraJ/arion 2-27

IT]
Basic Installation Procedure
The system deSign. which Includcs prod ucing thc layout and wiring drawings. s hould be
completed before beglrllling the Installation procedure. This section offers a basic
step -by-step a pproach to Installing a Series 90-30 PLC system , Some steps refer to ea rlier
secllons oflhl s cha pter for additional details. An a ttempt was made to place the s teps In
an order that wlllllla ke the process as efficient as pOSSible. However, due to the wide
va ria nce In system d esigns, this order may not be the most effiCi ent for your system. so
you may w ish modify Ihls procedure to nt your needs.
I. Cat her the schematics. layo uts, prints. and ot her Information for the job,
Warning
10 avoid th e possib ility o f e lectrica l shock to perso nn el or dam age to
your PLe, we recommend that you shut off all power to the system
b~fore mo unting and w iri ng the PLe. Also. keep all electron ic
components away from the area wh ile drilli ng and tapping to keep
metal chips and OIlngs out of these sens it ive compone nt s.
From the layout drawi ng. determine where the baseplate(s) will be mounted. Lay
out the hole loca lions. either USing the dimensions given on your layout drawing or
from the ~Basep l ates~ chap!erof !hls manual.
3. Mark the hole loen tlons for the basep late safety ground w ire (see ~ B ase pl ate
C rO Ul\d ~ In thlsc hapterl.
Mark the hole locations ror module shI eld ground connC( tions (I f anyl . See ~Module
M
Sh ield Cround (a nd accompanying sectIo ns) In this chapter for Instr uctions.
Finish laying (marking hole locations) out the fe st o f t he system . This Includes any
termi nal b locks you w ill be using. DiN-rail mounted terminal bloc ks for some of the
32- pol nt ll0 mod ules are manufactured by Weldmuller DIN-rail mo uTlt ed GE
Fanuc Ter minal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) assemblies are optional for some of the
IS-po int and 32-polnt discrete 1/0 modules. If usi ng these TBQCs. refer to Append ix
J for data. Also, APM and DSM modules use DIN -ralll11ounted terminal blocks
Note
We recommend d rilling and tapping all ho les before mounting a ny
compo nents . This w ill avoid getting chips and nllngs In the
components.
6. Drill and tap the marked ho les. For basepla te mounting. use 8-32 or 4nlln size.
Mount the baseplates Use good quality 8-32 x 1/2 lnch or 4 x 12m rn sl1.esc rews. We
recommend using star lock washers a nd nat washers under the screw heads (star
lock washer shou ld be located between screw head and nat washer) to en sure a
tight baseplate ground connection , and to keep the screws from loosening. Con nett
eac h bast':plale ground w ire as shown In the ~ 8a se plat e Safety Ground ~ section of
thls chapter.
8. If you have Expansion or Remote racks. determine the correct rack number for each
one, then set the rack numbers using the Rack Number Selection DIP switch 0 11 the
basepla te. Please refer to the Base p l ates~ chapter for details 011 setting these DIP
switches Rack numbers should be assigned by the syste m programmer because
they correspond to system conngurallon scHlngs ancl program memory addressing .
228 Series 90-30 PLC Jnstallation and H II/'ol'lart M anual- October J999
"
[!J
9. If you have more than one basep late (rack) . connect t he lID Bus Expansion Ca bles
between the l i D Bus Expansion Conncctors, w hich are located o n the rlghl end of
the base pla tes. The cables are connected In a ~ dalsy-c haln arrangement fr om one
baseplate to the other. This Is made possible by the fa ci thallhe cables have a dual
connector o n o ne end . nlcrefore, when the ca ble Is p lugged Into a baseplate
con nector, the second connector o n that end o f the cable provides a socket for
co nnecti ng to the next cable. The data sheet for the I/O Bus Expansion cables
(IC693CBL300 ctc.) In the ~Cables- cllilptcr has sample wiring ngures
10. On the lasI1 / 0 Bus Expansion ConneclOr. plug In an 1/ 0 Bus Expansion Terminator,
Catalog Number IC693ACC307 (u nless u sing a cable wit h built -I n term inator
resistors. w hich would eit her be GE fanuc cable [C693CB L302, or your own
custom-bui lt cable) .
I I. Install the modules In their correct slots usi ng your system layout drawings. [fhe
label on the side of each module Identlfles the module type and catalog number.)
Refer to the sect io n ~ ln s t alll n g Modul es~ If you are not familia r with how to do this.
12, Connect cables to OptiOn modules. Route cabl es away from noise-producing wires
See the "Wire R outl n g~ section of this chapter.
13. Be su re to follow lhe Information In the ~ Wlrlng C u lde l l n es~ section of this chapter
10 protecllhe system from electrical noise . Install the power wlrt':s to the Power
Supp ly and 1/ 0 modu les:
Sa fety
VO modu les with removea b le termi na l boards. You ca n wire the terminal
boards In place on Ihe module:. or remove them rrolll the mod u les before
wiring Although remOVing thelll Illay help make wiri ng casler (a previOUS
sectio n ~ Worklng wit h Removeable Termi nal Boards~ shows how to remove a
termi nal board), care s hould be taken to avoid mixing them (each terminal
board has the catalog number o f the module printed on It. and the hinged cover
has a wiring diagram for that module type) . If you are using wire duct, routi ng
each module's wires through the opening In the duct directly under the module
wil l help to keep eac h termi nal board In Its co rrect posItIon.
1I0 Modules wit h termInal blocks. Some modules use terminal blocks that
mounl to the enclosure panel. T his Includes all 32-pol nt modu les and , can
include other I/ O modules If they are nued with the optional Terminal Block
Qu ick Con nect Asscl1lbly. Connect the terminal blocks to the co nll(~c tors o n the
modules with the provided cables.
14. Connect the signal (switc hes, sensors. sole noids, elc.) wlre~ to the terminal boards. or
terminal blocks 1st rips. Ifwlrillg to terminal boards. these ca n be removed for ease of
w iri ng, If desi red . See the section ~Re nl ovl n g a Module 's Ter m inal Board .-
15. When nnished wi ring the 1/ 0 terminal boards (If used and If you removed them for
ease of wiri ng). re- Installt hem on the modules. being careful to match each one wIt h
the correct module
CFK0356P CFK-0356P C/lapeer Z JUSlallae/oll 2-29
 "

o
I Chj'er IB=a=:s=:eP=:J=a :t=:es=======================
CD
~,

~
.:

Baseplate Types ::
A baseplate Is composed of three main parts: (I) a circuli board mounted to (2) a metal
::::
backplale with (3) a plastic cover. Tile circuit board , called the ~bac kplall e, ~ contains C'U/I CD
sockets fo r plug ln modules. The metal back plate has fou r holes for mounting the
baseplate, and reta iners for mounti ng the modu les The plasllc cover provides
protection for the circuli board. slott ed holes ror the modul e connectors and retainers,
a nd primed labels such as the baseplate descrlpllo n, seri al number, and slot number @' CD
labels There are three basic types of base plates discussed In this chapter I Module relf'l\ncrs
CPU Z Upper mounting holes
3 Bast-plate description
Expa nSion 4. Lower mounting ho les. The plastic cover Is slotted allhesc two holes to faclll lat(' a
Remote grou nd connecllon. See the ~ Bascplale Sa fety G round!ng~ secti on of the
"Installation " chapter for ground conncctlon details.
Backplane connector for Power Supp ly
Common Baseplale Fealures Serial number label
Thr callouts In the foll owing picture show the Items that are common to all Series 9030 Backplane connectors for 110 or Optio n modules Is lots 2-4) , Note that the slol
baseplates NOle that a modular CPU baseplate Is shown. labeled CPU / I Is the backplane connector for a CP U module: however. o n
Embedded CPU, Expansion, a nd Remote baseplates. thiS would be a nother [/ 0 or
Optlon module slot.
8. Slot number labels
9. Complia nce labe l
10. Ca talog number and certlOcation (Ul. CEo etc .) label. On an Embedded CPU
baseplate, th is label will be located between Slots 4 and 5.
Figure 3-1 . Common Baseplale Fealures

Two Bas.plale Siz.s

Series 90-30 baseplates come In two sizes: 5-slot a nd IO-slot. Be aware tha t the Power
Supply SIOI Is not numbered , and is not considered to be one of the 5 or 10 s lols. So a
5-5101 baseplate has slols for a Power Supply and nve ot her modules, and a 10slot
baseplate has slots for a Power Supply and ten ot her modules.

CFKOJ56P J.) Jz SerltS 90-30 pt e Installation and Hardwa~ Mallual - October J999 CFKOJ56P
 [}]
Baseplate Terms Explained
Backplane: Refers to the circuit board In the baseplate. It contaIns the baseplate
circuitry and sockets for the plugln modules.
Rack.: Th is term applies to an assembly consisti ng of a baseplate. power supply. and
ot her modules
Hack Number: In systems Ihat require more than one rack, eac h rack Is given Its own
unique number. which enables the CPU to dlsllngulsh one rack from another.
S lot Number: Each module location (called a ~slon on a baseplate has a unique
number (except for the unnumbered left slot w hi ch Is for the Power Supply), The slol to
the rlghl of the Power Supply slot Is always called Slot 1. These slot numbers are marked
on the baseplate's plastic cover, Each slot has a connector for module connections and
top and bottom retainers fo r holding the module In place.
Module location: Si nce each rack Is aSSigned a unique number, and since each slot In a
rack's baseplate has a unique slot number, each individual module 's localion In a system
can be Identtned by Its rack and slot numbers, For example. a module could be referred
to as ~ the module In Rack I. Slot 4: This numbering method enables the CPU to
correctly read from and write to it parllcular module, and report the location of a faulted
module.
CPU llasepilltc: A baseplate that either has a CPU built -in to Its backplane circuit board
(em\)edded CPU) or one that has a slot for a plug-In CPU module (modular CPU) There
can only be o ne CPU baseplate In a Series 90-30 PLC system and It will always be called
Rack 0 (zero). A CPU module C8l1 o nly mount In Slot I of 8 CPU baseplate. A speCial
Option module, such as the FIP Remote I/O Scanner module (lC6938EM330) cal\ also be
used In Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate. 110, Power Supply, a nd most Option modu les cannot
nt In a CPU sial
Expansion Daseplate: One that does 1I0t contain a CPU and which can be mounled up
to 50 cab le- reet from Ihe CPU baseplate, An Expansion baseplate cannot operate on lIS
own. It must be used In a system that has a con trOlling CPU.
l~en1ote Baseplate: One lhat does not contain a CPU and which call be mounted up to
700 cable- reet from the CPU baseplate. A remote baseplate cannot operate on lIS own. It
must be used In a system that has a controlling CPU .
Power Supply Slot: Each baseplate must contain Its own Power Supply module, which
must mount In lhe Power Supply slot. Il ls Ihe slot located on the left end of the
baseplate. It Is not numbered , and It has a unique size and shape SO that only a Power
Supply module can mount In it
Note
Auempts to force a module Into an Improper s lot type will result In
damage to the module and/or the baseplate. Mod ules will mount in
the correct slot type easily and with a minimum of force.
CfK0356P Chapttr 3 Basrpfatts 33
o
CPU Baseplates
There are two basic kinds of CPU baseplates, embedded and modular. The embedded
types rum1l the need for a good low cost PLC. but lack the power. expandabllity. and
versatility or the modular systems
Embedded CPU Baseplate: This Iype has CPU and memory Integrated circuit chips
soldered 10 lIS backplane circuit board .
Modular CPU Baseplate: This type does not have CPU and memory chips on Iu.
backplane, IItstead . It has a connector In Slot 1 ror a plug-in CPU module which contains
the CPU and memory chips on an Internal circuit board
Embedded CPU Baseplates (Figures 32 and 33)
There are three models of embedded baseplates, the 311.313. and 323. These model
numbers are based upon the CPU type that each contal l1s . This chapter discusses only
the baseplate reatures or these products CPU speclncatlons for the embedded CPU are
located In Chapter 4 The embedded CPU baseplates have the rollowlng features:
The CPU type cannot be changed .
They do not support the use or expansion or remote racks. so these racks do
nOl have an expansion connector like the modular CPU baseplates do
The models 31 1 and 313 are 5-s101 baseplates, and the model 323 Is a 10slot
baseplate
Since they do not require a plug-In CPU module, all numbered slots,
Including Slot 1, can be used for 110 or Option modul es.
The memory back-up banery Is located In the Power Supply modu le; so Ir
the Power SuplJly Is unplugged from the baseplate , the battery will be
disconnected rrom the memory circuits. which are localed on the backplane
circuit board, However, the backplane circuit board contains a h igh value
capacitor. sometimes called a ~super capacitor. ~ that can store enough charge
to maintain the memory circuits for about I hou r If the Power Supp ly Is
removed or Its battery Is disconnected. Chapter 6 discusses the
ICG93ACC31 5 Battery Accessory kit that can be used to maintain memory
contents when lhe Power Supply Is removed from an embedded CPU
baseplate.
There are no connguratlon switches or jumpers on the Model 31 1. 313. or
323 baseplates
An embedded CPU baseplate Is always assigned, by default . Rack Number
Zero (0)
34 Series 90-30 PLC Installation alld Hardwatl' Msnual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 QJ o
.... :,elA
Modular CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-4 and 3-5)
Replaceable System (I\rmware) PROM Socket fOf Op!looal Program PROM A Power Supp ly modul e must be plugged into the left slot (wh ich Is not
numbered) of these baseplates. The left SIOlls a uniq ue size and type that

nmnD
only supports a Power Supply module.

~
A CPU module (or a specia l Option module) must be Installed in Slot I of
"'OO!\NII .........
CO.'ROI.lU these baseplates. Slot I is a u nique size and type that only suppo rts a CPU
De.criplionLabel
Says 'W~hCPU'
,""U .. 1l0f
~~~
module or a specia l Option module like the FI P Remote 1/0 Scanner
(lC693BEM330) , Slot I Is labeled CPU/ I.
Slots numbered 2 and above are or a unique size a nd type that only
C!liiE ~ NON-CPUSLOTS SUpp0rlS I/O or Option modules
Memory Bac,,"up
WamlngLebel

~~
o _".v
I 11 I 1 _.
0
100,1 0004 rQ..oI

Expansion and Remote basep lates are sup poned, so a 25 pln Otype remale
expans ion connector Is loca ted at the right end o r the basep late ror
connecti ng to an ExpanSion or Remote baseplate.
Since the CPU Is modular, It ca n be replaced or changed to a dlrrerent type If
addilional reatures are desired
Only one CPU baseplate Is allowed per system If mure than one baseplate
Figure J2. Models IC69JCPUJ11 and IC69JCPUJ13 (5SI00 Embedded CPU Baseplates Is used In a system. the additional Olles must be either Expansion or Remote
ty pes.
A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned. by default. Rack Nu mber 0

~ =:::
WI'''''''' Ii ~'D
l.-,
. .
; ;
I ID~
-= ..---
b ~ D--
.--~I-II~ ~ f'lI ~:I11
~I
NON CPUSLQTS NON CPU SLon
~"._ ...
,It i I

1-1-1-1-~ -~ -I -~ -~ -~
...o ...... 110 BUI
... <,Of; . .... H

......... " I: Memory Backu p

~o '''l'.!,U''~';i ;;il H!0 ~! ' :::;

.OI'~ -.

t:w 1\_0'0- :

:I
0 Warnlngl8bel
EllpallSlon
Connector
o ,-
.000;1 .........
!iii !i;
~(II
"IUO'O'I.' ' .. " ..

Figure 3-3. ModellC693CPU323 (10sIo0 Embedded CPU Baseplate

II .. " .. ..
(Q
. ~~ ~.,< ~,"
. .o 0 0
g
I'I>J ""..
;! I'I>~! '@:
~
0

"- CPU SIOI (SIOI 1l

Figure 3-4. IC693CHS397 5-510t Modular CPU Baseplate

CFK0356P Cllapf~r 3 Bast'placts 3-5 36 Series 9030 PLe ItlSfaJlacJon alld Hardware Manual - Ocwbu 1999 CFK03561'
 QJ o
Expansion Baseplates (Figures 3-6 and 3-7)
There can be no more than a lotal of 50 feet (15 meters) o f cable
Imerconnecting Expa nsion baseplates and the CPU baseplate.
"'"'oou .... -u
C:OOOI_U'"
An Expansion baseplate cannO! stand alonc. It must be connected to a
system that has a CPU , The CPU can be In a PLC or In a Personal Computer
thaI Is equIpped with a Pe rsona l Compu ter Interface Card (sec C hapter 11) ,

~="llr
_"'M"_ I
v...........
'O"._
.. ~
"'_O~
... It
!I

'I
Maximum number of Expansion baseplates allowed per system depends o n
the Iype of CPU they are used wll h . For CPUs 331, 340. and 341. the
maximum Is 4. For CPUs nUlI1bered 350 and higher. the maximum Is 7
~~-:!I

Each Expansion baseplate has a 2S-pl ll fema le O type 110 Bus Expansion
con nector mounted at Its right end for connect ion 10 other baseplates.

Available In lWO versions; 5slot (IC693CHS398) and lOslot (IC693CHS392)

Figure 3-5. IC693CHS391 11)5101 Modular CPU Baseplale
An ExpansIOn backplane does not support the rollowl1lg IntelUgcl1l option
modules: PCM, ADC, BEM330, and CMM. TIlesc modules must be mounted
In a CPU baseplate. All ot her 1,0 and option modules can be mounted In any
type of rack.

All Expansion baseplates must be connected to a commo n ground (see the

~ JnSla ll atlOI1~ chapler ror details) .

Expansion baseplates are the same physical size. use the sa me lype power
supplies. and support the same 1/0 an d option modules as the Remote
basep lates

Each ExpanSion baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch.

Rack NumberSelection
Switch SetllngLabel
... ~.

Oescriphon l atMIl
Says 'Eltpan,lon'

Rack Number Eltpansion

Selection Switch Connector

Fig""' 3-6. IC693CHS398 505101 Expansion Baseplale

CFK-0356P Chapter 3 Ba5tplares 37 38 Series 9030 PLC insra/JarlQn and Hardw8rt Manua/- October /999 CFK-0356P
 """"

[}] o
Remote Baseplates (Figures 38 and 39)
There call be no more than 700 feet o f cable connectlng all baseplates In a
system that uses Remote baseplates

A Remote baseplate canllot stand alone, It must be connected to a system

thai hasa CPU . The CPU can be In a PLC or In a Personal Computer that Is
equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card (see Chapter I t).

Remote ctlpability Is facilitated by the Remote baseplate's built In 150 lallon

between the ... 5 volt logIc supply used by the 110 modules residing in the
Remote baseplate and the supply for the Interface circ uit assoc iated with the
1/ 0 8us Expansion Interface. Isolation helps prevent problems assoCiated
with unbalanced ground cond itions.

Maximum number of Remote baseplates allowed per system depends Oil

Figur. 31. IC693CHS392 10-5101 Expansi.., Baseplale the type of CPU they are used with , I~or CPUs 33 1, 340, and 34 1, tile
maximum Is 4. For crus
numbered 350 and higher, the maximum Is 7.

Each remotc basep late has a 25-pln female D-type Expansion connector
mourned at hs right end for connection to other baseplatcs.

Remote baseplates are avallablc In two sizes: 5-slol (IC693CHS398) and 10-slol
(IC693CHS392)

A Remotc backplallc does not suppOrt the following Intelligent 01'1 Ion
modules: PCM, ADC. BEM330, and CMM, TI1Cse modu les must be mounted
In a CPU baseplate. All other La and option modules can be mounted In any
type ofbaseplatc.

Remote baseplatcs are the same physical size, use the same type power
supplies, and support the same 110 and optiOn modules as the Expansion
baseplates.

Each Remote baseplate has a Rack Number Se lection DIP switch.

~ -~ \.......:.....J -\.......:.....J \.......:.....J \.......:.....J ~'"

fJ _1U._.....
Description Lebel
Says "RemOle- --- (OH'I\OUU
_ . . . .0 '

~-.

~ O~'
I
Figure 3-8. 1CIi93CHSl99 55)01 Remole Baseplale

CFK0356P ChSIHtr 3 Ba5tplam 39 310 Strlt5 9030 pte In5fallallon and Hardware Manua/- Ocfobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 .-
-.....

o o
_4 .... VO Bus Expansion Cables
b ~~I" ::I "'-~~'
iC ;::l
I
. l I~
Five prcwlrcd 1,0 Bus Expansion cables are available from GE Fanuc. Catalog nu mbers and
lengths of these cables are listed In the following Ogure. You can buUd custom cables to suit
the needs of your application If cable le ngths other than those listed arc required. Refer to

-~i :~~ frlll ~ J1 8

the -Cables- chapter for detailed Information on cable type and connectors. Note that the
same cables can be used with both Expanslon and Remote baseplates. however the cables
used In a remote expansion syste m must use the cable type described In the -Cables
chapter.
FEMALE
...
~ ,."
~
o II I : :! II 1 Ii I! I 1'j @
CONNECTOA

~,~
I I II II I
~": \00 ~ III). to to. 100 100., 1'00' \100 0

l'igureA
figure 39. 1C693CHS393 10Slot Remote Baseplate ~.:,~OOT~
M'"
CONNCTOA "'"
CO'<Nf:CTQIII

Figure B O==:'l ~ 50 FOOT

CABLE

"""
COt-NiCTOI'!
MN.'
CONNECTOII

Catalog Numbcr Length Figure

IC693CBL300 3 feel (I meter). conti nuous shield A
IC693CBL301 6 feet (2 meters). continuous shi eld A
IC693C8L302 50 feet (IS meters). contl n uous 8
shield with bull i in term inator (th is
Is not a Wye ca ble)
IC693CBL3 12 0.5 feet (.1 5 meters), contlnuous A
s hlcld
~C693C BL3 1 3 25 feet (8 meters), conti nuous shield A

figure 310. UO Bus Expansion Cables

Note
TIle 3 fOOl cable (IC693CBL300) can be used a~ a Wye adapter between
custom built cables and Remote baseplates

Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks

Basica lly. Remote racks p rovide the same fun ctionality as Ex pansion racks. bu t w ith the
lo nger d istance (700 feet12 13 meters verses 50 feetl l S mete rs for ExpanSio n ra cks)
ca pab ili tY- To minimi ze unbalanced ground cond it ions. Re mote basepla tes have extra

CFK0356P Chaptt r 3 Bastpiarts 3 11 3 12 Series 9030 PLC ItJstallatloll and Harowarr Mafl unJ- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 -,

o IT]
Isolation circuitry. Unbalanced ground conditions ca n occur w hen systems are located Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates
long dIstances from each ol her and do not share the same ground system, However,
distance Is not always Ihe problem: eve n racks thai are mounted near each other can Expansion or Remote baseplates call be powered-down Ind1vldually without affectlng the
experience problems If the system Is nOt grounded properly. See Chapter 2 for operation of other baseplates: however, pD\venng off a baseplate generales a loss of module
grounding Information. (LOSS_OF_MODULE) fault In the PLC Fault Thb\e for each module In the baseplate. When
The use of Remote racks requires a special consideration penalnlng to sca n time. In this rau ll cond ition occurs, and ulltlllhe baseplate Is powered back on and alll110dules
order to operate 81 long distances, Ihe l i D Bus runs al a lower clock speed (compared to recovered. the lost 1.0 modules are not scanned . For more Information on lhe power-up
that used for Expansion rac ks) when communicating wi th Remote racks. w hich w ill and powerdown seque nce , see Chapter 2 In the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller
Rcfeftn~ Manual, GFKO'167.
hav(' an Impact on per forma nce. The Impact will be relatively s mall for discrete lI D and
Slightly mOfe for other modules, such as the High Speed Coumer or Genius
Communicat ions Module . The Increase In time needed to communicate with modules In
a remote baseplate will us ually be s mall with respect to the overall scan time, For more Series 9030 PLC Backplane
detailed Information on scan time calcula tions. refer to Chapter 2 of GFK-0467 . the Series
9030120/Mlcro PLC CPU !tISfructlon Set ReferellceManuaf. The Senes 9030 PLC backplane (on alllhree types or baseplates) has a dedicated 1.0
communications bus. The signals on the relllote baseplate backplane are optically coupled
Another Important sca n time conSiderat ion Is the cable type used for cOllllllunlcatlng at and an Isolated D C~ DC power supply converter Is provided to Isolate the signals rrom other
longer dis tances Data propagation delay must be minimized to ens ure proper system backplanes.
tImIng and margIns. Any deviation In cable type may rllsult In erratic or improper
system ope ration. Suggested cable types are speciOed In the ~Cables " chapler In the Power bus - connects the power supply outputs to the modules In the
baseplate
IC693CBL3001 etc. data sheet.
I/O Comm uni cations bus - the CPU communica tes with 110 modules over
Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System th is bus. Thi s bus Is con nected to the I/ O busses In Expansion and Remote
racks via the 110 Bus Expansion co nnectors and cables
ExpanSion and remote baseplates can be used in the same system as long as certaIn
requirements are met : S pecia l Int elligent Module bus - exists o nly on a CPU base plate: thererore.
certain specia l Intelligent option modules, such as the PCM . ADe, and CMM
You do not exceed the SO root (IS meter) maximum cable dlsta rlCe rrom the modules. will only work In a CPU baseplate.
CPU to the last Expansion baseplate
You do not exceed the 700 root (2 13 meter) maximum cable dista nce rrom
the CPU to the last Remote baseplate. Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remole Baseplates
The cable type recommended ror use with Remote baseplates must be used
Each baseplate tn a Series 90-30 system Is Identlned with a unique number called a ~ Rack
througho ut the syste m. The exceptio n to this requ Irement Is that the
Number. ~ Rnck Numbers ror Expansion and Remote baseplates are selecled by setting a
prewlred 3 root (I meter) cable. IC693CBL300. can be used as a Wye adapter
DIP switch located on each baseplate dlrealy above the connector for Slot I. Rack number
to simpli fy the custom cable assemb ly associated with the -daiSY chain"
connections between baseplates. Inrormation on blrJldlng cables for use
omust always be present and Is assigned. by derault, to the CPU rack (the CPU baseplate
does not have th is DIP switch), Racks do not need to be contiguously numbered. although
wit h Remote baseplates can be rou nd In the "Cables " chapter In the
ror consistent)' and clarity. It Is recommended that rack numbers lIot be skipped (use I, 2. 3 .
IC693CBL300 / etc. data sheet. .
not 1. 3, 5). Rack numbers must not be duplicated with in a system The roUowing table
shows lhe DIP switch positIons ror rack number selection.
Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System
When two or more baseplates are con nected via the 1/ 0 Bus Expansion System, the I/ O Table 3-1. Rack Number Selection S w~ch Setting s
ExpansIon Bus must be properly terminated. The most common method or terminating
the 110 Expa nsion Bus Is by insta lling a termination resistor pack (IC693ACC307) all the Rack Number
open connector o n the last (most distant rrorn the CPU) Expansion or Remote base plate DI P Switch 1 2 3 4 S 6 7
In the system . The resistor pack Is physically mounted Inside or a connector. Although a
termination resistor pack is shIpped w Uh each basep late. o nly the last basepla te In the 1 open closed open closed open closed open
chain needs 10 have thiS terml nalio n connector Install ed. Unused termi nation packs ca n 2 closed open open closed closed open open
be discarded . The prew lred 50 root (IS meter) cable (IC693C Bt302) has term ination
resistors wired Inside the connector o n one end or the cabl e. ThIs cable ca n be used Ir 3 closed closed closed open open ope n open
only one expansion rack Is needed In a system and a SO root cable link Is requi red (the
RaC'k numbers 5. 6, and 7 only \'aUdfor CPUs J50 und higher.
IC693/1l:C307 resistor pack is not needed In thiS case) . Also, a cu stom bullt cable with
bulltin resistors wou ld eliminate the need for the IC693ACC307 resistor pa ck.

CFK-0356P Chi/pltr 3 BaStplaftS 3-13 3-14 Strlts go30 PLe JtlstaJlatlotl arid Hardwarr MatJual- October J 999 CFK-0356P
 .......

o o
The parti cular CPU module used determines how may expansion and remote baseplates Expansion Rack Connection Example
arc allowed :
The 33 1. 340, and 34 1 CPUssuppon a IOlal 0 (4 Expansion and / or Remote
The following example shows 3 system that Includes Expansion baseplatt's.
racks.
The 350. 35 1. 352. 360. 363, and 36,1 CPUs support a total of 7 Expansion
and/or RCllloteracks.
Each baseplate has a label above the DIP swllch that s hows the setti ngs for each rack "'1O~ 1

number. The (allowing Ogure shows th is DIP switch package with an example of rack
~2 number selected
HOTE
TOTAlIMX1MUM
Note DISTANCE FROM
CPU BASEPLATE
TO LAST EXPANSION
Use a ball ' poi nt pen to set the DIP switches. I" general. It Is best to
avoid using a pencil to set DIP swllches since graphite (a gritty. [----='0 BA.SEPLATE IS
SOFEer t'5 METER S)
conductive material) (rolllihe pencil can enter and damage the switc h.

110 EXPA.NSION CABLES

o GEFanuc
SERIES00-30
PROGRAMM ABLE
CONTROLLER

BASE 10-SLOT
EXPANSION
DIP
sw I

X
eXPANSION RACK "

X
23' 6 7

X X
X X
X

' HorE

Each ,Ignal pair on the 110 bu. mu,t

be terminated ellhe end 01 the 110
bu,wlth120 Ohm retl'lors This le,-
mll'\lltlon can be done wIIh lnel/O
Bu. rermlnlltorPlug(IC69JACC307),

c. . CLOSED (Swnch pu,hed down on 'lghl,lde)

byullng the 501001 ( 15 meter) cable
(IC69JCBl302) with buill-In tennlnllt-
Ing ro,I.IOI'I, or by buIlding II CUltom tIOBUS
cable wIlh the resistors In, tailed In TERMINATOR
the conneclor al the end ollhe bu, PLUG ISM 'NOTEI
ICe9lACc307
Figure 311. Ra ck Number Selection Switch (Shown with Ra ck 2 Selected)

Figure 312. Example 01 Connecting E"",nsion Baseplate.

GFK0356P Chapftr 3 Bastplares 315 3 16 Strles 9030 PLe Installaflon and Hardware Manual- Octobtr 1999 GFK0356P
 [}]
Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example
The followI ng example shows cabl(' connections In a system that Includes bot h remOte
and expansion basepla tes. A system can have a comblnatlon of femote and expansion
boseplalcs as long as the dIstance and cable requIrements are followed .
o
Baseplate Mounting Dimensions
SerIes 9030 PLC baseplates are desIgned to be panel mounted. Eac h baseplate has
standard attachmelH nanges for mounllng on an electrical panel. Baseplate d imensions
and proper spacing requirements for Installation purposes ror bot h the 5 and 10slot
basepla tes with embedded CPU (Models 311 and Mode13!3 are 5slot baseplates: Model

~""
323 Is a 10,5101 baseplate). and the Sa nd lOslot baseplates for Modular CPUs are shown
CPU
BASEPLATE
ICSgJCHS3911391

EXPAN SION
MelTinn 1111+d- (2)
In ngurcs 3 1 through 3-4.

Note
AilS-slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions and all 10-slot
BASEPLATE baseplates have the same mounting dime nsions. Baseplates must be
IC693CHS3921398 lIloullfed In tilt orltlltallon as shown In flit (01l0w11l8 ngures (or proper cooling
Mlutlmum Cable Dlltance

QATrrnTrn 11+
"~,~~, ro~0
from CPU. 50 Feet
(1S METERS)
Embedded CPU (311. 313. and 323) Baseplate Dimensions
Bast'.plalc d lmcnsions and spacing requiremcflls for Installation for Models 311 . 313. and
323 basep lates are shown below

MIIIIIIIII'I+b(~ 0
REMOTE
BASEPLATE lM :.tn
tC693CHS393tJ99
-----.: ;YT OIl.lE'ISIO~S
IN ISCtlU.
--------11
--0 nOli - : HIO MIlLIMETERS A,RE IN PAflENTtlESIS

ro : I' QJ j

1~'
rr- ~
REMOTE BASEPlATE : I
~b(0
."r
RE M OTE eLOCK

+ff~-0
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS3931399

Pj

RE MOTE
BASEPLATE
REMOTE BASEPLATE CD FRONT VIEW
I
Mulmum Cable Dlatance
, ' .100
t
HINGED
ODO R
SIDE VIEW

tromCPU"700Feet
(213METERS)
RA 11111111 "1+ I - - 0 I
i _ _ ~ ~L:?~A~c.= ~~:"'~I!::G_ _ _ _ ____
:
J_I_
1'01.

o Standard wye CaDla

o CUllomBuWIPoCnlto--F'oln\Cable Figure 314. Model311 and 313 55101Onscp lmc Dimensions and Spacing Requiremel1ls
(2) IC69JCBL300 Sttndard W'I_ C aDle. Used as Wye Jumper

o IC69JACCJ07 BUI Terminator

Figure 3-13. Example of Connecting Elpanskm and Remote Baseplates

CFK0356P Cllapltr 3 BastpllJtfs 3-J7 3 J8 Strles 9030 PLe Installation alld Hard w8fP Manual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 '"

QJ [II
.. ~21

:- -: :-OO=-I- - - - - - - -;,:- - - -- - - - -- - - '----

.. _TI
I IIOJ)
I"~
00 DIMNSIO,"S IN INCHES
M!LU"'!.1'RSAJtl! .... PiII"E'lTHES~ :- - ~ : ; -- --- - ----- -- -----1;:---- ---- --- ------- ----- -- -,- - -~: ~- -i I 0IM"51CHS ~ IN:::'

[ j-
: ,"1) "(2) : ' . 00
I
: I
1.21 )
- - - -1
1
:
11(2) 11021 I IU )) .AU 1- 1'(1)-: 4 00 IoA W MlflI'lS AA IN,.,III:EST HES IS

', 1 .~. ,~ I ~ ~;: ~

lUG JlfMOVA.OI.
4 (~ 181 I ( 21ltEMOVA.BI.f

.~ I ;~ I : n:::. 1-- 1~;:1---1

D.l 'I
1It.
, ,: I
1

~ 1
,~, ~ o ,.. -
i ,~
v::::.
'" lIEf
~
2ODlA. :

:
(to)
1
(U8) : 512
,1,. [
u,
I rt;"ICAL.) : PlOJ (901 (5.0&) !

i1 -'---!"In Ir :: ! VVPICAl) I'

~
CONNECTOR

I
:
:
T T'J
110)
FRONT VIEW

I '.00
HINGED
DOOR
-
SIDE VIEW -.- I'lr
/Q NOll, FRONT VIEW
.1 HINGED
EXPASSlQH
c.... ,

SIDE VIEW
: (20) I' THE CA8LE" USlD. I>U.CM AOotJ T a ' h CH UOAllOIlTAL CLEARANCE I OOOR
: ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING : (102) to 'HIE COf<"IIEC t Cl'l
------------------------------~
I OH THllIlOtfT IIIOIE Ol' THE IV.()( '011 ACCDS : 4 00

: ______________________________________
I. ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING : _
___________ _________ . J It)

Ftgure 315. Model323 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements Figure 117. Modular CPU, Expansion. and Remote la-Slol Baseplate Dimensions and
Spacing Requirements

Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for Installation ror Modular CPU
baseplates are shown below.

"')012'
,---
, ... J
:i,, .""',,>c.
,..:..... 1--- .,,---
,,
i '" I""
[",0<1]-- 1

I~

:~"<: 7'~~"'''~:::.
:

[L ,\,:, I,~~M".~"" ~ -- - -,,~~,

'''''' ..,.,r.;j'l~I"'~ ,1I :I .1102)
00 ""'DO,,"
G;O- SIDE VIEW
_____ III!COIIHrctOJlf
___ :__1

Figure 316. Modular CPU, ExpanslDi\ and Remote 5Slot Baseplate Dimensions and
Spacing Requirements

GFK0356P Chapter 3 &seplace5 3-19 320 ScritS 9030 PLe Installation ami Hardware M8I1ua/- October 1999 GFK0356P
 ,

[2J [2]
load Ratings, Temperature, and Mounting Position Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19" Rack Mounting
The power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and "TWo optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10-slot baseplate to be moullted In a 19
the ambient temperature. Inch rack. Each baseplate Installation requires only one o f the adapter brackets.
The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel Is:
100% al 60 D C (140 F) Warning I
De sure to follow grounding Instructions In Chapter 2 when using

.:mrrrmm
these adaptor brackets. Failure to properly ground the PLC can result
In Improper operatJOIl. damage to equipment. and Injury to per5ollnel.

IC693ACC308 I:ront Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to moun! a baseplate (0 the

front face of a 19" rack. Inslall the adapter bracket by Inserting the tabs at the top
and bottom of the adapter bracket Into the correspondi ng slots at the top and
bottom o f the plastic baseplate cover NOTE: Although the ngure be low shows the
plastic basep late cover removed , this Is for Illustration purposes only, h is not
necessary (0 remove the cover to install the bracket. With the brackt't In place , Insen
Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horlzonlally are: and lighten the two screws (lncluded with the bracket) through the back of the
baseplate holes huo the threaded holes In the bracket.
temperature al 25 "C (77 "F) (ullioad
IC693ACC3 13 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket, Used to recess mount a baseplate
temperature 3t60"C (140" F) 50% of full load M

Inside a 19 rack. A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using
four 8 32 (4 mm) screws, nuts, lockwashcrs and nat washers. The Adapter Bracket
M

bolts through Its four slotted holes to the face of the 19 rack using applicable
hardware (lockw3shers recommended) .
"312fL,1o

IfUM two,creWi if., lOp, ,., lIOf/om)

Irotn Net of baft unit /tItovgIINU unIf
.00 brKltel. r"",'el"l ~ 10 UQJ,.
lIted.el/O N,. uM

Not. : Bn.plat. I, shown with cover r.moved for illustration purposes. It

Is not n.c .... ry to remove the b ... plat, cov.r to In.t.1I th. bracket.

flgur.3.18. IC693ACC308 front Mount Adapter Brack.tlnstallation

Dimensions for rack mounting a 10-slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount
Adapter Bracket are show n In the fo llow ing ngure.

CFK0356P Chaprer 3 Baseplares 3-21 3-22 Series 90-30 PLe IllS fallaf/oll and Hardware Manual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 ~

--..
------

QJ o
M"'"
1889 ---;---_---=~ 1 1 Baseplate Comparison Table

Iw~ "., J J J J Jd~

/4---- (4801 1847

Table 32. Series 9030 Baseplate Comparison

Series 9030 Baseplates

'i
~ r-
I Catalog Number Type Size (Slo1S)
I
I IC693CPU311 Embedded CPU 5
I
I
I IC693CPU313 Embedded CPU 5

~n
I
c:; IC693CPU323 Embedded CPU 10
1<2: I
..J IC693CHS397 Modular CPU 5
IC693CHS391 Modular CPU 10
OIMENSIONSIN INCHES (MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES)
IC693CHS398 Expansion 5
Figure 319. Dinensions for 19 " Rack MOl.l1Ung UsinglC693ACCJ08 Adapter Bracket IC693CHS392 Expansion 10
IC693CHS399 Remote 5
0'10010 01111- '
IC693CHS393 Remote 10 ...

" nl ... Jl
DI""" 510"" IN I",CIiU (MIWJ.lIEURS IN PARE .. THUE5j

Figure 320. IC693ACC31J Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket

GFK0356P Chaprer 3 Basep/altS 323 32. Series 9030 PLe Insral/arlOll and Ha rrJl't'a~ Mallual - Octobtr 1999 GFK0356P
 --..

o
AC/DC Input Power Supplies
Chapter I Power Supplies
4 IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input
The IC693PWR321 Is a 30 watt supply that can opcrale from an input voltage SOUfCt In the
range of 85 10 264 V/IC or 100 to 300 VDC. This power supply provides three outputs:

Power Supply Categories
Series 9030 power supplies are modular types that plug Into Ule left slot of all 9030
baseplates. TIley have been placed Into two categories for the purpose of Ihls chapter'
+ 5 VDC output.
+24 VDC "Relay" power output which provides power to circuits on SeMes 9030
Output Relay modules.
"Iso latcd~ +24 VDC, which Is used Internally by some modules, can also be used to
provide externa l power for 24 VDC Input modules.
The load capacity for each output of this power supply Is shown In the following table.

AC/DC Input Power Supplies Table 42. IC693PWR321 Pow", SLWly capacities
lC693PWR3ZI ,Sta ndard 1201240VPC or 125 VDC Input. 30 watts lOla I output
lC693PWR330, Hlg h Capaclty I 201240 VAC or 125 VDC Inp llI. 30 watts lolal output Catalog load NomInal
Number Capacity Input OutputCapadtlts (Voltage/lbwert)
DC Input Only PowerSupplles
IC693PWR322, 24/ 48 VDe Input. 30 wailS lotal output IC693PWR3Z1 30 Walls 100to240VACor .. 5 vee 1+Z4 VDC Isolated 1 .. 24 VDC Relay
IZ5 VDC 15 walts ZO wailS 15 wam
IC693 PWRJ28 48 VDe Inpul. 30 wans total output
lC693PWR33 I, High Capachy 24 VDC Input 30 watts tota l output t TOlal orl'lll ou tpulscol1lbln@(lcannolexceedlOwalis.

Power Supply Feature Comparison

The fo llowing table lists the features of the Series 9030 PLC Power Su pplies,
IC693PWR321 GE Fanuc 0""
SERIES 90- 30
0'"
OIllUN
0.,," }"".::"'"
Sfo\TUS
INDlCATO!!S

Table 41. Power Supply Comparison Table

CIIIIIlog load
Number Capacity
Nomina l
Input Output Capacilies (Voltlgellbwer '~) oo,,,,,,o",{
",,,
IC693PWR32 1 lOWaus IOOtoZ 40VACor .5 VDe .24 vee Isolated +24 voe Relay .\CIDCPOWEA.
IZ5VOC IS wailS 20 walls ISwalls SOOA.CE

IC6931'WR3l0 30Wat15 100 to 240 VAG or +5 VOC +Z4 VOC Isolated .. Z ~ VOC Relay
1N1'A.~AL
1Z5 VDC 30 wailS 20 wallS ISwatts
PONEI'I SOUfICE {
IC6931'WR311 30 Watts 24or48 VDC +S VOC +24 voe Isolated +Z4 VOC Relay '0'
'-'ODULES IIOOIA.I'-'O
15wallS 20W3ttS ISwans "yO(
IC69lPWR328 30Wat15 . 8VDC +5 VOC Z ~ voe Isolated +Z4 vee Relay
ISwatts ZOWl'IllS 15watts
le69lPWR331 30 WailS Z4VeC +S VDC .. Z4 VOC Isolated +24 VOC Relay

~ ~~''i:~~'
lOwallS ZOW811S 15watlS
l ' TOlal orall oulpulS combined cannot exceed 30 watts.

.... I

flgu" 41. Standard ACIDC Input Power SUpply . IC693PWR321

Power supplies muSI be Inslalled 111 the leftm ost slot In all baseplates,

CFK0356P 4) 42 Series 9030 PLe Installation and Hardware Manual- Oclo~r 1999 CFK0356P
 ,-
-...

G []
Note IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC/125 VDC Input
Previous versions of tills power supply had nvc lerminals on the The IC693PWR330 Hig h Capacity Power Supply is rated for 30 watts output. For
terminal block. The new version {shown abovel. which has six appllcaCfons requ/rln8 greater +5V CUr('flli capacity Illan Is available \\JllJlIJesl81ldard supply
tcr minals. Is functio nally the same as the previous version. The change (IC693PWR32 1), this supply allows all 30 watlS to be (onsumeft (rom the +5V supply It can
was made to con form to European EC requirements. operate from an Input voltage source In the range of 85 to 264 VAC or 100 to 300 VOc.
This power supply provides the follow[ng outputs:
T.ble H . SpeciflC.lions for fC693PWR321 Standard ACfDC Inpul Power Supply
- 5 VDC output.
NOll1 lnalRaltd Vollagt 120/ Z4OJAC or 125 VOC
Inpul Voltage Range + 24 VDC "Relay~ power output w hlcb prOVides power to circuits on Series 9030
AC 8510264 VAC Output Relay modules.
DC tOO 10 300 VOC
Hlsolated .201 VDC. w hich Is used internally by some modules. can also be used to
H

luputPowtr 90 VA with VAe Input

(Mul mulllwllhFullload) SO W wi th VOC Input provide externa l power ror 24 VDC Input modules.
Inrush Current 4A pea k, 250 milliseconds maxi mu m
- The load capacity ror each output or this power supply Is shown In the rollowlng table
OUlpulPower -tVOC and 24 VOC Relay 15 waILS ll1axi-;lIum
2-4 VDe Relay: I 5 Wall!! maximum
24 voe lsolaled' 20 wailS maximum
NOTE.: 30 WIIUS maximum tOial (.11 rhf"r'tourpuu) Table 4-4. IC693PWR330 Power Supply C.pac~ie s
O \llpul Vo llI~8c 5 voe : 50 voe 10 5.2 voe (5.1 voe nominal)
Relay 24 VOC : 24 to 28 VOC Catalog Load Nomi nal
Isolated 24 VDC: 21 .5 VDe to 28 voe Numbe.r
Protectivclimits
-_. --- ---- Capllcily Inpul Ou I p ut Capaci ties (Vo It lsellbwc r t )

Ovcrvoh agf': 5 voe OUtpUt 6.4107 V IC69JPWR330 30Wall$ IOO l024UVICor ~5 VOC 1 .. 24 voe Isolated 1424 VDC Relay
OvcrcurTent: 125 voe 30 wails 20 wails 15 wails
5 VDeoulput <I A maximum
tTc;ItI~pTll1le: 20mllll!!l!'(ondsmlnlmum t Tor al of fi ll ou I pu l sco mblned elUlllOl txc~d 30 \\IfI r IS.

~''''
IC693PWR330
GE Fanuc
5.,11111030
g :R } ~~:!~~
0 RUN I""OICA,TORS
o 84fT

CONNECTIO"'S FOR {
AOOC POWR SOUACIi:

~&'\fTIi:AV
~'" ~ cOM<lieToRS

Figur. 42. High capac~y ACfDC Inpul Power Supply . IC693PWR330

CFK0356P Chapttr 4 Powtr SuppJles ' 3 ,., Strles 9030 PLC ItlStafJaCioll and Hilrdwart Malluil!- Ottobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 r -..

G QJ
Table 45. SpecifICations for IC693PWR330 High Cepacity ACIDC fnpot Power Supply " "0&
Nomlna lRlled Voltlgf I ZO/Z4()1ACor 125 voe
Input Voltage Range
AC 8510264 VAG
DC 100 IOJOOVOC
InpulPower 100 VA with VPC. lnput
(MuimumwlthFu ll Load) 50 W wllh VOC Input
Inrush Currelll 4A peak.2S0mSm8)(lmum
OUlputPower 5 voe: JOwattsmaJllmulTl
24 VDe Relay: 1Swans maximum Jump(lr Slf.p Connecll;
OvtrVOlltg. Prgl~
[3 I
24 VDC Isolated: ZOwatl5maxlmum
NOTE:30 warrs maxlmumlolal (1II1lhmoUlpu tS)
Oev4CMIOFrame .... OWICI
4,'A- ___0---'
Output Voltage
- - - - - - -5 VDC: S.OVDC 105.2 YOC (5.1VOC nOll1lnal) - -
Sct.wT.~.
24 VDe Relay: 241028 VOC 01\ Tetml"", ao"d
24 VDC Iso lated: 21 5 VDC to 28 VOC
- ---
Prolecllvellmlls
-- I- - -- Ftgure 43. Overvotta ge Protection Devices and Jumper Strap
OVf:rvol lage: SVDCo li tp u t: 64107V
Qvercurrenl: 5 VDe output: 1 A Rlulmum
HOldupTlme: 20msminllllum
--- -- fsolated 24 VOC Supply Output Connections
The bollom two tenninals of the power supply terminal strip provk:le connections
to the Isolated ... 24 volt DC output which can be used to provtde power for
Field Wiring Connections for the AC/DC Input Power Supplies external circuits (within power limitations of the supply) .
The two AC/DC Input power s upplles have six terminals for user co nnections. These
connections ore desc ribed below. Caution
AC Power Source Connections
If lhe Iso lated 24 VDC su pply Is overload ed or shorted. th e
The Hot. Neutral. and Ground wires from the 120 VAC power sou rce or L1. L2. Programmable Logk Controller wlll stop operation.
and Grou nd wires from the 240 VAC power sou rce connect to the system
through the tOp three terminals of the terminal strip on the front of the power
supply.

DC Power Source Connections

Connect the + and - wires frolll the 125 VDC (nominal) power source to the
lOp two termi nals on the terminal con nector. These connections are not
polarity-sensitive o n an AC/ OC inputpowersupply. (However, tile DC
Input only type supplies. which are discussed later In this chapter. are polarity
sensitive 1

Input Overvoltage Prolection Devices

n Ils Informat1on applies to all Series 90-30 power supplies except IC693PWR322
and 1C693PWR3ZR. The overvoltage protection devices for thls power supply are
connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip. This pin Is normaUy
connected to (rame ground (pin 3) with the suppUed Jumper strap which Is
Installed at the factory. Iro~rvolfa8e protection Is not required orlssuppUed
upstrea m. this feature can be disabled by remOVin g the jumper strap from pins 3
and 4.
If you want to HI-pOt test thiS su pply. overvoltagc protection must bt dlsablrcJ
during the test by removing the termi nal strip Jumper strap. Re-enable
overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap,

CFK0356P C/Japfrr 4 Powtr SupplltS 45 4-6 StrltS 90-30 PLC InstaJlatlon and Hardwart ManuiJI - Ocrobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 -
G o
DC Inpul Only Power Supplies Table 4). Specirloalloos IOf IC693PWR322 Power Supply

Nominal Rated Vo h age 24 or 48 VDe

Input Vohage Ibnge
Sian 21 to 56 VDC
IC693PWR322 Standard Power Supply, 24/48 VDC Input Run 18 to 56 VDC
TIle IC693PWR322 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 24 VDC or 48 VDC Input Power 50 wa{[s maximum al rullload
nominal inputs. It wUl accept an Input voltage range from 18 VDC to 56 VOc. Although It Inrus h Current 4A peak. 100 ms maximum
Is capable of maintain ing all outputs within specUlcatkJlls with Input voltages as low as 18 -=- -
Output Powe r 5 VDe: l!iwansrnaxlrnum
--_.-
VDC. It will not start with Initial Input voltages or less than 21 VOC. This power supply
24 VDe Re lay: 15 watts maximum
provides the following outputs: 24 VDC Isolated: 20 wails maxlmulll
... 5 VDe output. NOTE: 30 III'I/S max/mum loud (all thm.oulputs)
Output Voltage
.- - - - --
5 VDC: 5.0VDCI05.ZVDC(51 VDCnomlnat)
-
.,. 24 VDC "Re lay " power output which provides power to circuits on Series 9030
24 VDC Re lay: 241028 VOC
Output Relay modules 24 VDC Isolated: 21SVDClo28VDC
"Isolated" .24 VOC. which Is used Internally by some modules. can also be llSCd to Protective Limits
provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules. Overvollage: 5 VDC output : 6.4 to 7 V
Ovcrcurrent: 5 VDe output ' 4 A maximum
The load capacity for each output of this power supply Is shown In the following table.
Holdup Time:
-- -- -- -- ------_.-
14 ms minimum
Table 4-', IC693PWR322 Pow", StWly Capacities Standards Rf"rer to data sheet, GFKQ8(17B, or 181(1:r version ror
product standards,and generals peel neat Ions
Catalog tOlld
Numbt't Capacity Input OutpulCapacltlu (VoltasVlbwtr t l
Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322
IC693PWRJ22 JOWalls 24 or48 VDC +5 VDC
1SwaiIS
I . 24 VDC Isolated I . 24 VDC Relay
20watls 15w3lts The foll owing graph I~ a typical 24 / 48 VDe power supply efficiency curve. A basic

-..
t Total orall outputS combtnt'd cannot exceed JOwatls procedure for determining efficiency of the 24/48 VDe power supply follows the ngure.

-'" ,
} ~;!;~
IC693PWR322 o
GE Fenue 0 -.
QI( so
5.rl .. 9030 0 RUt< I~OICATOI\S
a R.I."
I-....,.,,=~....,I '0

AVERAGE 30
tNPUT
POWER
(WATTS) 20

\0

to 15 20 25 30
TOTAl OUTPUT POWER (WATIS)

Figure 4-5. Typical EffICiency Curve for 24148 VDC Power Supply

Note
Figure 4~ , Series OO;w 24148 VOC Input Power Supply . IC693PWR322 Stanup surge at full load Is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds (maximum) .

CFK0356P Chapftr" Pt1Wtr SupplitS 47 48 Series 9030 PLC InSfallat/on and Hardware Manual - Ocrober 1999 CFK0356P
 '>.

G IT]
Input PowerlCulTent Calculation IC693PWR328 Standard Power Supply, 48 VDC Inpul
Deterll1lne total output load from typica l spedflcallofls listed for TIle IC693PWR328 Is a 30 watt output power supply desIgned for 48 VDC nomInal Input. It
Individual modules In Chapters 2 and 3. will accept an Inpul voltage range from 38 VOC to 56 VOC. Thls power supply provides
Use the graph to determIne average Input power. the foUowlng outputs:

DIvide the Input power by the ope rating sou rce voltage to determine the + 5 voe output
Inpul current requirements. ... 24 VDC "Relay" power output which provides power to circuits on Series 9030
Usc Ihe lowest Input voltage to determine the maximum Input currenl Output Rclay modulcs.
Allow fo r stan-up surge current requirements, ~1so1ated" ... 24 VDC. which ls used [mcrnally by some modules. can also be used to
provide exte rnal power for 24 VDC lnpulll1odules.
Allow margins (1096 10 20%) for va llallons
The load capacHy for each OUIput of this power supply Is shown [n the following table.

Table 4-8. 1C693PWR328 Power Supply Capacities

Cati'llog load
N um ber Capacity Input Output Capacities (Voltlgeflbwer t)
IC693PWR328 30 Walts 48VDC +5 VDC
ISwatls
I +24 VDC lsolaled
20watts
I t24 VDC Relay
15 wails

t Totalofall outputs combi ned tannote)r(ceed 30 walts

IC693PWR328 GE Fanuc g;:" } !~!~;BMII

S.rl 80 -30 0 "UN INOIC"'TC~
o allTT
f--:=,.,.""...---i

figure 46. Series 90-30 48 VDC Input Power Supply IC693PWR328

CFK0356P Cllapctr 4 fbwtr SupplltS 49 4 10 Series 90-30 PLe Jlls/allatlon and Hardware Maul/al - October 1999 CFK0356P
 "

G o
Table 49. Speoir",ations for IC693PWR328 Pow", SUpply Input Power/Current Calculation for IC693PWR328 Power Supply
Nom in al Rated Vollage 48VDC Determi ne total outpulload from typical speclncations listed for
Input Voltage Range 38 to 56 VDC Individual modules In Chapter 12
Input Power
- --- - - - - ----
50 watts maximum at full load Use Ihe graph to determine average Input power.
Inrus h C u rrent 4A peak. 100 ms maximum Divide the Input power by the operati ng source voltage 10 determine the
OUII)UI Power 5 VDC: ISwattsmaJillmuOi Input curren! requirements
24 VDC Relay: ISwans maximum Use the lowest Input voltage to determine the maximum Input current
24 VOC Isolated : ZOwatts maximum
NOT:30 IUtrs mIX/mum latRl (ill thlffOutPIICS) Allow ror sian-up surge current requ irements
Output VO lt age 5 VDC: 5,OVDCI05.2:VDC($\ VDCnomlnal) Allow margIns (10% to 20%) for variations.
24 VDC Re lay: 241028 VDC
24VDClsolated: 2:\ .SVDClo28VDC
Protecllve Limits
Overvoltage: 5 VDC output: 6.4107 V
Qvercurrent: 5 VDC output: 4 A maximum
Holdup Tim e: 14 ms minimum
Standards Rerer 10 dala sheet. CFK0867 B. or laler version ror
product slimdards.and genera Ispecl neal Ions - - _ . _ - -

Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR328

The following graph Is a typical 48 VDC power supply efOclency curve. A basic
procedure for determining efOcJency of Ihe 48 VDC power supply follows the ngure .

.....,
.
.,
AVERAGE 3D
INPUT
POWER
JWAITS ) 20

10

\0 20 25 3D
"
TOTAl OUTPUT POWER jWATIS)

Figure 47. Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply

Note
Start-up surge al full load Is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds lmaximuml.

CFK0356P Chifl'ttr 4 ftlwtr Supplies 4-JJ 412 Strles 9030 PLC Installarlon and Hardwart Manual - October 1999 CFK0356P
 ---
'"

OJ o
IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply, 24 VDC Input Table ~ 11. Specific.tions for 1C693PWR331 Power Supply

The Series 9030 DC Input High Capacity power s upply (ICG93PWR33I) Is a 30 wau Nomlna lRaled Voltage Z. VDC
wide range supply designed for 24 VDC nom inal inputs. For appllcaUons rtqulrlng greater Input Voltage Range
St"n 18to30VDC
.sV current capac/ty than Is available wlfh fllesrandard supply. fills supply allows all 30 watts (0 Run 12to30VDC
btco"su m~ (rom rlle .. 5 VouCput It will accept an Input voltage range from 12 VDC to 30
Input Power
------- 50watlJ maximum atftiilload
- -
VDC. Although Ills capable of maintai ning all outpu ts withi n spec tncatlons wit h Input
InrtJshCurrem t
voltages as low as 12 VDC. II will 1101 star( with inltlallnpul voltages o f less than 18 VDC
Th is power s upply provides the (allowing outputs: OutpulPower
- - - - ---
S VDe : 30 watts maximum i
- -.--
24 VDC Relay: 15watlS maximum
... 5 VDC output. 24 VDe Isolated: 20waltsmaxlmum
NOTE: 30 waiU maxlmI;J1rI ((m/ (al/ I hIffOUf~
.24 VDC - Relay- power output whkh provides power 10 circu its on Series 9030 Output Vahage
- 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5. 1 VDC nominal)
_

Output Relay modu les. 24 VDe Relay: 192 to 28.8 VOC

24 VDC Iso lated: 19 2 voe to 288 VOC
-Isolated- +24 VOC. which is used Illternally by some modules, ca n also be used to
provlde external power for 24 VOC Input modules. Protectl ve Limits
Overvo ltage: 5 VDCoutput 6 <1 to 1 V
The load capacity for each output of this power supply Is s hown In the fo llowing table , Overturrenl: 5 VDC oulJ)U! 7 A lIloxlmum
l-! ol dupTlme: I Omsmlnlmum
Table ~ . 10. IC693PWR331 Pow", SUpply capacities Stllndards Rt'fer 10 data sheet. GFK0867B, or later version for
prod uct SI tl ndards. lind $l.Cllcral sf)(..'(lflcalluns
C.. alog Load Dependem on In.staUatlon and power supply Impedance chamclerlstlcs
N um ber Capacity Input Output Capacltlts (VohagefJbwer t ) Dernle per Figure 222 at ambicnt temperatures aOOve 50 C (122 f) .
IC693PWR331 30Wau .. t Zto30VDC .5 VDC
30 watt ~
I ~Z" VDC Isolated
20 watts
I .24 15VDCwattsRelay
t TOlal orall OUlputs combIned can not exceed 30 wailS Current Derating for Higher Temperatures

"'~2~
:~ I -:

~VDC
C~"[,"f

AM81NT TEMPERAT~E (C)

Figure H . 5 VDC CUrrent output Deratilg fOf Temperatures above SOC (122Fj

FIgUfe ~-8 . Series 9030 2~ VDC Input High Clpacny Power Supply. IC693PWR331

CFK0356P Chapltr 0# AJwrr SUI'PlltS ' 13 4-1' SUits 9030 PI..C Inscaffallon and Hardwart Maflual- OcrOOtr 1999 CFK0356P

Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR331
Use the following prOCedlJre to determine Input power requirements for the 24 VDe
High Capacity Power Supply:
Deter mine lotal o utput power load from typical specincatlons listed for
Indlvldua lll10dules at the end o (lh ls chapter.
Multiply the output power by 1.5 to determine the Inpul power value.
Divide the Input power valu e by the operating source voltage 10 determine Ih('
Input current requirements
Use the lowest Input voltage to determine the maxim um Input currelll
Allow for start-up su rge curre nt requirements
Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations
CFK0356P Cllaptrr 4 Powrr SuppJles
"'
G [II
Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input-Only Power Supplies
DC Power SOlI'ce Cornections
TIle - and - wires from the DC power source connect to the top t\ .....o terminals on
the terminal strip. The + wire should be connected to the top terminal screw, and
the - wire to Ihe second screw (collnllng rrom the top down) . TIle ground
connection connects to the third screw. This connection scheme Is clearly markro
on the front of these power supplies
Isolated 24 VOC Supply Output Connections
TIle bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connect ions
to the Isolated +2-1 volt DC output which can be used to provide power ror
external circuits (within power limitations or the supply)
Caution I
((the Isolated 24 VDC supply Is overloaded or Shorted.lhe
Programmable l...oglc Controll er wut stop operat ion.
415 4 16 S~rles 9030 PLC Installation and Hardware Mallual - OctoUer 1999 CFK0356P
 ~
......... -.....

G o
Common Series 9()'30 Power Supply Features ... /10lIl

Status Indicator lights on all Power Supplies

Four LEOs are located on the u pper right front of the power supply faceplate . The
purpose of these LEOs Is as follows:

PWH
The top green LED, labeled PWR, provides an Indication of the operating state
or llle power s u pply. The LED is ON w hen the power supply has a correct
JUI'I'IPt' SIf1I4) Corn.l1
CNONoIWJ' PrOltc1lon
o.~lloF'IImtG,ound
[3?,______-----'
4
I

source of power and Is operatlng pro perly. and OFF when a power supply fault
occurs or power Is not applied Set..... T,,,,,..,.I.
on Ttff!lIn.e SoIrd
OK
T he second green LED. labeled OK, Is steady ON If the PLe Is operating figure 410. Overvollage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap
properly. and OFFl f a problem Is detected by the PLe.
RUN
Output Voltage Connections to Backplane (All Supplies)
The th ird green LED. labeled I~ U N .lss leady ON w hen the PLe Is in lhe RUN
mode. The fo llowing Ogure Illustrates how these three output voltages arc connected
Internally to the backplane on the baseplate. 111e voltage and power required by
nATT
The bottom red LED, labeled BATI, will be ONlf the memory backup battery
voltagc is tOO low to maintain the memory under a loss of power condition;
module~ Installed on the baseplate Is supplied through the baseplate connectors.

POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE

I
USEICOMM ENTS
...
",
ot herwise It re mai ns OFF. Irl hls LED Is ON . the Lithiu m bauery must be
r('p laced berore removi ng power rrom the rack . or PLC memory may be lost.

I ~: I
-
: _.
-f.>I---.-------<o
.J....
~
:
124V

O IGND
"
I USEDINTEANALLV ON ANAlOO INPUT,
I ANALOG OUTPUT. AND OC INPUT MODULES.
: ALSO AVAILABLE ON E)(TERNAl
1 TERMINALS ON OC INPUT MODULES AND
.. I ON FRONT OF POWERSUPPLV FOR
Input Overvoltage Protection Devices , , USERAPPLICATIONS

T h is Inrormalion applies to al l Series 90-30 power supplies ext:ept IC693PWR322

and IC693PWR328. 11\e overvoltage protection devk:es for this power supply are R24V

I
II~- l'
connccted Internally to pin -1 on the uscr terminal strip. TIlls pin 15 normally v, -L I I uSED"TERNAlLYO.
con nected to frame ground (pin 3) with the suppUed jumper strap w hich Is
Installed at the ractory. Ir overvoltage protection Is not required orts suppUed
SINGLE
9I
RGND
: RELAV OU TPUTS
... 1
I
upstream, this reature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3
POINT
and 4. CONNECTION

Ir you want to HI -pot test this supply. overvohage protection must bt dJsabltd
during the tcst by removing the terminal strip Jumper strap. Re-enable I USEDINTERNALLVON CPU
overvohage protection after tesllng by relnstalUng the strap. I INPUTS. OUTPUTS. ETC.
'----.0----<9 "~"U, .:
1 POINT 1
CONNECTIONI

r-------<o,::::::::+----~II E)(TERNALCONNECtlQH
TO EARTH GROUNO

Figure 4-11 , Interconnection of Power Supplies

CFK-0356P Chapter 4 Power SuppJl~ 4-17 4-18 Srrlts 90-30 PLe inslalJaliotl and Haniwart Manua/- October 1999 CFK-0356P
 ~

""""'" --...

G o
Overcurrent Protection (all Supplies) CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply (All Supplies)
The SV logic ou tput Is electro nica lly limited to 3.5 amps (1 amps for high ca pacity A 15pln Otype fema le connector, accessed by open ing tl.e hinged door on the rlgll!
supplies) . An overload (Including short ci rcuits) Is sensed interna lly and causes the front of the power su pply, provides the connection to a CPU serial port which Is used to
supply to shut down. The slJpply will conllnually try to restart until the overload Is connect to:
removed. An Internal fuse in the Inpuiline Is provided as a ba ckup . T he supply will
A programmer (usually a personal com puter) running CE Fanuc PLC
u sually shu! d own before the fu se blows The fuse also protects agai nst Internal supply
progra mming software.
fau lts
The CE Fanuc Hand -Held Programmer
Other serial devices.
Timing Diagram
.uan
The timing diagram below shows the relationship o f the DC Inpu t (0 the DC outputS
a nd to the Power Supply OK signal (PSOK) generated by the power s upply. When
power Is nrsl applied. the PSO K signal goes fal se. This line remains fal se for a minimum
of 20 Illsec after the 5V bus Is within Spe< lnC3 1Ions, then It becomes true

If Input powe r Is interrupted, the .. 5V bus will remain within speclncatlol1s and I'SOK
will remain true a m inimum of 10 milliseconds. PSQK the n goes false The ... 5V bus will
remain w ithin s pectncatlons (or an addilional4 milliseconds minimum to allow an
orderly shutdowll of lhe system .

~ ....
INPUT INPuT
POWER

or
MOMENTARY

-l P~~~R I- or
POWER

I ~ I Figure 413. Serial Port Connector

OVERSHOOT OVERSHOOT
The serial port con nector Is o nly funcllollalln a power s upply lhat Is Installed In a
~J ~i\XI
+5V 0 JTP UT I
I baseplate that also contains the CPU . Tile serial porr Is lIor functional 011 apower supply
(hac Is installed In an expansion or remofebaseplau.

,
(5 W [VPI/

~""[
91% (MIN)
I>-H~~~ UP Any device connected to the seria l pon that uses ... 5 VDC power from the Series
T TIME TIME 9030 power s upply m llsebe Included in the ca lculati on for maxi mum power
20MS 10MS consump tion (see the headI ng "Power Supply Loading Ca!c t.lal 1o n s~ in Chapter 12) .
~ ~ (MIN) ~
4MS CPU Serial Port Informalion
(~~) - (MIN) __ I The serial port connector on the power su pply accesses the CPU serial port, which Is a
PSO ( I L--J L- feature of all Series 90-30 CPUs. See C hapter 5. "C PUs' for Info illation on this ser ial port .

HOLOUP TIME 20 ml, minimum lorlCSG3PWR32 11330

14 m minimum tor ICSiJP'NR322
10 mi. minimum fOflCS93PWR3311332
Figure 412. Timing Diagram for aU Series 9030 Power Supplies
Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)
The lo ngllfe Lithium baltery (IC693ACC301) lIsed to mainta in the contents o f the
CMOS RAM memory In the CPU Is accc~d by remOVing lhe cover plate located 81 the
bottom o f the power s upply facepla te. ThIs battery Is mou nted on a plastic clip attached
to the Inside of th is cover.
The batt ery Is wired to a small Berg fema le connector that connects to ei ther of the IWO
Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board This battery
ca n be replaced with power applied to the PLe .

CFK03561' Chapter" Puwer Supplies 4 19 420 Series 9030 PLC Installatloll alld HanJ\\ 8f'P Matlual - October 1999 CFK0356P
 G

I Chsrer! =cp
==
us=======================

CPU Types for Series 9030 PLCs

There are numerous CPU models available for the Series 9030 PLC which dIffer In speed.
1.0 capacity, size of user memory. and advanced features. This varIety of models gives a
Figure 41.. Backup Banery for RAM Momory system designer considerable nexibillty In choosi ng the one best suIted to the system
beIng designed There are twO basic types of crus. Embedded and Mod ular, The
embedded types fu lOiI the need for a good low cost PLC. bUllack the power,
Caution I expand ability. and versatility of the modular systems. In the embedded types. the CPU
Is built Into the baseplate. In the modular types. the C PU is contaIned InsIde a pl ug -In
module.
If a l.ow Battery Warning (BATT LED turns ON) occurs, replace the
ltattery located In the power s u pplybcfvre re ltlo.,,1ng power rrom t he rack.
Ot herw ise. there Is a possibility that data will be corru pted or the
Embedded CPUs
app li cation program will be cleared rrom memory. T he embedded CPUs are pari of an embedded CPU baseplate. In these products, the
C PU and memory Integrated circuit ch ips are soldered to the backplane board of the
basepla te _ This chapter discusses the CPU features of these producls. Details about the
Addilional BaUery Informalion bascplatc features are located III C hapter 2 There are three dln-erent embedded CI'Us'
Model 31I (lC693CPU31 II. Model 313 (IC693CPU3131. and Model 323 (lC693CPU3231 The
Foradd ltionallttror mat lon on the me mo ry backup battery, see t he chapter. " Memory embedd ed C PUs have the follow ing basic features:
Backup Qnd Backu p Ualtcry."
T he C PU type ca nnot be changed , It Is soldered to the backplane board In
the baseplate.
They do not support the lise of Expansion or Remote rack!>. so an embedded
CPU baseplate does not have an expanSion connector like the modular
base plates do. This means Ihat If you have an applica tion that requires more
than 10 modules, you will ha."e to use a modula r CPU system
T he models 3 11 and 3 13 a re 5'5101 baseplates. and the model 323 Is a 10's101
baseplate, Since they do not require a plug-In CPU module, all numbered
s lots, Including Siol I, ca n be used for 1/0 or Option modules ,
The memory back-up battcry Is located In the Power Supply module: so If
the Power Supply 15 unplugged from the basep lale. the batlery will be
disconnected fro m the memory circuits. which are loca ted on the backplane
circuit boa rd . However. the backplane circuit board contains a high value
capacitor. called a "super capacitor." that can s tore enough cha rge to
malmaln the memory circuits for a s hort period of time If the Power Supply
Is removed or Its battery 15 disconnected. See the section "Super Capacitor
Memory Backup" in Chapte r 6_
T hese CPUs do not have a tlme-of-day (TOO) clock ,

CFK-0356P Chilp((~r 4 Powtr Supplies 421 CFK-D356P 5 1

 ,

o IT]

U!III)II

M . ...

I~ ~~~~l.'otE ~:
DelcriptionLabel ~U."OI
~
Says Wllh CPU' ~~~

I/O BUI
Memo'Y BaCkup E.panslOn
WatningLabel - t - ConnDCIOI'

MelTlOry B;tckup
Warning lebel o.

~"
.~.
CPU SIOI (Siol I)

Figure 51 . Models J11 and J1J (5-5100 Embedded CPU Saseplates

Figure 52. IC69JCHSJ97 5Slot Modular CPU Baseplate

Modular CPUs
General CPU Features
The modular crusconsist of a CPU. mrrno ry. and associated Integrated Circul i ch ips
soldered to ci rcuit board w h ich Is mounted In a plug tn module. The modular crus
Incl ude the model CPU33 1 a nd higher The modu lar CPUs have the following basic Microprocessor
features:
The microprocessor type varies by the CPU mode l'
A CPU module must be Installed In Slot l or a modular CPU baseplate. Slot
I Is a un ique size and ty pe that o nly nts a CPU module (or special Option 80188mlcroprocessorforCPUmodels3 11 / 3\3/323/33 1
modules) . Slot I Is labeled CPU/ I. Details on modular CPU baseplates arc
located In Chapter 2. 80C 188XL Illicroprocessor fo r CPU mo dels 340/ 341

Modular CPUs support expansion and remOle baseplates. so A 25 pln
Ootype femal e expansion co nnector Is loca ted at the right end of the CPU
baseplate for connection to an expansion or remote baseplate
Since the CPU Is modular. It Carl rC<ldlly be replaced or changed to
type If deSired .
On ly one CPU Is allowed per system. and It must be mounted In a CPU
bascpl ate. If more tha n one baseplarc Is used In a system. the additional
ones must be either expansion or remote types that do not contain a CPU .
A mod ular CPU baseplate Is always aSS igned. by defau lt. Rack Number 0
All have a time-of-day (rOD) clock.
80386EX microprocessor for CPU mode ls 350-36 4.
The mlcroproce..'OSor provides all fundam enta l sweep and operation control. and
executlon of all lio n-boolean (as used here. the lerm boolean refers to discrete logic such
a dlrrerent as conlaCts and calls) functlo lls. Boolean fu nctions In the modular CPUs are ha ndled by
a dedicated VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration) Instruction Seque ncer Coprocessor
(lSCP) . All Series 90-30 CPUs use RAM working memory.
CPU Serial Port (Connector on Power Supply)
A IS- pin Otype fema le connector, accessed by opening the hinged door on lhe right
front of the power sup ply. p rovides the connection to a CPU serial port w h ich Is used to
connect to:
A programmer (usu ally a personal computer) runn ing CE Fa nuc PLC program ming
sofrware. The IC690ACC90 1 Mlniconverter/cable kit Is a conven ie nt way to access
this porL See Appe ndix F ror details.
The IC693PRC300 eE Fanuc Hand-Held Programmer. See Chapter II for detailS.
Other seri al devices

52 Series 9030 PLC Installation and Harl/ware Manud/ - Ocfobtr 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapttr 5 CPUs 53
o [1J
~ l'"
Figur. 53. CPU Serial Po" ComectOf on Power Supply
This serial port Is RS- 485 compatible, and uses the CE Fanuc SNP (Series Ninety
Protocol) protocol (slave only) Break-Free SNP became the default prOiocol on all
serial pOrts on the SerIes 90-30 c rus, starting wit h Firmware Release 9.00 for CPUs
350 - 364, and Firmware Release 8.20 for CPUs 31 1 - 341 BreakFrce SNP Is discussed
In a lat er section of this chapler
The seria l port connet tor Is only fU llctionall n a power supply thaI Is Installed In a
baseplate that also contains the CPU [t Is not fun ctional on a power supply th at Is
Installed In a n expansion or remote basepla te
Any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC power fr om the Series
90-30 power supply mus[ be Includrd In the calcul ation for maximum power
consumption (see the headi ng ~ Power Supply loading Ca l culallo ns ~ In Chapter 121
All Series 90-30 CPUs have Ihls serial pOri ar rangement. The 351 , 352, and 363 CPUs
have add itional serial porls, described In a later sectio n of this cha pter
roo Caution
Care must be lake n that co mmon mode vo ltage speclncatlons are mel
ror connect ions to Ihls serlal port. Commo n mode co nd ltlun s Ihat
exceed tllose spec lned wi ll resul t In errors In transmission andlor
damage to Series 90 PLC com ponellts, Commo n mode speclncatlons
are discussed In Append iJc C, Whenlhe common mode vo lt age
speclnc3tlo n ls exceeded, a porI iSQ lalor such as the GE Fanuc
IC690ACC903 must be used. See Ap pe nd lx G for details o n this port
lsolalor.
Memor y Volatility
The term volatility rerers to the Issue of whether or IIOt a certallllllemo ry ty pe retains or
loses Its conte ncs (data) when power Is removed rrom It.
Vo latil e memory - memory that loses tis contents when power Is removed. RAM
memory Is Inherently volalile. Therefore, when the PLC Is turned off, a backup
bauery Is necessary If data loss In RAM memory is to be prevented.
54 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Han:lwart Matlual - October 1999 CFK0356P
No nvolat ile memory - memory thaI retai ns Its contents when power Is removed .
The va rious types of PROM (Programmable ReadOnly Memory) memory are
nonvolatlle.
RAM Memory
Every Series 9030 CPU uses RAM memory for Its Nworkl ng memory_ The RAM chips
M
used arc of the CMOS type. CMOS RAM Is All acronym for CompUmentary MetalOxlde
Semiconductor. Random Access Memory. CMOS RAM Is a relatively fast. low power
memory thai can be easily examined (read) and changed (written to).
In the embedded CPU models. RAM memory Is mounted o n the backplane board . In
the modular CPU models, RAM memory Is Illou nted Inside the CPU modu le. A ba ckup
banery Is usually used to preserve the contents of RAM memory w hen power is ott
RAM Memory Backup/Backup Batlery Information
Plea:.e see Chapter 6 for the fo llowin g Informatio n:
RAM memory backup recomme ndat ions.
Backup ballery Information such as eSlimated life , replacing, delerml nlng
battery age usi ng d ale codes, etc.
Running without a backup battery
Low battery warning Illelhods.
Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) Types
There are three types of PROM devices used In Series 90-30 CPUs:
EPROM : An acrony m ror Erasable Programmable Read -Only Memory It Is a plug-In
Irllegraled circu lI memory device thaI ran be erased with an ultraviolet IIgh!. EPROMs
tan be read when InstaUed In the PLC, however In order \0 write new data to them, they
must be removed rrom the PLC and written to using an external PROM burning device
EEPROM : An acronym fo r Electrically Era~ble Programmable Read-Only Memory. It
is a plug-In integrated ci rcuit memory device Iha l ca n be erased and written to w hile
Installed In the PLC.
Flash Memory: A variation o rthe EEPROM type memory. It also Is an Integra led
circuli device that can be erased and wrhten 10 w hil e Installed In Ihe PLC. One
advantage or CPUs having nash memory storage o r nrmware, Is that nrmware can be
updated by w riting from a Personal Com puler through a PLC se rial pOri to nash
memory. No modules have to be removed for nash Ormware upgrade
Uses of PROM devices in the 9030 CPUs
PROM -type devices 3re used In cwo ways In the 90-30 CPU s:
To store CPU firmware
To store user data, which consists of program, co nn guratloll, and reglsler data .
The fo llowi ng table shows the types of PROM dev ices each CPU uses.
CFK0356P Chi/pter 5 CPUs 55
 --.

IT] [}]
CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations the PROM socket on {he baseplate. In the case of a modular CPU. the CPU must be
unplugged and disassembled,
CPU Firmware and PROM Tabfe Flas h - For CPUs with Ormware stored In Flash. the upgrade Is done by copying a
Fim1w.e EPROM EEPROM fla sh new firmware nle to the CPU's Flash memory. An upgrade kit may be purchased
CPU (S ..OOlld) (for user memory) (for us .. memo<yl (for user memory) from CE Fanue. The upgrade kit COIHalns the necessary OIes. update labels, and
Instructions. This method docs not require disassembling the module. The me
CPU3" EPROM O~~nal Optional NIA downloading Is done either through the POrl on the power supply. or through a pOri
on the front o f the CPU module (If It has one) , The applicable method wUl be
CPU313 EPROM O~~nal Optional NlA documented In your upgrade klll nSlructlons, Downloadable firmware upgrade
CPU313 EPROM O,.~nal Optional NIA Oles are also fOlllld In the Technical Support area of lhe CE Fanue Web she. See
Chapter 13 for Web site Information.
CPU331 EPROM Oplional Optional NlA
To order an upgrade kIt, w rite down the full catalog number of your modu le from the
CPU340 EPROM NIA NlA Optional module Identification label on the side of the module, determine your current nrmware
revision level. then call your PLC distributor. If you are not sure what nrmware version
CPU341 EPROM 'Optional Optional ' Optional you currently have, see the heading on the next page ~Determlnlng CPU Revision
CPU350 Flash NlA NlA Standard Levels (Versions) ."

CPU351 Flash NlA NlA Standard Flash Firmware Upgrade Procedure

CPU351 Flash NlA NIA Standard The operating system nrmware Is updated by cOImecti ng a PC compatible computer to
the applicable PLC serial port and running the PC Loader sofr.vare Included with the
CPU360 Flash NlA NIA Standard nmnvare noppy dISk.
CPU363 Flash NlA NIA Standard The computer used for this task should be an IBM AT compatIble or better PC wUh a
minimum 640K of RAM. one 3 . 5 ~ or high de nsity 5.25 - noppy drive. MS-DOS version 3.3
CPU364 Flash NIA NIA Standard
- or late r, a hard drIve, and an RS-232 serial port In addItion. a rnlnlconverterl serlal cable
Early versions of the CPU341 support optional EPROM and optional Is requIred. The followIng mlnlconverterl serlal cable kit Is available
EEPROM on ly. Starti ng with hardware version IC693CPU34 1-J and lC690ACC90 1 Mlnlconverter Kit (RS-2321RS- 485) with cable and 9-pln to
Flmlware version 4 61. only optional Flash Is supported 25pln adapter. (ThIs product Is documented In Appendlx F)

CPU Firmware Determining CPU Revision levels (Versions)

The CPU nrmware contaI ns th e bastc operati ng Inst ructIons fo r the PLC. FIrmware Is
developed by a CE Fanuc product engineerIng group. It Is stored In either EPROM or
Flash memory, depend Ing on the part icu lar CPU.
CPU Firmware Upgrade (Update)
From lime to time. new nrmware Is released . A new nrmware version may contaIn
support for new features or Improvements to exIsting features. Once a new version of
CPU n rlllware Is released . all new CPU modu les w ill be sold w Ith that versIon. The
Technical Support section of the CE Fanuc Web sHe lists CPU revIsIon historIes. matching
version numbers to associated features. See Chapter 13 for Information 0 11 the CE Fanuc
Web sIte. Users who could bcnent from a new nrmware release may choose to upgrade
their CPU by Installing new nrmware. Upgrades come In (wo formalS . dependIng on
the type of CPU to be upgraded. The ~C P U FIrmware a nd PROM Connguratlon table
tnlhls chapter shows w hIch type of Ormware storage device each CPU has. The two
types are:
EPROM - For CPUs with Ormware stored In EPROM. the u pgrade Is done by
replacing the CPU 's EPROM t hlps(s) . The upgrade kit contaIns lIew EPROM
chlp(s). update labels. and Installallolllnsi ructlons. To upgrade the EPROM In an
embedded CPU system, the module In slot I must be unplugged to gain access to
Ir you plan to ma ke changes to your system . you will need {O know If your CPU can
support those changes The features and capabilities of your CPU are determIned by Its
revision levels (hardware and nrmware) . This sectIon d iscusses methods that you ca n
use to determine your CPU 's revision levels and associated features and capabilities
Direct Methods
Obtain the Infonnallon from the Important Product [nformatlon (IP!) sheet that
came wit h your CPU. However. if your CPU nrmware has been upgraded . the IPI
will not IndIcate the current revision level.
The surest way to determine a CPU's nrmware revision level Is to read It from the
CPU by using your programmer. Your programmer must be connected to the PLC
a nd be In O nline or Mo nItor mode. and the PLC mllst be powered u p. For eXBmple.
on the Loglcmaster ~ PLC STATUS and CONTROL~ screen Is an item called
~SOFTWARE REVISION: The data dIsplayed In that fie ld (such as 6.04)15 Ihe
Onnware revIsIon level. See the LogJcmaster 90-30 Programming So(twarr Usu 's
MalluaL CFK-0466 (or the user 's manual for the programming sortware you use), for
addltlo llal detaIls.

56 Series 90-30 PLC Ins/alli tlon and Hardwan! Manual- October 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5 7
 ~

IT]
Indirect Method
C heck the catalog number prInted on the mod ule Idcntlflcatlon label 0 11 the side o f
the module. On al l Series 90-30 modules. this catalog number Indicates the module's
revision level(sl. For some C PUs. the catalog mllnbcr contains a si ng le letter al the
end 10 IndIcate the CPU's overall revision level For exalllpic.
IC693C PU341 J
-
o
Comparing EPROM and EEPROM Features
Fo r one tlme applications, an EEPROM Is the more pracllcal o f the two. [t ca n be created
In the PLC Itself and doesn't requi re any additional outside eqUipment. An EPROM Is
not as convenient to create. It must be created outside the PLC using an EPROM bu rlier.
However, a n EPROM Is less expe nsive than an EEPROM . So. If you nced to reproduce
multiple caples of a program to use on a large number of Identical controls, It may be
cost efrectlve to use EPROMs. especially If you already have an EPROM burner.

This tells us th at the module has a revision level J. Later CPU modules began to be Procedure for Creating an EPROM
produced with two revision letters. such as
TIlese are the steps for creati ng an EPROM or muhlplc EPROMs'
IC693C PU351 EK Install all EEPROM In the PROM socket ofl he PLC you wilt use to develop
the application program.
The first leuer sta nds for the hardware revisIon level and the second for the Deve lop and debug the program In RAM memory. then write It to the
firmware revIsion level. EEPROM
These letters can be cross-referenced to the flrlllware versIon. A revlson history list Remove the EEPROM from the PLC and Install It [n the EPROM burner as a
for Series 90 30 products. Including CPUs, can be fou nd In the CE Fanuc we b site master to make one or more EPROMs.
techn ica l s upport arca (www.gefalluc.comlstJpportfthatcrossreferencesrevlslon Install the blank EPROM In the EPROM burner and copy the program on
letters, fir mware versions. and related fea tures. Also, If you have access to the the EEPROM 10 the blauk EPROM .
progress ion of IPls that were Issued for the particular C PU (these are available on Install the EPROM In the PLC 's PROM soc ket. then copy Its contents 11110
the CE Fanuc PLe InfoLink CD ROM) yOll ca n nnd the desi red cross reference. Of RAM memory. The EPROM then serves as a n on board backup to RAM
course. you can also con tact your distributor or CE Fa nuc for help memory.
If your nrrnware has been upgraded In the past. a small label that comes In the Note: Your CPU ca n be conngured to toad the the application program stored In the PROM
upgrade kit s hould be attached to the s ide of the module next to the module device automatically Into RMt memory w hen the CPU Is powered up. See the heading
Identification label to Indica te the current firmware revision level. However. the -Running Without a Memory Backup Battery~ In Chapter 6 for details.
label could have been forgotten. so to be su re . you may want to read the
Information from the CPU wit h a programlller as described In the ~ Dlrect Method -
above On models wit h EPROM nrrnware. the nrmware revision level will also be Caution]
printed on the EPROM.
Ir PROM Is conn gured (on Ihe CPU co nnguratlon sc reen) as the
power up program source and a PROM d evice Is not present In the
EPROM and EEPROM User Program Storage Options PROM socket , or a bl ank PROM Is In the socket, o n a power-up cycle , a
blank program will be cop ied Into the CPU's RAM memory and the
The Model 3 11 . 313, 323, 331. and an earlier version o f the Model 341 crus have a Usu
program In RAM memo ry w ill b e 1051. Always keep a backup copy o f
PJ?OMoptJon for slor[ng uscr application programs. register data, and configuration
your current program nl es In case of all emcrgency.
data in non volatlle memory. Application programs are usually dcvc10ped In a CPU's
batterybacked RAM memory and executed from lh ls RAM memory. But. If additional EEPROM and EPROM memory devices are available from CE Fa nuc Cata log numbers
program Integrity. or operation of the PLC without a batlery Is desired. an opUonal for these devices are listed In the following table.
EEPROM or EPROM can be Installed In a spare socket (labeled PROCRMI PROM) Oil the
embedded CPU baseplates or In a socket Inside the Model 331 CPU module (and Inside the Table 51. EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbefs
early versions of Mode13<1 1 CPU prior to hard ware version IC693CPU341 J and nrmware CE Fanuc Third !'any Source
Il!lcase 4.6 1). TIle Model 33 1 CPU module (and the ea rly versions of Model 341 ) has a CllllogNumbcr IHserlp'lolI rvtNulllber Ve ndor ParI Number
J~lmper labeled JPI located next to the EEPROM.PROM socket to allow you to se lect either
tC693fCC305 (Qry 4) 28C256 EEPROM. 350", 44A 72.5999000 XICOR X28C256P
EEPROM or EPROM These Jumper positions are shown below. XICORX28C2S6P2S
XICORX28HC256p tS
IC693':<:C306 (QIY 4) 32Kx8UVEPROM . 150m 44A12J319000 NEC PD27C256AD 15
Jum per Selects Alm,l AT21C2S6 tSDCt
'lbshlbll TC57256AD IS
3 2 EEPROM Ithilchtl tN21C256AG IS
AMD AM21C256 t50DC
2 I EPROM !Olt! TD27C256A 1
-

58 Suits 9030 PtC Installarloll alld Hardware Manual - Octobtr J999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapur 5 CPUs 59
 - ~

o o
Flash Memory User Memory Addresses (References)
The Model 340. 341 (later versions), 350. 35 1, 352, 360.363. and 364 CPUs have Flash
Data In the Series go30 PLC programs Is referenced by Its memory address. A reference
m~mory for user program storage, (Note that versions of the Model 341 CPU prior to
Indicates the way that data Is stored [n the PLC . A reference speclOes both a memory
nm1\vare re lease 4.61 had EEPROM memory,) TheRead/Wrlte/ 'trlfy process (or use r
type and a precise location (number) with in that memory type. For example:
programs Is the same for Flash memory as It Is for EEPROM operations. Flash memory
opera tlons (Read. Write. or Verify) are accessed (rolTll he Program Utilities Functi on %100001 speciflessdd ress lin Input memory
menu or frolll another Program UlllUlesscreen in the Loglcmaster 9030120/Mlcro %ROO256 sped nes add reu 2561 n regiSter memory.
programming softwa re
Difference Between a Memory Address and a Nickname
Series 90-30 CPU Capacities
nle following table describes the maximum capacltles and operating features for the Series The % symbol Is used to disti nguish memory addresses from nicknames. For example.
9030 PLC CPU models. For State Logk: CPUs . .see the section "System SpeciflCalions for %117 (or %10000 17) Is a memory add ress. The similar term. 117 (II has no %5Ign) . Is
Series 9030 State logic crus" In Chapter 9. viewed by the PLC as a nickname and could be used wit h most memory addresses. For
example. If you had a motor In your pla nt ca lled ~ lnreed No. 17." and It was commo nly
Table 52. Series 9030 CPU C.pao~ie s refer red to as "11 7" by the people In you r planl . YOll mi ght wish to use 11 7 as the
nickname ror the output coli (%Q I I) that turns on that motor. You are allowed 10 do so
nput
~:,~.'
I ~p"d. ~Ulput Keglsler u,e~ "rogram to l.oallng because the PLC can distinguish between Ihe nickname. 111 (your ulckname for memory
(MHz) Proc~sor Points Points M e mory Memory Polnl
(Mulmum) address 96Q II ). and memory address %111
Math
CPU311 ID 80188 160 I 160 ' IK UJytu) 6K(Bytn)
CPU313 ID 80 188 160 I 160 ' 2K(Byt~) IZK(B)'tes)
"' User Memory Reference Types
CPU323 ID 80188 320 2 320 2 ZK(Bytt.\) 12KIB)'tn)
"' The user references referred to In lhe following tab les are explained In the Series 9030
"" PLC CPU /llscruction Set Reference Manual. CFK0467 .
CPU331 ID 80 188 ~ K(Bytl's) 16K(B),ll's) 0"
'" '" 19.9K(B),IU)
CPU340
C;PU3 ~1
20
20
8OC l88XL
8OCl88XL
'" $12
199K(BYlu)
l2K(Bylt.\)
80K(Dy l e~)
"" Table 53. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311 - 341
'" '" "'
,.
CPU3S0 2048 2048 199K(Bytts) 32K(Bytes)
" 80386EX Y"
Referen ce (Memory) lYpe
ModeO I 1/3111JZJ MooeOJI /340/34J

,. '
CPU35 1 2048
CPU352
" B0386EX
80386EX 2048
20~8 Note 3 NOle '
Rere~nceRange Size Re re~ nc e R'lIge 51'"
CPU360 " 80386EX 2048
2048
ZOU
Note3 NOle4
NOI1'4
Usr.q"lrogrllm logiC Not1l1'lPUc1I1J11' 6K byll'~ NOllppllclIlJl1' CPU33 1 UKbyle5

""
NOle3 Y" CPU340 32K hytes

"". ,.
C;PU363 80386EX 2048 NOlf3 NUI1'4 CPU341 80Kb),ts
Y"
CPU364 Z048 Z048 DIKTfte Input\ "DIOOOI ""10320t 512bH~ ""'0001 'lb10512 5tZbh,
" 80386EX
I Maximum or 160 combined I .. 0 points.
Notl' 3 Note 4
DlscrfleOUlpUIJ
Dlscrl'ltglohllls
't6QOOO I . %00320 t
l\,GOOOI ~G I 280
512bllll
12801Jlts
"00001 't6QOS 12
%GOOO I 't6GI280
512blt,
1280btlJ
Maximum or320 combined I .. 0 potnts.
Conflgurllblt rrom 128 10 32.640woTlI!.ln 128 word Inc:renltnl$ InttrnBlcol1s %MOOOI %MJOZ4 IOZ4blts 'l6MOOOI %M I024 102~ Blt\

Depends un n~lgned value, ror c:onngurablt word memory ('t6R. Cl&AQ. %AI) Maximum Is 240K Byte Temporlll)'cotis "TOOO J . 'lb1'0256 25Gb!., %TOOO I 'lbT0256 256hlu
CPU352 hllJ 'w(lwatthlIsed floating point mllh Othl'r~ CPU" havt nrmwarrbaSf'(! Ilrnltlng point math. System\tllus rdtrtncu 't6SOODI %SOOJ2 J2bll~ 't6S00D 1 . 't6S0032 32bJ\.\
't6SAOO I %SA032 3ZlIlt$ %SAOOO,'t6SAOO32 32btlll
't6SDOO I %SB03Z 32 b1t~ 't6SBOOO I %SBOO3Z J2bJIl>
%SCOO I . %SCOJZ J2blts 9bSCOOO I CI&SCOOJ2 32bJu
Systtm rtglstl'T refrrtf\f1'S %Roool %R05 IZ(31 n 512....-ords %ROOOI %R2048 2Kwords(33 1)
't6Rooo l ""R I024 (313) IOZ4words %ROOO I CI&R9999 9999wordJ(3 4 0/3~ I)
AAaloglnpuls %AIOOI 't6A I064 64wort1~ %A IOOO I %AI0 128 1 28word~13J I )

%A IOOO I %AI IOZ4 1 02 .worll~(3 40/ 3 41 )

Analogoutpub %AQOOI . %AC)032 32word~ 't6AQODI.l\,AQ064 64wordst3JI)

~AQDOI . CI&AQ2S6 256wOfd o,(3 4 0 / 3~ I)
System regiSters * %SROO I . %SROI6 16words %SR(J() I %SROI6 IGwords
160 phYliel1VO nlolllim llin ... ith 16 POllI t mlXillk. In51111ed. J20 INllmllm with 32 POint modules Inlllilcd
Mly ~ ~ Ic ....edonl y .... Ith
I 111l1dHdd Prugrammer(so:c t~ II It1dH~ld Progfllmmel U.C'I Manu.l. GfK4I02) 1M)' not be
rdcl~ccd In IIkr', IOlle prOIflll1

5 10 Series 9030 PLC /"st8/1arion and Hardware Ma"ult/ - October 1999 GFK0356P GFK0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5 11
 ~
, .......

IT] o
Table 5-4. Range Ind 51,.01 User Rele<enc .. I", CPU Models 350 Ihrough 364 ADD Instruction would add the correction val ue to It. and another Service Request
wou ld write the new val ue (0 the TOO clock . A poss ible drawback to this method Is
that If you replace your CPU you will have to determine a new correction factor.
Model 350135 1/35V360/363/36 4 CPU
Referenct: 1)rpe Also, this method is affected by temperature changes. so its success Is based on
Reference Range Size holding the CPU's ambient temperature stable.
MllxlrnumUser m@nlory' Nota ppllcable 240K Bytes. configu ralJle If more accu racy Is needed. the PLC cou ld be Interfaced to a third pany solution
(CPUlSO 32K Bytes. fixed) such as a radio link or Global Positioning System (GPS) satellite system.
Discrete Inputs %10001 %12048 2048bllS
DtscreteoutplilS %QOOO1 "Q20.8 lO48blts Break-Free SNP Protocol
Dbcrete globals %COOOI %G I280 1280blls
Break-Free SNP became the default protoco l on all serial ports on the Series 9030 c r us.
Imemalcotls %MOOOI %M 4096 .f096bllS
starting with Firmware Release 9.00 for CPUs 350 . 364. and Firmware Release 8.20 ror
Thmporarycolls " T0001"T0256 256bllS CPUs 311 - 3-11 The BreakFree feature makes the protocol compatible with a wider
System status rererences %$0001 . %50032 32blls variety of moderns. This feature Is corn patl ble w ith existi ng SN P master units such as
%SAOOI -!JbSAOJ2 32blls computers running PLC programming software. or PCM modules In a few
%SBOOI . "58032 32bllS appllcaltons, primarily where a combination of multi-drop SNP communications and
%5C001 . %$C032 J2blls very short PLC sweep times are used , users may deSire. for performance reasons. to
Systc III register references %ROOOl %R32640' 128 32,640 wads . conflgurablc disable Break Free SNP. BreakFree SNP can be disabled and reenabled via
(CPU35O; 9999 wO'd$, IlxedJ Communications Request Instructions. The Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User's
Analoglnpuls %AIOO I%A I3261Q" 128 32.640 words .conflgurable. Manual. GFK05820 (when available) will document these Communications Request
(CPUlSO. 2048 words, fixed) Instructions These Instructions are currently detai led In Important Product Informalion
AnalogoutpulS %AQOO [.%AQ32S40 128 32.640 word~.conn8urable (lPI) publlcatlon number CFK-08IOW.
(CPUlSO. 5 12words. fixed)
System reRlstcrs t 96SROO I 'lbSR028 28words
t MlY be \'Ic ... cd only wnh. Hand -Held Prolll'lVlVll(f (totC !1It: Hlnd-Hcld Progrlmmer Uter. Manll.l. 350 - 364 CPUs
UrK-OIIOH; mly not be I':rClcnced In, Utotl . lugl~ plognlm
The 350364 group of crus was developed to Illeet the needs of customers requiring
Depend. on IIKr-dcfincd value(') or C<lIIfitlllnlblC memory
Increased memory size, faster processing speed, and additional features not available on
the311 341 CPUs
Application Program Compatibility
Programs that have been developed on Series 90-30 CPUs 311-341 will automatically Compatibility With HandHeld Programmer (HHP) and Memory Card
be translated by the programming soflwarc when used on CPUs 350-364 Programs
The user program In CPUs 350-364 C8nllO be viewed or edited with the Series
creilted or translated for CPUs 350-364 will aU loOliH lcally be translated when used with
90-30 HandHeld Programmer (IC693PRC300) . You must usc one of the CE Fanuc
CPU s 3 11 -3 41 : however. be aware that some CPUs support fe atures. such as
programllli ng software packages to create or edit CPU 350-364 user programs.
noallng-polnt math or larger memory sizes. that are not supported by ol her c r us. In
those cases, attempti ng to load a program to a CPU not supporting one or more of Ihe The Series 90 Memory Card (used on the Hand-Held Programmer) Is not supported
programmed or conngured features will result In an error. However. In some cases It by CPU, 350-364.
may be possible to edit the program and connguratlon 10 make them compallble with
The only operations supported by the HHP 's PROCRAM mode are writi ng to and
the targeted CPU.
reading from the CPU's nash memory.
Alt hough the HHP 's CONFIC Illode can be used to perform basi c connguratlon of
CPU Time-of-Oay (TOO) Clock Accuracy these CPUs. It cannot handle specialized para nlelers such as those pertaining to the
embedded Et hernet Interface In the CPU364 .
The accuracy of the Series 9030 time of-day clock Is C 9 seconds per day across the rated
operating temperature range of 0-60C. The accuracy Is relatively stable al any nxed The HH P ca n be used to change the Tlme-ofOay Clock unless the Mem Pro/Kl
temperature. For Ap plica tions thai requ ire greater accuracy. the following suggestions co nngu ratlon parameter Is selto Enablcdand the keyJock switch Is In the ON
are furnished ' (Protecl) position.
For an installation w here the temperature of the CPU is stabie. measure the amount The HHP can be used to edit data values In %R registers.
M

of time drift for a 24 hour period. then program a McorrecUon factor Into the ladder The HHP can be used to Invoke or clea r overrides on these CPUs
program to add or subtraci seconds periodically to keep the CPU time accurate. The
Instrucl\on to use In th is case is Service Request 17. KC hange/ReadTlme-of-Oay
M

Clock. AI the appropriate time. a Service Request would read the TOO clock. an

5 J2 SeritS 90-30 PLC InSfili/aHon alld HanJwsrt Manual - October / 999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapler 5 CPUs 5J3
 ----

o [}]
350 - 364 CPU Advanced Features Additional Serial Ports (CPU351, CPU352, CPU363)
Although all Series 9030 crus have II seria l pori thai Is accessed through the connector
Advanced features of 350 3U CPUs
on the power supply, the CPU3S I. CPU352. and CPU363 each have two additional serial
Feature CPU350 CPU351 CPU352 CPU360 CPU363 CPU~ ports. The cannectors for Ihese addi tional serial ports are ",cunled on the front of each
Memory 32K 240K 1 240K 1 240K 1 240K 1 240K CPU , These two bullt ln seria l porlS elimi nate the need for the CPU to access seria l ports
fixed Corllgur.b~ Confl~.Jlabie ConngJrabie Configurllble Cor1igurable across the PLC backplane, resulti ng In bener system per rormance . These two pOrtS
Serial PorlS 1 3 3 1 3 , supportt heSNP/ SNP-X master and slave protocols (see previous section ~ Break.Free
SNP Prococorl. RTU slave protocol (In Firmware Version 8.0 and later), and the Serial
FloatifW:J Yes' Yes Yes Yes' Yes' Yes' I/ O reature (In F'lmlware VersiOn 8.0 and later) that lets you create a custom serial
Point Math (Firmware) (Firmware) (Hardware) (Frmware) (Flrmwlue) (Firmware) o utput. Instructions on how to use these ports can be found In the &rles 90 PLC &rlal
flash Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Communications User 's Manual, GFK0582C or later.
Memory
Key Switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Floating-Point Math
Sequential Yes' Yes' Yes' Yes' Yes' Yes'
Evenl AIISerles 9030 CPUs can work with Integer numbers. (The set or Integer Ilumbers
Recorder consists or all positive and negative whole numbers, Including zero.) The floatlngpo lnt
math rcature enables a CPU to work with dec imal numbers In addllion to Integer
Embedded No No No No No Yes'
Ethernet numbers. It also prOVides trigonometric, logarithmic. exponential. and radian
Interface conversion runctions. Floatlngpol nt math is also rererred to as "rea l numbe r ~ Illath The
CPU352 has always had hardware based floallng -poi nt mat h capabilities due to Its
1 Denotes reatures supported In CPU Ormware release 9.0 and later. bulltln math co-processor chip , Starting with CPU nrmware release 9.0. all o r the other
CPUs In the 350 - 364 CPU group were provided with nrmwarebased noatlng-polnt
math capability. Ahhough there is a speed dlfTerence her-ween the hardwarebased
Details of 350 - 364 CPU Advanced Features noatlng-pOlnt math o r the CPU352 and the Ormwarebased type, thl!. wJII not be
slgnlOcant to many users. For applications where raster perrormance Is Importa nt , the
CPU352 Is the best cho ice. The noatlng-polnt math Instructions are explained In the
Upgrading Older CPUs Series 90-30 PtC CPU lflsUucflofl Set Re(ertnceMallulll, GFK0467K (the leller K Is the
revision or version Indicator) or later
Older versions orthe CPU nrmware do not support some or the features In the table
above (see table root note) These reatu res may be added to older 350 - 360 CPUs by
upgrading them to CPU n rmware version 9.0 or later. (The 363 and 364 CPUs were Flash Memory
equipped wllh firmware version 9.0 w hen released as new products.) No hardware
Allor the 350 - 364 CPUs have built-In Flash memory. whlcll serves two purposes:
changes are required ror th is upgrade. For more Inrormatlon 011 the subject or
upgrading, see the heading ~ CPU Firmware Upgrades~ earlier In this chapter. It provides no n-volatile storage or the CPU Ormware.
It gives you the option orslorlng program. connguratlon, and register data In
Memor y/Configurable Memory non volati le Flash memory. Two ways or using this memory are: (1) to store an
onboard backup copy of user memory (although we stili recommend that you keep
Starti ng with CPU firmware vers ion 9.0, the 351 364 CPUs have 240K or a separate backup copy or your complete program raider) , and (2) ror running in a
user-conngurable memory, The CPU350 has 32K or nxed memory. The conngurable balleryless scheme. for details, please see Chapter 6,
memory reature lets you specl ry the amount o( %R. %Al. and %AQ word memory,
Discrete memory (%1. %Q. %M, etc.) sizes are not conngurable. Word memory can be Keyswitch
conngured rrolll 128 to 32,640 words In 128 word increments. w hich gives 255 possible
All 350 - 36 4 CPUs have a keyswltch: however. some versions or the CPU nrmware do
sizes, The amou nt or memory avai lable for a use r program depends on how much Is
not su pport a ll or the keyswllch reatures (see the section ~De termlnlng CPU Revision
configured ror word memory
Leve l s~ earlier In this chapter) . These dl rrerences are described In this section. Note that
the keyswltc hes o n some of these CPUs are labeled ON / RUN and OFF/STOP and on
Note others are Just labeled ON and OFF. Regardlessofthe labeli ng. all or these keyswltches
work 3S described below:
ConOgurable Memory has limited support In Logicmaster Version 9.02
a nd later (li mited to 16K %R words, 8K %AI words, and 8K %AQ Flash Memory Protecti on: This sta ndard . hard-wired feature Ciln be used to preve n t
words), and full support In Control (Version 2.2 and later) and VersaPro Flash mcmory from being changed by unauthori zed people (people withou t a key) .
(a ll versions) . When the key swhch Is In the ON position, Flash memory cannot be changed

514 S~rles 9(}-30 PLe Installaf/otl atld Hardw3rt Matlual- October 1999 CFK0356P CfK0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5 15
 '-

o IT]
(written (0) . This keyswltch rca(Ur~ will always be In effect. regardless o f how the
next two conngurable fea tures are sel.
Run/SlOp (conngurable): This feature was Introduced In CPU nrmware release 1.0.
It Is. by default. disabled . 11 Is nOt funCtional unless the RIS Switch' parameter on the
CPU conOguratlon screen Is set to Enabled. This feature. when enabled. le ts you SlOp
the I'LC by turning the key switch to OFF. o r sta rt the PLe rUllIllng by IUrnlng the
key switc h 10 ON (If there are no faults) .
Irthe PLe has a non-fatal fault . turning Ihe key switch from OFF 10 ON will
cause the RUN light on the power supply to nash forS seconds. If you again
tu rn the key swllc h OFF. then ON duri ng the 5 seconds. the fault will clear and
the PLe will go Into f un mode (a nd the RUN IIghl will Slay ON).
trlhe PLe has a ratal raull . you w ill not be able to use the keyswltch to either
clear the raul! or put the PLC Imo run mode. You will have to correct the cause
or the rault berore being able to resume operation
RAM Memory and Override Protection (conngu rab le) : This reature was
Introduced In CPU nrmware release 8.0. This reature Is, by derault, disabled . 11 Is
not runctlonal unless the Mem Protect: parameter 0 11 the CPU conOguraUbn screen is
sct (0 IIabled. If Ihts reature Is enabled and the keyswllch Is ON, (1) user RAM
memory can not be changed (2) discrete points cannot be overridden, a nd (3) Ihe
TOO clock cannot be changed wit h the Hand Held Programmer (however. the TOO
clock can stili be cha nged using programming software)
Prolect your keys . Each new 350 364 CPU Is supp lied with a pair o f keys for Ihe key
switch. If you use one or more or the key switch protection femures described above, we
recommend you carefu lly guard your keys If they are lost. misp laced. or stolen, you
Illay be locked out from working on your PLC. and unauthorized persons may have
access to it. Replacement keys can be purchased under pan number 44 A736756 GOI.
This kit contains 3 sets of CPU keys, All 350 . 364 CPUs use the same key.
Of course. you can choose to nOI usc any or the keyswltclt protection features , In which
case you can leave the keyswltch set to the OFF position, and leave Ihe two conngu rable
keyswltch reatllres set at their defaull (disabled) sClll ngs . Then. you will not need to use
a key to access the PLC.
Only the trigger samp le Is time stamped. The trigger sample can be lime-stamped In
BCD (maxim um resolution of Is) or POSIX for mat (maximum resolution of IOms) ,
The time stamp Is only placed once at the trigger po lru The SER does not support
more than one time slamp per recording
The SER can be conngured ror pre . mid. or posHrlSHer modes.
Embedded Ethernet Interface (CPU364)
The CPU364 consists or a CPU and all Ethernet Interrace combi ned In one module. This
module orrers Ethernet capabtlltles formerly available only wit h the separate
IC693CMM32 1 El hernetlllodule . The CPU36 4 orfers several adva nt ages compared to
using a separate CPU and Ethernet module:
II only occupies one slot In the PLC baseplate compared 10 the (wo slols required by
separate CPU and Ethernet modules.
The IC693CMM321 Ethernet module requires an external transceiver The CPU364
does not require one si nce It has this fu nctionality bullt ln. To use th is Internal
tra nsceiver. conneclto lhe 10BASET porI. However, If you choose. you may use an
external transceiver by connecting 10 the CPU364's AAUI pori , which bypasses the
Internal transceiver (see Appendix L for GE Fanuc transceiver Information)
Because they both reside In the CPU364 module, the CPU and Ethernet Interface
can communicate wit hout using the PLC backplane. This give faster
communications speed compared to using separate CPU and Ethernet modules,
whi ch have to use the slower path across the PLC ba ckplane.
Beginning with Firmware Release 9.1. Ihe Et hernet Global Data (EGO) and
conngurable Name Resol u tion features were ad ded to Ihe CPU364 These featllres
8re not supported by the IC693CMM321 Ethernel module . Loglcmaster will not
Include support for these features They will only be supported In Control, Version
2.2 or later. and In all verslOllS of Versa Pro programming sortware. For details about
these features, please sec publication GFK154IA or later versio ns (when ava ilable) .
rCP/1? Eth~rnet Communlcaffofl.S for tire Series 90 PLC User 5 Manual.

Sequential Event Recorder (S ER) Instruction

Th is runctlonallnstrucllon (programmed tn ladder logic) was Introduced In CPU
n rm ware release 9 0 a nd Is ava ilable In all of the 350 - 35 4 CPUs that have thiS nrmware
The purpose o f the SER Is to provide a dynamiC troubleshooting and debuggi ng tool . In
effect. It takes ~snaps ho t s~ of the on / offsta lus of groups of discrete points that you
specify. You also speci fy how many or these snapshots to take. w hen a nd how often
they wJl1 be taken, and w here In memory they will be stored . The stored snapshots can
be analyzed 10 see the time relationship of the bits sampled , Please see the Series 9030
PLe CPU Jllstructloll Set Reference Milnual. GFK0467K or later for details on using Ihls
Instrucllon. SOllle feature h ighl ights
An SER runctlon block collects up to 32 con tiguous or non-contiguous bits per
sample
Each SER function block can capture up to 1024 samples.
If the SER Is embedded In a periodic su brouti ne. sampling rate Is determ ined by the
period ic subrOutine execution rate.

5 16 Series 9030 PLC l"stltJlatlon lind HanJwarr Manua/- October J999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chaptet 5 CPUs 5 17
 "
o o
Hardware Features of the 350 364 CPUs CPU351. CPU352. and CPU363 Hardware Features
These three modules are similar In features a lld funclionailly. The CPU35 1 a nd CPU352
look Identical except (or labeling. The CPU363 has the same fea tures as the other two.
CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features bu! the orienlallon o f Its Port I a nd Pon 2 connet:tors Is reversed fro m those of the
CPU351 and CPU352. and Its LED Indicator lights. key switch. and shield ground
These two modules look Identical except for labeling. connector are In dlrrercnl locations (The s hIe ld ground connector Is on the front panel
o rlhe CPU363, labeled ~ FRAME, ~ but Is loca ted o n the bOltom of the CPU35 1 and
These modules feature an LED light. labeled ri llS Port Hthat
CPU352 modules.)
Indicates serial pon activity through the seria l co nnector on the
PLC power supply. 'lYplcally. Ihls LED will nash w hile data Is CPU35 1 OSNP
being transferred through the port , and will stay o ff when the
,,10) o~,
OP .
ponls Inactive. "\9J CPU 313
0"
These modules also have the keyswllch. described earller In this
chapter, thai Is standard on the 350-364 CPUs.
~ ~,
CPU Finnware Upgrade
I~ 1t",,,. OfF/C\
The CPU nrmware, w hich Is stored In Flash memory. Is loaded through the serial pon PI"" 1 lb-JlJ212
...
STOP' \ : : J

('o nnector on the PLC Power Supply

o>OR,.1n1
RS.2J2 ll!21J
I_ _ _
PIN
'

'-
~
0"
"'"
CPU 350
0"
"'.
CPU 360

888
0

@ ~, @~,
1
=
~
go
@
It .....,
" " ,
~-
PIN I

~
"'" ShlelclGround
CooneC1Of

Figure 5-4. CPUs 351, 352, and 363

CPU Firmware Upgrade

The CPU nrmware, w h ich Is sto red In Flash memory. is loaded through the Port 1
conneClor on these modules ' faceplate using Loader software s upplied with the
nnnware upgrade ki t. The IC693C8 L3 1G cable can be used for lhls purpose (see Chapler
= = 10 for data s heet on Ihls cable) .

Keyswitch
ThiS Is a s tandard C PU keyswltch , d iscussed earlier In this cha pter

Shield Ground Connection Tab

T hiS lab Is located on the bottom of t he CPU35 1 and 352 modules a nd 011 the fro nt o f the
CPU363 module. It Is u sed to make the modu le's s hield ground connectio n. A wire with

5 18 Series 90-30 PLe InstallatioTl atJd Hardware Manual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5 19
 ,

"
IT) o
th e applicable terminal ends Is suppJled wit h the module for this purpose. Please sec the Used with autodialer feature 10 call a pager, To use th iS feature . conngure protocol
section ~ Modlile Shield Crou nd lng- In C hapter 2 nnstallallon-) for details as Custom. See CFK0582. Series 90 PLC Serial Communlcartons USlr's f..Jllnu;!/ for
details.
Serial Ports
Pin Assignments for CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Serial Pons 1 & 2
The 351. 352, a nd 363 CPUs have th ree serial ports. One Is accessed through a connector
T he following two tables describe the pin asslgnOlenlS ror each of t he two front panel
011 the PLC power s upply (standard serial port found on all Series 9030 CPUs), and the
seria l ports on the CPU351. CPU352. and CPU363
connectors for the other two are on the modules ' front pa nel. labeled Port I and Port 2.
Table 5,5, Pon 1 (RS-2321
The CPU351, 352. and 363 seria l ports are con ngurable using the programming software
conflgurator (unction. Each pori can also be conngured using a COMM_REQ For de-
Pin Signal
ta ils abou t lIsl ng these ports and aboullhe COMM_REQ instruction , please see publica-
Number Name Description
tion CFK-058Z. Series 90 PLe Serial Communications User's Manual.
I CTS Clear To Send
Serial Port Front Panel Connectors 2 TXO Transmit oala
3 OV StgnalGround
Port 1. the top port Is RS232 compatible. This port has a Gpin Rl ll connector This
4 OV 51gllaiGround
connector has fema le contacts and Is similar to modular Jacks commonly used for
telephones and moderns. The IC693CBL316 can be used to access this pon. provld 5 RXO ReceiveDala
ing a direct connection to an RS232 device w ilhout the need for a converter. See 6 RTS RequuI to Send
Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable.
Port 2, the bottom porI Is RS485 cornpallble. Access to Pon 2 Is throug h a IS'pln 0 Table 5-6, Port 2 (RS-<\85)
connector thaI has female contacts.
Pin Signa l
Serial Port Status LEOs Number Na me Description
The CPU35 1 and CPU352 have three LEOs that Indicate the status of serial port activity 1 Shield Cable Shield
on the CPU 2 NC NoCOlll1ettion
TIle SNP LED on the CPU35 1 and CPU352 Is called PS Port on the CPU363. This 3 NC NoConneClion
refers to the pori that uses the serial connector on the PLC 's power supply. This
LED nashes w hen data 15 bei ng transferred through the port , It remai ns o ff when 5 NC
+-5VDC
NoConnectlon
LogiCPower
the port Is Inactlvt, RTS(A) Dlrrer'entlal Request \0 Send
6
The 1'1 LED will nash when dala Is being transferred through Port I. the RS 232 7 SG SlgnalCround
port If remains oIT w hen the port Is Inactive
8 CTS(S') DIlTerentia lClearTo Send
T he P2 LED will n ash when datil Is being transferred through Port 2, the RS-485
9 RT ReslSlorTermlnatlon
port. It remains oIT w hen the port Is Inactive,
10 RO(~) Differential Re<:elveDl'la
Protocols Supported ROIH') Differential Rrcelve Data
Slarting with Firmware Release 9.00, BreakFree SNP became the default prolocol on the
"
12 SOrA) olrrerentlalSend Data
three Serial Ports o n these modules. See previous section ~Break Free SNP Prolocol ~ for 13 SO(S) DlrrerenlialSend Data
details 14 RTS(S') Differentia l Request To Send
15 CTS(M Differential Clear To Send
SNP Port (Through Power Supply Connector) Note 'hot Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC I)ower
SNP slave. (l00 mA maximum) fur powering external optiuns
SNPX slave
Port 1 and Port 2 (Through Module's Front Panel Connectors)
SNP master and slave
SNPX master and slave
RTU slave (starting w\l h Firmware Release 8.0)
Serial 1/0 - Limited functionality (wrlle only) sta rting wit h Firmware Release 8.0,
wi ll have full func ti onality (read and write) slartlng with Firmware Release 10,0.

5-20 Series 9030 PLC Installation and Haniwaff Manua/- October J999 CFK-0356P CFK-0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5-2 1
 "
[II IT]
CPU364 Hardware Features Front Panel Connectors
T hi s module has four LED IndlcalOr lights. an Ethernet Restart pushbutlon, a standard The full functionality of these ports Is detailed In GFK-1541. TCP!W Ethcrnet
CPU keyswllc h. three pon connectors, and a shi eld ground connection tab (labeled Communlcar/olls for rile Series 90 PLe Usu's Manual
"FRAME").
Port I, RS 232 This connector Is used for two purposes: (I) To connect a termi nal or
terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface .
(2) To connect to a Personal Computer that will be used to update the Ethernet
'''~ "
0 ... ,
CI'U , ... Interface nrrnware (the CPU firmware Is updated separately through the connector

~~O"
o n the power supply). This RJll con nector has the same pinout as Pon I of the
CPUs 351, 352, and 353, shown In Tab le 5-5 . The IC693CBL316 ca ble ca n be used to
access this port See Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable.

o:m::r AAU I port . 1111s 14-pln MU I port connects via a usersupplled IEEE 802.3
Ifanscelver cab le to an external Et herneHolllpaOble transceiver such as the GE

_-~o,,'
Fanue calalog number IC6'19AEA 102 (for 10Bas!! T) or IC649AEA 103 (for 1aBase 2)
PIN 1 lb.J1I"'' IlJ See Appendix L fo r details on Ihese transceivers
IOBase T pori TIlls a pln. R.H5 port provides a direct connecllon 10 a IOBase T

~..
(rwlsted pair) Ethernet network wH houll he need for an exte rna l transceiver.

Shield Ground Connection Tab

T his tab Is used to make the module'S sh ield ground connection A wire with the
applicable termlOill ends Is supplied with the module for this purpose. Please see the
M
section MCPU363 and 364 Shield Croll ndlng In Chapter 2 nnstallatlon") for details

Firmware Upgrade
~
T he CPU nrmware, w h ich Is stored In Flash memory, Is loaded through the serial
pori connector on the PLC Power Supply using a personal computer that has been
equipped with the loader a nd CPU nrmware software.
LED Indicators
The Ethernet Interface Ormware, stored In Flash memory, Is loaded through the
There are four LED Indicators. Three relate to the Ethernet Inter face EOK, LAN, and rnodules front panel Po rt I connector u!.lng a personal computer that has been
S1'I\r. These can be ON, OFF, FLASH ING slow. or FLASHING faslln several different equipped wit h the loader and Ethernet nrmwarc software Cable IC693CBL3 161s
combinations. The full functionality of these LEDs Is detatled In CFK 154 1, TCPJJP required (see Chapter 10 for details ol'll hls cable) .
Etlrertler Commullicaclolls {or the Series 90 PtC User's Manual.
The fourth LED. PS PORt Is for the CPUs serial port and Is not related to lhe Ethernet
interface. This LED will nash w hile data Is being transferred through the SNP serial port
connector o n the PLC power s upply. and will stay off w hen the pon Is inactive. (On
some early producllon 364 CPUs. this LED Is labe led "S NP' All Series 9030 CPUs have
H

this standard seria l port.

Ethernet Restart Pushbutton

This pushbutton performs four functions: LED test, Restart , Restart and enter Sortware
Load state, and Restart and cnter Mail1lcllance state. These arc detailed In GFK- 154 1,
Tep/IP Elllertltt Communlcaflons {or rllt Series 90 PI..C User 's M;muai.

Keyswitch
This Is a sta ndard CPU keyswltch, discussed ea rlier In this chapter.

5-22 Serlts 9030 PL C Ins/allaflon ~nd Hardware Manual- October 1999 CFK-0356P CFK-0356P C/lllpter 5 CPUs 5-23
 ~

........

IT] IT]

CPU311 Catalog Number IC693CPU311

CPU Data Sheets

0 l ,! '0
.U~J

ThlssecUon provides data slleels describing each of the Series 90-30 C PU modules. For
In form ation on the Sta te Logic CPUs. see Chapler 9. Sta le Logic Products - :5 COMIIIOU U
_ _ ..u
~.!~~T
~.
! : 5
CPU Mudt! LIst
IC693C PU3 11 5-5101 base plate with embedded CPU , IK Byte Register Memory

IC693CPU313
IC693CPU323
5-5101 baseplate wU h embedded CPU. 2K BYles Register Memory
10-s101 baseplate with embedded CPU
~'f;~~:!i!
\IOI.UCI "",y .~
\OIT"~'"
..
1Ill:1'
:

'~~Ii.! ~!!. ~!!. ~..!!
.:: :: ': ::

IC693C PU331 CPU module. 10 MHz :i i H H :1 H o

I J ) 5
IC693CPU3 40 CPU module, 20 MHz. 32K Bytes User Program Memory t

IC693CI' U341 CPU module, 20 MHz. SOK BYles User Program Memory
IC693CPU350 CPU module. 25 MHz CPU 1\'pe 5 -slot basepl3te with embedded CP U
IC693CPU35 1 CPU module , 25 MHz. with two extra seria l ports Total Buep latrs per System 1
Load Requl~d from PowerSupply 41 0 milliamps from +5 VDC sup ply
IC693CPU 352 CPU modu le. 25 MHz. math coprocessor. twO extra serial ports
ProtessorSpeed 10 MegaHenz
IC693CPU360 CPU modu le. 25 MHz
ProccssorType 80 188
IC693CPU363 CPU mod ule. 25 Mhz. with t\'10 extra serial pons Opera tlngTemperatule ot060degleesC (32to 140dl'grel!!S F) ambient
IC693CPU364 CPU module. 25 Mhz. with Ethern et Interrace Typical Scan Rale 1811l111iseconds prr lK of logic (booleancontatlS)
User ProgrllomMemorY(lIlu!murn) 6KBytes
Discrete I nput POints %1 160 (maximum combined Inpu ls ou tputs)
Discrete Output Polllts %Q 160 (maximum combined outputs + Inputs)
DIsc:reteC lobal Memory - %G 1280blts
Intema l Colis %M I02411 lts
Output(1'emporary) Coils - "HIT 256blls
SystemStatus References -%S 128 b it s (%S, %SA. %SO, %SC - 32 bllS eat h)
ReglsterMemory %R SI2words
An alog Inputs -%AI 64 words
An alogOutputs -%AQ 32 words
System Regls1f~rs (rOf rf(mnr~ I.bk- "1t-~tn8 16 words (9bSR)
unly;nnnOI boP re(ff~"C4'llln usc.toRle WOII'.I1I)
TImers/Counters 170
Shift Reg isters yes
Bullt-lnSertal Pons I (USM connettoron PLC power su pply) Supports SN P
slave and SNP Xslave protocols
CommunicatIons LAN- Supports mul tidrop Alsosupports Ethernet. FIP.
J'ronbus,C BC_GCM, CCM+ optiOn modules.
Override no
Battery BackedClock no
Interrupts no
TypeorMemoryStorl'8e RAM O'Ind opt ional EPROM or EEPROM
PCMlCCM:ompatlbU lty no

524 Series 9030 PLC Instal/ai/oil and H;UlJwa~ Manual DC/ober 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapler 5 CPUs 525
 ..---.....

[II [}]

CPU313 Catalog Number IC693CPU313 CPU323 Catalog Number IC693CPU323

.....,

o[]'OO
M ~ '14

i~
--.~
eooo'fIoCI~~"
WEl-kO'
"",,"el'\l 0[]' '0 :
I
! l
! 1
;
I
~ b ~.

'Mf'04I.OI
WlTHePV
~

[iiiiiiJ1 .'w:~,; ~~-~i ~! ~i! ~'i ~:! ~i ~! I:i ~'i

=lll~l~
IoIIIJII_ l
-IIlU1toIii
~'!';!;'': iI
I-:.- :a:.:: 'j ! 'J! !, !! ! !! ! ! !

-, :1 l! ! 11 ! :1 ! !
.!
~ H ! ([
.-.
loo()OO .:

o I J J I I , t It
, 2 1 6

CPU1Ype 10,5101 baseplate with cmbedded CPU

CPU Type hlol but'plalfl wllh embedded CPU Tota l Baseplales perSystem I
lbll l E)asepllltS perSystem I
load Req ui red rrOIll PowerSupply 430 milliamps from t-S VOC supply
Load Requ ired rrom PowerSupply 430mlUIamps rrom +3 VDC supply
ProcusorSpeed IOM~8aHer t z
rrocessorSpced IOMegid'lertz
Processor lYpe 80188
Processor1)rpe 80188 Operatll1gTemperatulC oto 60 degrees C (32 10 14 0degrees F) amblenl
Op~ rlllln 81emper'IUftl 010 60degrel's C (32 10 140degrees F) ambient
1}'plca l 5C1nRlte 0.6 mllllseconds"er I Koflogic (boolean contact.s)
'i)'plCllI Scan Rale 06 milliseconds per I Kortog!c (boolean contacts)
User ProgfllTh\1t!lllory(rnllli:l mum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior 10 release 7)
UserProgramMemory(nuudmum) 12K BylH (6K bytes prior 10 release 7)
O lscre.le Input Polnts %1 320 (maximum combined Inputs + out pUIS)
Olstrell! Input Points %1 160 (maxhnum combined Inputs .. outputs) Discrete Output Po int s %Q 320 (maximum combined outputs. Inputs)
Discrete O utput Points %Q 160(maJC llIlum comblnedoutpulS' Inputs)
OISCfCteG loba l Memory %c I 280b ll s
DlscreteGlobal Memory - %C 1280blts
tlltem a IColls % M 1024 blls
tntemll l Coil s - %M I024blts
Output (Temporllry) Coils %T 2S6bllS
O utput(Tempora'Y) Colls-%T 2SGbits
SY5tem5tatus ReJerences %5 128 bits (%S, %SA, %S8, %SC 32 bl15 cach)
System Status Rererences %S 128 bitS (%5. %SA, %SB, %5C . 32 bits each)
RegJslerMemory - % R IOZ4words
ReglsterMemory %R I024words
An alog lnpu15 %At 6ofwords
Analog lnpuLS %AI 64 words
AnalogOulpul.s , %AQ 32 words
Analog Outpu ts .%AQ 32 words
System Registers (for frh'lrna Ilble vlfwlng 16 words (96SR)
System Reglstef!l (foef"rMt' IAbl, vlewl118 16 words (%SR) only Clonfllll br "(I'femt!! In u,rf IOIl~ pt08rl1ml
onl) . unnOl IW' 'f'fffl1~.d In llloO'.IQ8'( pmll.am)
nmer:s/Counters 3<0
Tlmers/Coullters 170
Shift Registers yes
S hirt Reglstef!l yes
Bulh lnPorts I (usesconnectoron PLC power supply) SU PporlSSN P
Bullt lnPorts 1 (use!; conTltctoron PLC power supply) SupporlSSN P slave and SN PXslave protocols.
slave a nd SNPXslave protocols
Communicatio ns LAN- Supports multidrop AlsosUPllOrtS Ethernet. FIP.
Commu nica tions LAN Supports multidrop Alsosupport.s Ethernet, FIP,
Pronbus,GBC, GCM. CeM .. option modul es. Pronbus,GBC. GeM, GeM. option modu les
Oven-Ide no Override no

Baltel)' Backed Cluck no Ballery Backed Clock no

Interrupts no lnterrupts no
"TYpe of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM 1YPeorMemorySto~8e RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM
r CMlCCtvCompatlblllty no PCMlCCtvCom patlblllty no

5-Z6 5erits 9030 PLC Installation arid Hardwsf'r MJtnual- October 1999 CFK-0356P CFK,0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5-2/
 ..-....

o [}]

CPU331 Catalog Number IC693CPU331 CPU340 Catalog Number IC693CPU340

CPUlYpe St ngleslolCPU module CPU331 CPU'!Ype Single slot CPU modu le CPU340
Tota l Baseplltesptr System 5 (I CPU baseplate + .. vcpansiorend/ornmole) Thla l Baseplates ptrSyslem S (I CPU baseplate .. 4 expanslol\1 nd/orremote)
Lold RequlrM from PowerSupply 350 milliamps from .. 5 VDC supply Load Required (rom PowerSupply 490 milliamps from . S VOC supply
ProcessorSpeed IOM ega l-lerl2. Procu.sorSpeed 20MegaHertz
Prol':es..~or1Yp e 80188 rrocessorType 8OCl88XL
Op erlll lngTemperatulC o to 60 degrees C (32 to 14 0degret!s F) ambient OpetlltlngTemperature oto 60 degrees C (32 to 14 0degrees ~l ambient
lYplcal Scan Rate O. ~ milliseconds per I Korlogle (boolean contacts) '!Yplc.ISu n Rate 0.3 milliseconds per I K ortogle (boolean cOnlatlS)
UserProgrllmMemory(mulmum) 1 6KBy1~ UserProgr.rnMemorY(lIlulmum) 32KBYIes
Dlscn!lt Inpul Polnls %1 511 Discrete Input Polnls -961 511
Discrete Output Points %Q 511 Discrete Output Points -%Q 511
DI.K~leClob . I Memory %G 1280bits DI$C~teClobaIMe ll1ory %C IZ80blts
Inlemal Coils- % M 1024 bits InlenlilI ColIs %M IOZ4blts
OUlpul(Tempon'Y) Colb %T 256 bits OUIPUI O'cmporary) Co lb %T Z56blts
SystemS,.tus References %$ 128 bilS (%S. %SA, 9bSB. %SC 32 bits f!ac h) 5ystcm SlltusRe(erences %5 IZ8 bllS (%5. %SA. %Sl3, 9bSC 32 blls each)
ReglslerMemory %R Z048words RcglstcrMemory %R 9999words
Ana loglnpuls , 'EtA I 128words Analoglnputs-%AI I024words
Anll logOlllpULS -% AQ 64 words Ana log OUIPUl$ -%AQ ZS6words
System Reg isters (lIlT rrftf~ ll(r L.llit
\-1,whLI! only ,-"noL h' f.r,.'~nftd In ",."
16 words (96SR) = System RegiSters (fill Itf,,,-nn l.blt
~.'''Ing only unno! II'!" tfr,rrnced In u ...,
16 words (%SRJ =
lllgkllfofl'ltn) loglrplogL'am)
Tl iners/Coulilers 680 TimerS/Counters >1000
Shirl Reglsle1"5 ye5 Shl nRegiSters yes
Bullt lnPoru I (U5eS connector on PLC powersupply) Supports Bulh-lnPon s I (uses connector on PLC power supply) . Supports
SN P/SN0< slaveprotocols RequlresCMM module SNP/ SN0< slave protocols Requ lresCMM modu ll'
(oISNP ISNPX master. CCM. or RTU slave support. (oISN P/ SNP Xmaster. CCM. or RTUslavesupport.
PCM module (orRTUmastersupport PCM module (orRTUmaslersuppon.
Conununlclli ions LAN- Suppons Illultldrop Abosupports Ethernet Communications LAN- Supports multidrop Also supportS Ethernet,
F1P,I'ronbus.GBC. CCM. CCM .. Option modules FIP'Pronbus.GBC. GeM. GCM_ option modules
Override y" Override yes
Rauel)' Backed Clock yes Battery BackedClock y"
In terrupts no Intt lTupts yes
'!Ypeo(MemoryStorage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM l)'peofMemoryStorilse RAM and opllonal Flash
PC M/CC ~1:ompAtlbl1lly yes ~~~mpat~blllt,r y"

528 Series 90-30 PLC /nsraJJal/on alld Hardware Manual - Oclobtr 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapur 5 CPUs 529
 --..."

o [}]

CPU341 Catalog Number IC693CPU341 CPU350 Catalog Number IC693CPU350

CPUlYPe Slngleslot CPU module

CPUlYP' SlngleslotCPU module CPU).41 o:~
Thtll Basepilies per Syslem 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 exp"nstomnd/orremole)
TOI,IBMep'a,es per System
Load Requ l ~ rrol1l PowerSupply
ProussorSpeed
5 (I CPU baseplate + 4 expanslomnd/olTemote)
490 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
20Meg",Hertz
LOld Required from PowerSupply
ProcessorSpeed
670 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
25Mega Heru
..
CPU 350

0 ..,
ProceS$Or lYpe 80386EX
ProcessorType 8OCl88XL
Operat l n8Te mperatu~ oto 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F) amblenl OperatlngTemperatule oto 60degrets C (32 to '''0 degrees F) ambient
lYPl cll 5<:an Rale ,22 nlllllsetonds per 1K of logiC(boolean contacts)
'JYpICi I Sun Ra te 0.3 mil liseconds per I Korlaglc (boolean contacts)
UserProgramMernory(mulmum) 32K Bytes (notconngurable)
UserProgramMemory(mllJllmum) SDK Dytes
Dlsmte Input Points -96f 2,0"8
Dlsc~te Input Polms -%1 512
DIscrete Output Polnts %Q 2,0 ~ 8
Discrete O ULPUI Points %Q 512
DlscreteGlobalMemory . %C 1,280blts
DlscreteG lobal Memory %c 1280blts
Intemal Coils %M 4,096blts
Tnlenlal Co lb %M IOZ4hlts
Outpul(Tempora l)') Coils %T 256bll$
OutpulfTempora'Y) Cal ls %T 256 bits
System Stat liSReferences - %5 128 bits (%5. 'HISA, %S8. %SC - 32 bits each)
System Status References -%5 128 bits (%S. %SA. %50. 'HoSe 32 bllS each)
ReglsterMenlory . %R 9.999words
ReglslerMemory . %R 9999words
Analog lnputs %AI 2.0"8words
An.loglnpuls -9E.AI IOZ4words
Analog OUtPIlt! -96AQ 512words
AmtlogOutputs -%AQ 256words
SYSlem Registers ~Of ,M',.... I uoIHrt 28 words (%SR)
System Resisters (f.... Irr~'~n ,.blc
,Iewlniionly ,.nllm III' f'f'r.,,",ud In u ... '
16 words (%SR) ~
Yil'wlnll only '.'''IM blldrnrnCtd In
I'rowar~
'lW'i". -=
k>8 k l'f'llwm j
Timers/Counters >2,000
Tiniers/Coulllers ,2000
Shin Registers Yes
Shl n Registers yeo
Bullt-ln Seriall'on I (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports
BulltlnPons I (uses COIIIIPCtor on PLC power supply) Supports SN P / SN~s l aveprOtOCOls, RequlresCMM module
SNP / SN ~ 5Iavc protocols. RequlresCMM module
fo5N P/ SNP-Xmaster, CeM , or RTUslaveprotocol
r06NP/ SN P Xmaster, CCM, or RTUslavesuppon, support: PCM module for RTUmastersuppon
PCM module forRTUmastersupport
Communicati ons LAN Supports multidrop. Alsosupports Ethernet.
Communications LAN Supports multidrop Also supports Elhernet, FIP. Pronbus,CBC . GCM, G C ~\II f optIon modules
FI P. Pronbus.GBC, GCM . GCM .. opt ion modules
Override Yes
Override yeo
Bauery Backed Clock Yes
Banery Backed Cloc:k y..
Interrupt! Su ppOrts t he perIod Ic subrout Ine fea ture
I nt e rrupL~ yes
'Jype orMemoryStorage RAM and Flash
'typeorMemoryStorllge RAM and optional EPROM orEEPROM for early
versions Stanlngwhh hardware version PCMlCCM:ompatlbll ity Yes
IC693CPU34I Jand nnnwarf Relell5e 4.61, only FlolltlngPolntMath Suppon Yes, Firmware-based In flrmware releases 9,0 find
RAM and optiona l Flash aresupported
later.
PCMJC_~~o~~~I~~!!~ ~~s ----

530 Serif'S 9030 PLC Instal/arion and Hardware Manual - Ocrobtr 1999 GFK0356P GFK0356P C/lilpttr 5 CPUs 531
 \

o I}]

CPU351 Catalog Number IC693CPU351 CPU352 Catalog Number IC693CPU352

PU'Jyp. SlngleslotC PU module
CPU1Y"" Ingle slot Ct'u module [Totll nlseplltesperSystem 8 (CPU baseplntf: + 7 expansJon:md / orremote)
Tot.1 B .sepl.tesperSyslem 8 (C PU basepilite 7 expanslonand / orremote) CPU 352 SNPI
CPU '51 I LOad Required from Power.:upply 890 milliamps from ... 5 ~\..K... supply
I LOld kequlmt rrom "owerSupply 890 mtlllemps from __ 5 vue supply SNP
ProcessorSpeed 25MegaHertz P'
l"roctS$()fSpeed ZaMegaHert"l. P' P2
P' [ Processor1Ype 80386EX
II'rocusor'JYpe 8OJ86 . .
Operlt lnsTemperalUIt oto 60 degfe6 C (3210 140 degrees F) ambient
i uper.tlngTemptrstultl o to 60degreest,.; (3210 140 degrees ~) ambient
IlyplCiIScallKll e 22 milliseconds per I Kofloglc {boolea n contacts)
; lYplc.ISca" Rate .22 mllilset:onds per 1Kof logiC (boolean contacts)
I userProgrlmMemory(mulmum) 1;)I,artlng with nrmware Kelease9.0, Z40f\.uytts .NOle: Actual
size olavat lable user program memory depends on the Of"@
STOP
ON!RUN [ userl"rosrarnMemorYlmulmum) [ :s~arl lngwlth.llrm wareRelease 9.0, 240K.Bytes.. NOle: Actulll
slze:ofavallable user program memory depends on the
amountsconngu red ror the %R. !)bA I, and %AQconfigurable
Of"C!\
STO~
amounts conngured ror the %R, %Al, and CJbAQconngurllble wo rd memory types (see below) .

Dlsc~le Input Points -%1

word memory Iypes bee below)
For nrmware prior to Release g.O. fixed size Is SOK bytes.
2.048
PO.T'ID]
R5-232
I Discrete Input Points %1
For nrmware prior to Release 9 0, nxedslze Is80K bytes.
2.048
PO'" Ili""'iI
R8 ' 212~

Dlscn!teOutpul PoIlIIs - %Q 2.048

Dlscrt:teOutpul Polnts-%Q 2.0<18
[ ulscrele~lob~!"1.e mory. %G 1.280btts

~
I ulsatteGlobal Memory -%G 1.280blts
[ln lema IColIs .%M 4.096blts
"tern II Colls- %M 4.096blts
00 Outputrremporary) Colis - %T 256blts
OutpUll I empon"y) Lo lls - %T 256btts PORT 2
RS"'15
go
og
I SystemStlluskeferences - %S 128blu (%S. %SA. %SU. %SC 32 blL\e<'lch)
[SyslemStatu,ReleI'l!IICe, %S 128 bit! (%S. %SA, %SD. %~. 32 bl15 each) 00 [ ReglsterMclIlory - %R [Starttng with nrmware R~lease 9.0, conngurable I" 128 word

~
ResbterMemory - % R Sllrtlng wtt h nrmware ~e l ea.,,~ 9.0. conngurable In 128 word Incremenls from 12810 16.384 word with Loglcm<'lsterand
Increments from 12810 16.384 word with Loglcmaslerand frolll 128 to 32.640 words wllh Control version 2.2 For nrm I'@
from 1281032.640 word, with Control vel'51on2 2 Fornrm
ware prior to Release 9 O. nxed size Is 9.999 words.
.:::=:. ware prior to Release9 O. nxed size Is 9.999 words
Anl log lnput$ -%AI [ ~Iartlngwlth nrmwareRelease9.0,conOgurableln 128word
LS'J
Analoslnpul$ -%A I lartln8 with nrmware R_elease9.0.conngurable In 128word
Increments rrom 128 to 16.384 word with Loglcmasler and
[rom 128 to 32.640 words with Control version 2.2, Fornrm
= Increments from 128 to 16 .384 word with Loglcmasttr and
from 1281032.640 words with Conlrol version 22 Fornrm
ware prior \0 Releast 9.0. nxed size Is 9.999 words.
ware prior 10 Release 9.0, nlled size Ls 9.999 words
Ana logOulputs -%AQ I ~t art l118 w llh n rmware R~le3se 9.0. conOgurable In 128 word
Analos UUlpUU -%AQ ~tanlng with nTrnware Release9 O . co~ I.. ~urable In 128 word IncremenlS from 128 to 16.384 word with Loglcmasler and
Increments from 12810 16.384 word w ith LoglcmasleT and from 128 to 32.640 words with Control version 2.2. For nrm
from 128 10 32.640 words wllh Control version 2.2 Fornrm ware prior to Release 9 0, Oxed sl.le I.. 9.999 words.
ware prior 10 Release 9.0, nlCed size Is 9.999 words.
System Registers (fOr reference 28 words (%SR)
[ ~yslelll Reglsters_Iror tf.rr~ou .. b l~ view. 28 words {~KI table viewing on ly: cannot be rertr-
.... Dnly; oMI be r~r.l'I!ncl'd tn IDlle ptDII"m) tnctd In logic progran'f
TlmersICoullten :>2.000 TImers/Counters :>2.000
[ Shirt Reglslers Yos Shift Resisters
I '"
Bullt lnSerlll Pons Three porls SupponsSNP(~~!:.~ ~Iave (on powersupply Bullt-lnSerlll Port, Three porLS. SupportsSNP I SN PXslave (on powersupply
connector) and RTUslave.SNP ISNPXmasterl slave.Serla l connector) and RTUstave,SNP IS NPXmaslerl slave.Serlal
I/ O(onPorLS 1 and 2) . Requires CMM module for CCM . I/ O(onPorts I and 2) . RequlresCMM module forCCM .
PCM module for RTUmastersupport . PCM module {or RTU maslersuppo" .
Commun lcltlons ~~. SUPtorLS Illultldrop. ALsosupporLS Ethernet. FIP.I'ro- I...ommunlutlons [ I!.'N - ~UpPOrts multidrop AlsosupporLS Ethernet. FI I~ Pro-
nbus.GB . GCM , CCM+ option modules nbus.G BC. GCM . GCM+ option modules
Override Ye' Override Yes
[Bauery aacked Clock y" Battery aackedClock I"
InterruptSupport SupportS the PcrloolcSubrouline realure . InterruptSupport I :supports the P1!rlodlc:subroutlne{eature.
'JypeofMf:morySlorase RAMandFlash lyPeorMemorySlorage I RAM and t- Jash
[ PCM/CCM::ompAllbIllIY Yes PCMlCCM::ompatlblllty os
Float Ing Pol nI Mlth :uppon Yes. Ilrmwarebased In tlrrnware Kelease 9.0 and laler. Ioat I ng I'olnt Math Support Yes. hardwarebased (bUilt-In m:llh co processor
The CPU3S 1 Is s\lppon~ by LoglcmlUlrr 9O-JOlZO/ M lero flll)glllmm Ing andconOgunu Ion so(' ...... re Rt iust -n. .. rP I I' .. ' I , pporledbyl.oslcmlUttr90JOIZO/ Ml croprogrammlnSlndconflg'....... ' .. "."h~ .~ ... D .. I .......
6 00 lind hiler relusu. and Conlrol flrogrammlng and conflsuflllion ~flwarl! RrlellSl! 2.01lnd II.er 100 lind IlItl'( rtl~lUe5 . lind COl1ll'ol progl IImmtng lind conflgu rilion 5Of' ..... lIre Rl'lf11~ Z,O lIod ll1lff
rtlea,u rrl~.ses.

532 Serits 90-30 pte Installallon and Hartlwar! Manual- October 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Cllifpfer 5 CPUs 533
 -...

o [}]

CPU360 Catalog Number IC693CPU360 CPU363 Catalog Number IC693CPU363

I ~YU 'y".
lbtal Baseplates perSyslem
1118 es ot on u.
8 (CPU baseplate t 7 expanslonand/orremote) o~
CPU Type
Thta l Baseplltesper System
SlngleslotCPU module
8 (CPU baseplate i 7 expanslorond/ orremole) ~"oo

LOld Requh~ (rom PowerSupply 670 milliamps from +5 VDC supply

CPU 35D tOld Rcq ul ~ from PowerSupply 890 ml1l1llmps rrom ~5VDCsupply

ProcusorSpeed 25McgaHertz '" ProcessorSpeed 25MegaHeru "101 O~II'

Processor1YPe 80386EX @} .. Processor1)rpe
OpentlngTcmpe rllule
80386EX "ei CPU Je3

01060 degrees C (3210 140degrees F) ambient

Oper.tlngTtmper.lule o to 60 degrees C (32 10 140 degrees FJ ambient '"
1YplutSca nRlLle .22 mtlllseconds per I K c flogtc (boolean (Ol1taeU) 'JYpICi I Sun Rale .22 milliseconds per I Korloglc (booleancontacLS) @ ~,
U~r ProgrllmMemory(maxlmum) Starting with nrm .....are Release 9 O. 240K Bytes. NOle' Actual UstrMemory(totll) 240K (245,760) 8YIf.'S Actualslzeorallallableuserprogram
stzeofavaUable user program memory depends on the memory depends on the amountS conngured ror%R . %oAI.
and %AQ conngurable word memory types (Set below)

0lWlI-..z. ."
amounlsconngur@(irorlhe%R,%AI,and%AQconngurable
word memory types (sec below) For nrmware prior to Re Dlscnlle Input Points - %T Z.04a
lease 9.0, nxed slle Is BOK bytes
Discrete Output Points '*'Q 2,048
U
DI5CI1lle Inpul Points -%1 2.048
DlscreteG lobllMemory . %G 1.280blts
Discretl! Output Polnls %Q 2,048
huemal Colis %M 4.096 bits
DI5C~leClob.JMemory %G 1.280bliS
OUlput(femponuy) Coils %T ZS6blls
Intem.1Colis %M 4,096btts
SystemSlatus Rere~nces %S 128 bits (%S, %SA. %S8. %SC - 3Z bits each)
OUlput(femporal)') Coli! %T 2561>lts
RegistcrMemory - %R Conngurableln 128 word Increments rrom 128to 16,384
Systern5181us Refe~ nces %5 128 blls (~ , %SA, %S8, %SC 32blls each) words ..... Hh Loglcmasterand from 12SI032.640words ..... lth
1W,IJItt"Memory , 96R Starting with nrmwllre Release 9.0, conngurable In 128 word Control version 2,2
Incremenu from 128to 16,384 words wIth Loglcmasterand
from 128to 32.640 words with Control verslOIl 2,2, Fornrm,
wIre prior to Release 9,0, n)o:ed size Is 9.999 words
--= Analoslnpuls %AI ConOgurable In I Z8 word Increments from IZ8to 16.384
words with 1.0glcmaster and from 1281032.6 40wordswlth .....,
I'OIIT)

Controlverslon2.2
An.1olll"l,ulI %A Starting with nrmware ~!lea5e9 O,conOgurableln 128word
Increments frorn 12810 16.384 wordswhh Loglcmaster and Ana logOutputS-%AQ Conngurablel n 1Z8 word Increments fr oml2BlO 16.384
from 128 1032.640 words wllh Conlrol version 2,2 Fornrm, words with Loglcmasterllnd from 1281 032.6 ~Owords ..... Ith
ware prior to Release 9.0, Oxed size Is 9.999 words. Control version 2,2,
System Regislers (for .rfmnc. t.t....
ArlilosOu,pu" "foAQ Starting with nrmware ~!lcaSf: 9 O. conngurable In 128 word
Increments from 12810 16,384 words with Loglcmasterand
from 128 to 32.640 words withComrol version 22 Fornrm
\~\8onty: tan"l11 ~rff""M.l'd
".",."
IIlIN'l' IugIt
28 words (%SR)
D i;n
'!lAM1!

ware prior 10 Release 9.0. nxed size Is 9.999 words. TIml!rs/Collnters >2.000
System Regislers (rCl'" refe~nce table 28 words (,*,SR) Shift Registers Yes
viewing only; cannot be ~ferenced In
Ioslc program) Bullt-lnPons Three ports SupporlSSNP I$ NPX slave (on powersuPP7
connector). On Ports I and2.suportsSNP/ SNPXmaster
TlmersICoullIers >2.000 slave and RTU slave Requires CMM module rorCCM,
Shift Registers Yes PCM module rorRTU mastersupport
Bullt lnSerlal Pons 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply) Supports SNP Communications LAN, Suppons multidrop Alsosupporl.s Ethernet. FIP. Pro-
slave and SNP Xslave protocols. Requires CMM module ror nbus. CBC . GCM . GCM+ option modules,
$NP IS NP.< maSler. CCM, or RTU slave protocol support; Override Yes
PCM module forRTU mastersuppon
Battery BlckedClock Yes
Comllluniutions LANSuppons multidrop. Alsosupports Ethernet. FIP. Pro-
nbus,C8C.CCM. and GCMi option modules. ImerruplSuppurt Su p ports t he period Ic subrou II ne reatu re.
Override y" TypeorMemoryStorage RAM and Flash
Banery Backed Clock Yo< PCM/CCM:ompatlbllity Yes
InterTUpts y" FloltingPolnt Mal h Support Yes. nrmwarebased In nrmware Release 9.0 and laler.
1}tpe orMemorySlorage RAMandFlash
PCM/CCM:ompiltlblllly Yes
Floating Pol nl Math Suppon Yes. nr,"ware based InnrmwareRelease9,Oand later,

534 Strif.'S 9030 PLC Installation and Hardware Mallual - October 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chaprer 5 crus 535
 r---
"

o
CPU364
I CYU Iyp.
TOla l Basepilltes pc!r System
told Required from PowerSupp ly
ProcessorSpeed
ProceuorType
!)lngll'$lot l,.!'U r:!~oau
Catalog Number IC693CPU364
I rIlel mer act!
e w~n ern e
8 (CPU baseplate. 1 expallslonand / olTemotel
151 Amps from +5 VDC supply
25 MegaHertz
80386EX '""' '@0
STAT
0'"
CPU 3&4
"":.01
I I
Ch;rer Memory Backup and Back up Battery

Ethernet fuse . replaceable 2.69x2.69x6 I mm, 12SV, IA .slowactlng '"

Opentlngtempenlure
lYplu l SC' 11 Rale
olo60de8r~$ C (3210 '40degrees F) Ambient
.22 mil liseconds per I Kofloglc(boolean contacts)
@~'
UserMemory {lOlall Z40K Bytes. Note Actualslzeofavallableuserprograrn OITHr:IIHI!T
lIur",,,

0 ""
memory depends on the amounts conngured for%R . %AI.
IItld %AQ conngurable word memory Iypes (see below) ,
Di screte Inpul Polnu: %1 2.048 lW.]filS-2lJ Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)
U15~le vutput yolnts - 'Jb\J ,.u..
DI SCreteC loblllM elnory %G 1,280bhs The longUfe LIthium battery (IC693ACC301) used to malnlaln the comems of lhe

~-
CMOS RAM memory In the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the
Inlenlld Calls -%M 4,096 bIIS
bottom of the power supply faceplate This battery Is mounted on a plastic clip attaclled
OUlpul(Temporary) Calls , %T 256bils to the Inside of this cover.
Systern Sllllus Refe~lIces %5 128 btu (%S. %SA %SB, %SC 32 blLS each)
The battery Is wired to a smalll3erg fCtTlDie connector that connects to either of the two
ReglslerMe mory % R Conngurable Inl28 word Increments from 12810 16,384
Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuli board. This battery
wordswtlh Loglcmasler lind from 1281032.640 words with
Comrolversloll22 call be replaced with power applied to the PLe.

oJ-up
Ana log ln puls % AI Conngurable In 128 word Increments from 128 to 16.384 ",:WIJl
words wit h LoglcmaSter and rrom 128 to 32.640 word .. with
Control version 2 2
AnalogOutpul$ . 9bAQ Conngurable In 128 word Incre mClIl$from 128to 16 .384
words with Loglcmastcr and frOIll 128 to 32.640 words wllh
Control vcrslon22
System Reglsten (roo ",rn1"l'~ 1a/1Io. ,_bIR
only QIlnu! lor .ri"~ In 10gk JIIO(!rWT\I
28 words (%SR) EJ' ';;;
Tlmer.slCounters >2.000
ShlrtReglSlcr.I y"
Rulh lnSertal Por1S I (uses connector on PLC PowerSupply) Su pportS SNPI
SNPXsla vc RcqulresCMM module rorSNP ISN PX master.
RTU slavc.orCCM. PCM module ror RTU rnaster support
COmrnunlcatlo"" Erhtmtf Onternal) - MUtor 10BASEt AAUlrequlres
ClCtemalttanscelvcr 10BASETlsdlrCCI BltUl':ryCOVtr R.mo\'al Nutch
Eche~r{addhlona[) - Supports Ethernetoptlon modules
LAN-RequlrtsOptlon modules forCenlus. Pronbus. FIP.
Override Yes figure 6-1 . Backup Battery for RAM Memory
Battery Backed Clock Yes
IlltelTuptSupport Supports the periodic subrouti ne feature
'lYpeofMemorySlorage
PCMJCCM:ornpatlblllty
RAM and Flash
yes
Caution I
FlolllngPolnt MathSupport Yes. nrll1wllrebased If a Low Gallery yVarn lng (DATI LEO turns ON) occurs. rep lace the
Note: OlioSOme tllrly modules. thl" LED labeled PS PORT" may say SN P "'nstead:Otherwlse. battery located III the power supplybefore re moving power from the rack.
the modules are Idl'ntlcal Otherwise, the re Is a possibility that d a ta will be corrupted or the
application program wil l b e cleared frolll memory.

536 Series 9030 PLC Irlstallallon and Han/ware A,'anual- Ocrober 1999 CFK-0356P CFK0356P 61
 r--
IT]
Sallery Replacement Instructions
I-Wami1l9]
To avoid the chance of losing the call1ents of RAM memory, you call
carefu lly per fo nn the fo llowing steps wllh PLC power ON . This
procedure should o nly be per fonned by quaUned electrical personne l
w ho are trained In applicable elec:u1cal safety ru les and proced ures.
Fa ilure ( 0 fo llow standard electrical safety practi ce can result In Injury
or death to personnel . damage to equipment. or both .
Carefully Insert the tip a small pocket-size screwdriver approximately 1/ 4 Inch (6
mill) Into the baucry cover removal slot, located beneath the banery cover (Sei!
previous figure) ,
Gently rotate the screwdriver about 45 degrees to loosen the cover,
Remove cover with fingers. The banery Is mounted In a cllp on the back of Ihe
cover. It has a pair o f leads with a con nector that Is plugged-In to a connector on a
ci rculi board Inside the power supp ly.
Ca refully reach Into battery cav ity with your Ongers (do not use il metal object to do
this) and unplug the banery connector.
Remove the old batte. y rrorn the clip o n the battery cover and set It aside . Be carerul
not to mix It up with the new baucry.
Carefully reach Into battery cavlly wilh your nngcrs (do not use a metal object to do
this) and plug in new battery connector.
Clip new battery IlIto clip on banery cover.
Snap battery cover back o nto power supply.
62 Strles 9030 PI..C JnsrallatJonllnd Hare/WIre Manual - October 1999
-..,
~
Sallery ReplacemenliMemor y Protection Factors
Si nce there are differences In each PLe application. each user wi ll have to deterrnlne on
an Individu al basis what strategy to use. There are several ractors to consider w hen
planning a baueryreplacernent/ rnemory protection strategy'
How critica l Is the application? Will conslderdble loss be :.ustalned Irthe PLC goes
down? If so, frequent replacemeru of the battery would be a wise choice. Forcrltlcal
applications. the cost o f a battery would be quite low In comparison to the cost of a
PLC shutdown.
How readily can a baCkup program be loaded? Are there technicians on slte who
know how to load a backup program? Is the backup program accessible at a ll times
to those responsible ror maintaining the equipme nt? Is a personal computer or
equiva lent equipped with CE Fanuc programming software available at all times for
lIse In loading the backup program?
Do you havc a preventive maintenance program? A formal program would help
ensure thaI Ihe battery Is replaced on lime. Some users replace the backup bancry
each year during their annual shutdown period.
How accessible Is Ihe PLC? In sorne appllcBtIOI\s. the PLC may be mounted in a
remote location that Is not easily accessed
Safety codes. Some users may have sa rety rules that would not allow replaci ng the
battery with power applied .
How Is the PLC used? Is power lert on all the time , or Is It shut down every day? See
the headi ng - FaClOrsAfrcctlng Battery Ltfe -
Some users run without a backup battery by using one of the PROM Options. See
the section below called ROperating Without a Memory Backup 8allery~ to
determine If this strategy Is suitable fo r your application.
The Importance of Backing up your Program
Experience has shown that regardless of what strategy you use to maintain PLC
memory. you should. additionally. always keep an up-todate backup copy of your
application program. The effort required to create and maintain a backup copy Is very
small compared to the work required to reprogram, or rekey from hardcopy. your entire
ap plication If. due 10 some misfortune . It was lost Other suggestions to help minimize
down time:
Make sure the backup copy Is readily accessible to those who Illay need to use It.
Train more than o ne person to load the backup program In case that one person Is
not available w hen needed. Informallon on creating a backup can be found In CE
Fanuc 's softw are user's man uals. This procedure Is also covered In applicable CE
Fanuc programming software training courses.
Ensure that a suitable computer (usually a laptop type) Is equi pped with GE Fauuc
PLC programming software and wl1l be readily available to load the backup
program lo the PLC .
Create a wrillen backup procedure. Fortunately. restoring your program from the
backup copy Is probab ly not somethi ng you will do very often . As a result. however,
some of the steps could easily be rorgolten.
CFK03S6P CFK03S6P Chapur 6 Memory Backup and B.1Ckup Barccry 63

IT]
Factors Affecting Ballery Life
Replacing your battery once per year Is a good rule of thumb. HowevN, 110 one can
predict precisely how long a backup battery wIll last becau$C this depends upon what
CPU Is used, what temperature It is subjected to. and how It used. Considering the
fol1owln81151 of factors that affect battery life will help YOli decide how frequenlly to
replace the baltery In your application:
A bancry Ihalls not In use has an estimated life (caUed Its shel rllfe~) of 5 years al
M
"room tcmperature (25 degrees C. or 77 degrees Fl ,
A banery that Is used continuously (supplying cu rrent to memory clrcul[S with PLe
power 0(1) has an average esllmated life of onc year for CPU models 331 and above.
and 2 years for CPU models 311 . 313 and 323, lfused al room temperature.
As long as a PLC Is powered up. Its bauery Is not being used: so how often you
power down your PLC has a direct affect 0 11 battery lire. Some users keep their PLC
powered up all of the time w hile others turn thei rs off every night.
Temperature has a relatively large affect on baltery life. Temperatures consid erably
above room temperature (25 degrees C, o r 77 degrees Fl . or be low freezing (0
degrees C, or 32 degrees F) will appreciably shorten battery life.
The type of CPU has a s mall affect on battery life. Some CPUs have more memory
than others Also, some crus have a clock and some do nol. More memory
requires more battery current 10 maintain Its contents: and a clock requires battery
curre nt to maintain Its operation
low Battery Warning Methods
There are (hret basic ways that the PLC warns of a low bauery:
The red ~ BA1T LED on the Power Sllpply module lights when the battery is low.
The disadvantage of this method Is that the PLC is often mounted in an enclosure.
so this LED might not be easily seen
The PLC Fault Table Is updated with a battery low message Viewing the PLC Faull
Table reqUires that a programmer be connected to the PLC .
Certain System Reference bits are set to logic I when the battery Is low These are
%SAO II (LOW_BAT), %SCOO9 (ANY_FLT), %SO IO (SY_FLn, and %SCO I2
(SY_PRES) . The most speclnc is %SAOI I {LOW_BAn TIl is bit could be used as a
contact in your ladder logic program to tu rn on an output that controls a warn ing
light on an operator panel (as in the example rung below) , or to send a warning to
an operator Interface terminal
1_ %~AOl1 ..a~
~I (~
In the rUllg shown above. the %SAOl l contact will close w hen a low battery Is detected
by the PLC. This will tu rn on the %Q output col\, which addresses an output module's
output that wl11turn on a warning lig ht. An alternate method would be to
commun icate the status o f the coli (which. In that case, would probably be a %M coli) to
a Hu man to Machine Interface (HMI) terminal such as a CE Fanuc CIMPLICITY HMI
unit 1 he HMI could be programmed to display a warning message when that
6' Strlts 9030 PLC II1S/allation and Han/wart Milllual- Ocrober 1999
,
o
particular bit goes to a logic I. For more Information about System Reference bits and
ladder logic programming, see the the Series 90-30/ZOIMlcro PtC CPU I,JSrrucclon Stt
RtferetlCt Manual. C FK-04 67.
Operating Without a Memory Backup Ballery
Whether It would be to your advantage 10 u:,e a battery-less scheme depends on your
application . There are various adva ntages a nd disadvantages to consider In making
your decision
Possible Advantage
The obvious advantage of operatlng without a memory backup banery Is thai you are
freed from the need to maintain the battery. To be able to run without a battery, you
need (0 have a PROM device - either all EPROM, EEPROM. or Flash PROM - installed
In your system. These devices can store program logic. connguratlon, and regiSter
values without the need for a backup banery. and you can conngure your CPU to read
the con tents of PROM Into RAM memory each time the PLC is powered up.
Possible Disadvantages
Information Is not stored to your PROM d evice automatica lly. To store Information . you
must stop lhe PLC. then use a programming device to tell the CPU to write the current
PLC (RAM) memory contents to the PROM device. This requirement may make
battery less operation undesirable for many users. For example. In many applications,
Important data is gat hered a nd stored in RAM register memory, data suc h as the current
leve l of material In a tank that Is bei ng Oiled . or a ru nn ing Count of parts produced . etc
This consta ntly changi ng data is 11P1 he[n copied automatically to the PROM device , 11
o n ly exists In RAM memory. Therefore. If power Is lost and there Is no RAM memory
backup battery. this data will be lost
However. one way to p reserve data In a baueryless system Is to send It over a network
to a computer that ca n store the data on Its hard drive. Also, stalic data (data that
doesn' t change) contained In RAM memory. slich as mathematical constants or look up
table ty~ information. can be stored initially In PROM and automatically written back
to RAM cach time the PLC powers up
Another consideration Is that If you change your program (or connguratlon), someone
will have to remember to write the changed Information to the PROM device If that
step Is forgou en, then the change only exists in RAM memory. and In a battery-less
system, It will be lost the next time power Is removed rrom the PLC.
Configuring a Batteryless System
Here are the basic steps to configure a system to run battery-less:
Equip your CPU with a PROM device , On some CPUs a PROM device is purchased
as an option; on others, It Is a standard reature. T he CPU chapter of this manual has
a table that IdcnUnes the standard PROM connguratlon for each CPU.
There arc three CPU configuration parameters Involved . ConOgure them as
follows: P"..,r Up Mode: RUN ; Logic/C rg: PROM : Registers: PROM ,
Store your folder (Include Program logic. Conngu raUon. a nd Register Data) to the
PLC. This places your entire folder into RAM (working) memory.
CfK0356P CFK,0356P Chapltr 6 MmlOry Backup and Backup Bamry 65

[II
Write PLC (RAM) memory to the PROM device. Make su re you write all data
(Program Logic. Connguratlon, and Register Data) to the PROM. Note that the type
of PROM device depends on w hat model CPU you have and how It Is eq uipped .
tr you are us ing a 340 or higher CP U (such as a CPUJ50, CP U35 1, etc.), read the next
section for an additional requirement.
When conngured this way, the contents of PROM memory will be written Into RAM
memory each lim e the PLC powers up.
Operalion Withoot a Memory Backup Battet'y Using a 340 or Highet' CPU
This Informatio n Is applicable o nly to CPU model numbers 340 and higher (such as
CPU350, CPU35 I, etc) . In systems that do not use a memory backup battery. a standard
0.1HBerg Jumper sho uld be Installed across either of tile hVO power s upply battery
connectors to ensure reliable restarting of the CPU after a power cycle. This Jumper
should not be Installed If a battery Is plugged Into eit her the power supply or CPU
battery connector,
Detennining Battery Age Using Battery Date Code
Battery age can be determined from the date code stamped on the battery.
The battery. manufactured by Pa nasonlc, will have a fOllrdlglt date cocle. It w ill be
something like 56 15 or 7Y34 . Use the following Information to determi ne the date of
manufacture.
First digit sllOws Ihe year In a rOlatlng 10'year cycle. For example, 0- 1990. 1- 1991 ,
2- 1992 ... 9- 1999,0 .. 2000. 1-2001. 2- 2002 , etc. This seeming d uplication should
not b~ a problem because the shelf life of these batteries Is 5 years. Batteries In
Inventory thai are older than 4 years old should be discarded accordi ng to the
ma nufacturer 's Instructions (since they have less than one y~ar of life remaining we
would not recommend usi ng them In a PLC) . This will ensure tMt outdated
ballerles are not mistaken for newer batteries.
Second digit shows the mont h, I -January. 2- February. 3- March, 4- Aprll . 5.. May.
6- June, 7- July. S.. August. 9.. Septembe r, O- October, Y."November, Z-Dccembcr.
Third dlgll shows the week of the month.
fourth dlgh s hows the day of the week. I-Monday. 2-Tuesday, 3 .. Wcdnesday.
4- Thursday, 5-Frlday. 6",Silturday. 7- Sund ay
For example , the code 76 12 Is Interpreted as:
Ma nufactured on June 3, 1997
RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path
CMOS RA\II memory Is a volatile type of memory. w hich means thai It can lose Its contents
(ladde r program. conflguratlon. etc.) if power Is removed. To retain RAM memory contents
under no power conditions, a longUfe lithium battery Is prolltded. This battery 15 normally
mounted In the rack's Power Supply module. To avoid accldenta! disconnection of the
memory backup battery, It 15 bcnefldalto know the connection path between the battery
and the memory circuits:
66 Strles 9030 PLC Inslallatlon and HanJwart Manual - Ocrober J 999 GFK03561'
,
IT]
For embedded CPUs; The battery connection path to RMI memory Is through the Power
Supply's baseplate connector and across the backplane board to the RM1 clrcullS
For modular CPUs: TIle battery connection path to RM1 memory is through the Power
Supply's baseplate con nector, across the backplane board. and through the CPUs baseplate
connector to the RM1 circuits Inside lhe CPU module.
Obviously, removing me Power Supply module from the PLC breaks the connection
between the backup battery and the RAM memory circuits for both embedded and
modular CPUs. Also, In a modular CPU system, remOving the CPU module would
discon nect the backup bauery from the memory circuits. I" addltJOfI, CO Dvold d te possible
proo/ems lU."SlOCiated with losing the cmlCfllSofRAM menKrY, we ncallmald [hac yw
maJn raln llJl up..(o.<JlJ~ backup tqlyo r y oor p rogrom (older. Instructions for creating
program folder backups can be found in the LogIalllfster 90, Series 9030 ProgrammlllB SoIi'wart'
User's Manual, C FK().4G6, COfllm User:S Cillcie. GFK 1295. and \~rYP/'O Programming Softwalf
Users Guide, CFK 1670,
Supet' Capacitor Memory Backup
Besides the backup banery. the RAM memory circuits In both Embedded and Modular
CPUs arc further protected by a Hsupe r capacitor.H w hich can store enough charge to
maintain memory for a short time if tJle battery is disconnected. TIle amount of protection
time provided by the super capacitor depends on the following:
The PLC power supply supplies 5 VDG to lhe memory circuits, Includ ing the super
capacttor. Therefore. w hen PLC power Is turned o IT, the super capacllor has an
InitialS VDC charge. If the banery Is also disconnected shortly after PLG power Is
turned off. the super capacitor wi ll begin discharging from the 5 VDG level until Its
charge reaches 2 VDG. at w hich tlm ~ memory contents wil l be lost. When used this
way. the super capacitor can maintain memory co nte nts for a minimum of I hour
The memory backup battery supplies 3 VDC to the memory ctrcults. Includ ing the
super capacitor. There fore. If PLC power has been tu rned off for a n hour o r mo re
and o nly the battery Is powering the memory circuits, the super capacitor has a 3
VDC cl18rge . TIlen. If the ba ttery Is disconnected , the super capacitor will begin
discharging from the 3VDC levcl untll llS charge reaches 2 VDC, aI w hich time
memory contents will be lost. When used this way, the super capacitor can maintain
memory contents for a minimum of 20 minu tes,
Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a CPU
Modular CPUs
Modular CPUs have an Internal connector for a backup battery so that RAM memory
contents ca n be retained w hile the CPU Is being stored or shipped. This arrangement
should nol to be used when the CPU module Is Installed In the baseplate and the backup
banery Is Installed In the power supply, To usc a backup ba ttery In the CPU module, Ill s
necessary to remove the fron t cover of the CPU module. This can be accompllshcd by
foll owi ng these steps:
To avoid losing memory coments once the CPU Is removed from the PLC . we
recommend you Install the backup battery Into the CPU within 20 minutes. First,
make sure PLC power Is off. Ihen remove the CPU mod ul e.
Gently squeeze Ihe front cover of the CPU module and pull It forwa rd . away from
the modu le case, w hile gently pressing In on the 4 front cover tabs seq uentially wuh
GFK0356P Chapter 6 Mrmory Backup and Backup Battery 6 7
 '--
~~
[1]
a small screwdriver. The front cover tabs latch into holes on each side of the module
case (refer to Figure 2-1 for location of front cover ho ld ing tabs) .
Mer removing the front cover, plug the memory backup batlery Into the two-p rong
ballery connec tor o n the front of the CPU module's printed circuit board .
Wh ile the battery is connec ted to the CPU, you will have to leave the CPU's front
cover o rT. Also, the baucry shou ld be temporarily secured to the module with cable
ties or rape to kef'p It from being accldenlalty damaged or disconnected .
The Battery Accessory Kit , described below, may also be used on a Modular CPU
baseplate if the power supply has to be removed. This would require leaving the CPU
module mounted In the baseplate
Embedded CPUs
Embedded CPU Models 311 .3 13. and 323 ca lr be stored or shipped wit h a power supply
Installed and the power supply battery connected In ord!!r to maintain the conte nts of
RAM memory However. another OptiOH (llrat doesn 't require the usc of 8 power
Sllpply) Is to use the Battery Accessory Kit . desc ribed next
Baltery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315)
The Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315) lets you maintain RAM memory contents
without using a power supply. It Is useful for maintaining memory contents while a
baseplate Is being Slored or shipped. The Battery Accessory Kit consists of a batlery wit h
an 311ached con nC(tor mounted all a circuit board. TIle circuit board has a connector
lhat plugs into the power supp ly backplane connector (sec the ngure below) . Tire
Battery Accessory Kit can be used on either Embedded or Modular SerIes 90-30 CPU
baseplates
.. 501'
figure 62. Installing the Battery Accessory K~
68 StritS 9030 PLe Illstal/atJon alld Ha/'d\\art Maflual - Ocrobtr 1999 CFK0356P
-----
o
Battery Accessory Kit InstaUation
Insert the plug on the end of the battery cable Into the 2pln connector on the Battery
Accessory board. The battery plug Is normally not plugged Into the accessory
conneClOr. ThIs p revents accidental discharge of the battery during storage and
handling.
2. Align the ba ckplane connector 011 the Battery Accessory board wllh the power
supply connector on the baseplate bac.kplane. Push the Battery Accessory board
toward lhe baseplate unlilit Is fu lly sealed. See the ngure above
3. If the baseplate Is to be ship ped with the Battery Accessory board installed. ensure
that the board is held In place by packing material or cablt tles. The cable ties can be
installed In Iioies provided on both ends of the accessory board and secured !O the
baseplate
,-C3ution-]
To avoid losing CPU data. lhe Battery Accessory must be Installed
within I hour after turning offPLC power. or 20 minutes after
removing the memory backup battery. See the section ~S up er
Ca pacilor Memory Backup " secti on for details.
When the Dauery Accessory Is removed. it power supply mooule with a
good battery must be Instal led an dlor Input power applied within 20
minu tes to avoid losing CPU data. Sce the section MSuper Capac itor
Memory Backllp ~ section for details.
Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks
Batteries In power supplies all ExpanSion or Remote racks. are nOI In use. On ly the
battery In a CPU rack supp lies iJackup power to RAM memory. BatterIes In nonCPU
racks may be removed and used as spares. If they meet the age requIrements slated
previously In this chapler
CFK0356P Cllapltr 6 Memary Backup and Backup Barlery 69
 '"' -."

o
I Cha'!'''l Input and Output Modules

Analog Combinat io n Modul e
An analog combi nation module provides 4 A I D Inpul challncls and 2 0 1 A output
channels on one module. Eac h o f the Input and output cha nnels can be
configured Indlvldua tly for current or voltage mode.
Thlrd Party Modules
In addition to the modules discussed In this chapter, numerous third party l i D
modules (and other hardware and software products) ror the Series 9030 PLC
are available to meet a w ide variety of needs. Third-party compan ies th at meet
CE Fanuc 's sta nd ards may ap ply for recognitio n under the CE Fanuc
At:compa ny Program . Details on this program are fou nd In the CE Fanuc
Automation Solutions Catalog. or on the CE Fanuc web site, both listed below.
For Inrorma!lon on th lrd party modules, consult the rollowlng:
The basics of the Series 90-30 Inp ut and Ou tput (I / O) modules are covered In lhls
chapter for your conven ience . A tab le lis llng these modules Is located al the er,d of thi s Your CE Fanuc PLC distributor or sales engineer
chapter. For detailed spec lOcations and Installation Instructions, please refer to
publication CFK0898. Series 9()30 PLC YO Module SpeclflcarJolls. This chapter also
T he CE Fanuc web sHe at I,ccp:llww.,.,.gf'{anuc.com
contains a preliminary description orlhe IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module, The CE Fall uc Automation Solutions Catalog. CFW0067

Basic UO Module Types

Discrete Input
Serles 9030 discrete Input modules convert AC and DC power levels from uscr
devices 10 t he logic levels required by the PLC . An optical coupler provides
Isolation between the Incoming power ~H1d the logic circuitry. Discrete Input
modules are available that have 8, 16. or 32 points
Discrete Output
Series 9030 discrete ou tput modules conver! logic leve ls Into AC or DC power
levels required fo r d ri vi ng user supplied devices. Ellher a power semiconductor
or an elec tromagnetic relay swItches each outpu t poi nt. The discrete output
semlconductorswltched mod ules are available with 5, 8. 12, 16. or 32 output
points. Relay output modules are available with either 8 or 16 Normally Open
relay contact outputs ,
Discrete Inpu t/Output
Combina tion discrete I np ~lI / o u tput lIloduiescomblne AC Inp u ts and relay
output5 or DC Inpu ts and relay outputs on one module. Each o r thcse 1ll0dlJies
have 8 Inpu t circuits and 8 relay output circuits o n one board.
Ana log Input
Series 9030 analog Input modu les provide A I D (Analog to Digital) conversion by
conveni ng an analog Input slg nallnlo a scaled digital number which will be
transferred Into the PLC's %AI memory. Ana log Input modules are provided In
four versions, (I) a 4cha nnel current module. (2) a 4channel voltage module,
(3) a 1(I channel hlg hdenslty current Input module. and (4) a ISchannel
hlghdenslty vol tage Input module.
Analog Outpu t
Series 9030 analog ou tput modules provide 0 / A (Digital to Analog) conversion
by converting a scaled digital number (frolllthe PLC's%AQ memory) Into an
analog outpu t voltage. Ana log outp ut modules are provided In three versions.
( \) a 2channel current module. (2) a 2channel voltage module. and (3) a
hlghdenslly cu rrent / voltage module w ith 8 analog output channels.

CFK-OJ56P 7- ' 7-2 ~rl~ 9030 PLe Insrallaflon and Hard\Va~ M8llual- OrroiJer J 999 CFK-OJ56P
 -...
---.
-,.

IT] o
Discrete UO Modules Is a blown fusc Indicator light. Th is leiter F Is present on a ll o f the d iscrete I/ O
module lens caps. bUI is o nly fun ctiona l on certain Ou tput Modules that have
Imernal fu ses. It o nly lights If an Imernal fu se Is bl own. A table with a list o f
Discrete UO Module Point Density modules havl llg fuses as well a~ ot herdelalls aboul th e status LEOs Is provided In
C ha pte r 13 o f this Illanua l
There are (Wo density categories for these modules:
Standard Density Modu les: Sta ndard density modules hav' up to 16
circuits (also called ~ po l n ts~) per modu le. These modules arc equIpped with ""',.
a removeable terminal board , See Ihe following ngure. ST"TUS
leO.
High Density Modules: High density modules have 32 clrcults per module. H inged Cover
These modules have either a 50 pln connector, or two 24pl n connectors Front Vlcw
mounted on their fa ceplates. Connection choices are discussed later In th is L
chapter.
Colot B..
1I'ocIic;a1" TVIM
. """'"
I\ELAVNO 2"""
oIModul. '''/oI /~hll
Standard Dens~y Discrete 110 Module Features "
Al I'UotL te'wl

Sta ndard Ocnslty(l6 pOints or less) Modules have the following features (refer to the
following ngure) '
R_ _
R.mov.tQ .." ""'"'""""
I:.t'WN"/~ ~

.....
-
Infe"

RCllloveabl e Terminal Board. You ca n remov(' the termi nal board from the module
T......""I
111'9'deo- '" ""'ON
In order 10 wire It, If desired. Then, w hen you are nnl shed wiri ng h , you can easUy " """'ON
Al::IIn-bt.. ,
reinstall It on the module However. some pre fer to leave It 011 the module whe n Oh'"faofttll'l
8D-Dllnfe" "
M M:lt~e<1
w iring If you ever need to repiare a module. you don ' t have to do a ny rew iring if
C",
your old terminal board is stili In good cond ition Shnply remove the wired termi nal
board from the old module and Install It on the new module The termina l board U..'CflnWnl.
"-
"' CR'

,..
~gnalN."", Ofl
CR J
screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring voltages whil e testing or
troublesliooll lig
Ffomof 1nM/1
" "'''
Hinged Front Cove t 111 e cover Is easily opened 10 access the terminal board "",
sa ,
~
co nnections. Normally it's kept closed to protect personnel from accld entally
sa J
tou ch ing a hot terminal Note in the following Ogure that the back side of the fro nt
cover Insert con tains a sche matic diagram o f the terminal board connections The
" 5C"
~ ClllalogNo
module catalog number (IC693M DL940 In the example show n) Is primed on the If
bOltom of t he fro nt cover Insert. The module cata log number Is also printed on the
label o n the side of the module. However. In order to see this side label. the module Figure 7-' _ Example of Series 90-30 Standard Oens~y Discrete Output Module
has to be removed from the PLC
O n the fro nt side of the front cover Insert are lines that correspond to the module's
I/ O po ints You ca n temporarlly remove the Insert and w rite the signal nalne for
each point on t he appropriate line. as shown In the example In the ngure
A lso on the front side of the front cover Insert. ru nning vertically on lhe left edge of
the Insert. Is a color ba r that IdenllOes the type of module: Blue - DC. Red - AC.
a nd Gray . Analog.
Module Len s Ca p. Loca ted 011 the top front of the module, It covers the LED (U g ht
Emitti ng Diode) status ligh ts . These arc labeled in the following ngure In two
groups, A I through AS. and BI through BS. Since this Is a ngure of a 16-Polnt
Outputillodule. there are 16 LED status lights. (The number o f sta tus lights on any
given modu le Is a fun ction of the number o f ci rcuits po in ts o n that module.) Ir you
compare these status li ghts to (he con nection diagram on the back of the hinged
cover. you will notice that the ou tpu ts on this module are In (\'110 groups, labeled
A I- A8 and 8 1- B8, (hal cor respond to the A and Brows of status LEOs. Note t he
additional LED on the right side of the lens cap that Is labeled with the letter F. This

CFK-0356P Chaprer 7 Input and Outpur Modules 7-3 7-4 Series 90-30 PLe ltu!alJafion and Hardware Manual- Octobtr 1999 CFK-0356P
 "
IT] [2]
Wiring Standard Density (l6-Point or Less) Discrete Modules High Density (l2Point) Discrete Module Features
T here are th ree basic w iring methods:
There a re two types of these modu les. One ty pe has a single 50-pin
Direct Method . Run the wi res fro m the n eld d evices (switches. relays. elc.) connector on Its face plate. the other ty pe has a p.1 1r o f 24-pln connectors o n
d irectly to the screws 0 11 the modules' term inal boards. its faceplate (see next two n gu res) .

Termi na l Strip Me dlod. MOUIl I a terminal s trip Inside the control enclosu re
and w ire from the term inal strip ( 0 the mod ules' term inal boards. Then
w ire fi eld dev ices to the term ina l strip
Term ina l Block Quick Connect Assemb ly Method . The l e rlllinal Block
Qu ick Co nncct Assembly has three pieces: a faceplate , a cable. and a
ter m inal block . The facepla te snaps o nto an 110 modu le In place of Its
normal term inal boa rd. This facep late has a connector tha i mates wit h the
cable. In turn, the cable p lugs Into a conne<:tor on the ter mInal block. The
term inal bloc k mounts on a DIN -raU In a conve nIen t place In your enclosure.
The term Inal block Is used fo r co nnecti ng to neJd devices s uch as switches
a nd relays. ThIs method saves. on the average, over two hours of w irIng
time per module w hen compared w ith the Term inal Stri p method . For
Illore In format io n. see Append ix J. ~Te rmln al Block Quick Con nect
Component s. ~
Discrete Relay Output Module Protection
Ou tput polnt.s on discrete relay output mod ules that switch an Ind ucti ve load s uch as a
relay coli . lamp nJ ament. or sol cnold coli should have external protection. This Is us ually
In the form of all RC (ReslstorCapaci tor) network across an AC load , or a reverseblased
diode across a DC load . Please see CI' K-0898, Series 90-30 PLC //0 Module Specifications.
fordela lls.
The d u al 24-pln type has LED status Indica tors. The 50- p in ty pe does not.
The LED statu s Indica tors are arranged In fOllr gro ups of eight across.
labeled A, 8. C. and D. They are loca ted at the top of the mod ule (see nex t
n g ure) .
32-polnt modules are o nly available In 5. 12. and 24 VOC ratings.
None of the 32pol nt modules are fuse d .
These modules are u sefu l In app licatio ns where a high count of DC I/O
poi nts Is requ ired. T he maximum number of lI D po ints for a Ser Ies 9030
system ca n be obtained by usIng a CPU that s upports a 10lal of elglll 10-slot
racks, and by popu lating the racks w ith 32pol nt mod ules. T he theoretica l
maxI mum Illimberof lI D poi nts possibl e Is calcula ted by add ing the 9
ava ilabl e slols In the CPU rack (t he CPU must occupy one slot) to the 70 slOls
In the seven 10slot ex pa nsion or remote racks to get a total of7 9 slots
Mu il iply 19 t1m cs 32 fo r a m ax imum o f 2,528 110 points (only crus
350 -
364 s u pporl lhls many lI D poi nts). Of course, this assumes that every s lot Is
po pu lated w ith a 32 polnt 1/ 0 modul e. Most practica l appl ica tions requi re
that you use some slots for opl lon modu les. so Ihe numbcr of slots ava ilable
for 1/ 0 modules will be reduced acco rd Ing ly.

AI 2 3~ l UI
812 , . SI" ' ..

LEO ""'"",cw.

C l 2 H ~'"

O'21 ~ " "

'''PUT
~ \2 VOC

...... t2-l[{;J1- Pot> A\2

POSIHEOLOOIC
)o.........,,,avoc
S O'I"\A'P! . I lNot ....
~I~:
Left Side Right Sid e
Connector Connector

P OI 8 12

'-'= =

fig"'" 1-2. Eumple of 32-Poinl UO Module OC693MOL6$4) Wi1h Dual Connectors

CFK0356P Cllaptrr 7 Input and Output Modules 75 76 Suits 90-30 pte I nstal/allan and Hard .... art Manual - October / 999 CFK0356P
 ,.,.

"
~ [2]
Wiring Methods for 32Point Discrete I/O Modules

n 1"
o 0 Modules with Single 50,Pin Connector
o It 0
INPU T 32 PT 000
U VDCI!OL o 0 0
Three cho ices are ava ilable for connecting these modules
Nt G.-90S LOGIC o 0 0
000 Connect 10 a Weldmullcr 19 12263 termi nal block usI ng onc o f the tWO CE

~
o 0 0 Fa nuc ~exle n slo ll M cables (see next fi gure) , Cable IC69JC BL3061s 3 feet
000
(lmcler) long. Cable IC693C BL307Is 6 feet (2 meters) long. Chapter 10.
:;:
.' .
o
000
0 0
Cables. has deta ils on these cables.
..':::' .. 000
000 Connect to a usersuppl led tcrm lnalbloc k/strl p ori /Oflelddevlces uslng
,' . 000
one of the two CE Fanuc "I nter face" cables. These cables have a 50 pin
:. :' :, 000

.', 000 connector on one end thai plugs Into Ihe modu le. and stripped. ti nned leads
.'.
. ', O~O
o 0
on the Ol her for wirI ng 10 a lerm lnul block/stri p or 1/0 neld devices. Cable

~ ,'l IC693CB L30SIs 3 feel (1 meier) long. and cable IC693CBL3091s 6 feet (2
meters) long These cables are useful If you have to ru n you r w iri ng
through cond u it thai Is 100 small for a connector 10 01th rough
""""'" Conn.etor Pin
Build a cuslo lll iength cable This Is required If you need a cable longer than
Numb.rlng G feel (2 meters) See the IC693C BL30S/309 da ta s heet In Chapler 10 for
pin-ou t details.
Figure )3. Example of 32Polnl UO Marule OC693MDL653) With Single COnneclor

D I I I I I ]J... .....~ J1.,":''' lC09lC81.JOM01

Ei'1tto1lO'l C.blll
~" ..

Figure )-4. 50PlN, 32 Point I/O Module ConneClion Me\hod

CFK0356P Chapter 7 Input and OutpU[ Modules 77 78 Serlts 90-30 PLe Instal/arion and Ha nJ wa ,.~ Mallual - Ocwbtr J 999 CFK0356P
 ,,-
~ o
Modules with Dual 24-Pin Connectors
Three choices 3rc avallable for connecting these modules
Connect to a pair of Terminal Bl ock Quick Co nn ect (TBQC) terminal blocks
(lC693ACC337) usi ng a pair of GE Fanllc cables. Three lengths of cables are
ava ll able~ 20~ (0.5 meter), 3 feet (I meter) , 6 feet (2 meters). The ca bles come
in right hand and lert hand types because the connectors on the modul es arc
o riented different ly (see ngu re 72) . For d etails on the terminal blocks and
cables. please see Appendix J.
Connect to user s upplied ter minal blcx:k/strip o rdlrectlytol/O Oeld devices
using a pair of 10 fOOl (3 meter) GE Falluc Interface cables. These cables
have 24-pln connectors on olle end for connecting to the module. and
stripped . tinned leads o n Ihe other for wiring to a termlnalblock/ slrlpori / O
devices. Cable IC693CBL327 Is for the left side and IC693CBL328 Is for Ihe
right side. These cables are useful If you have to run your wiring through
conduit that Is [00 small for a connector (0 nt thro ugh. or If you need a cab le
longer t han six feet. Chapte r 10, ~Ca bl es, - h as details on these cabl es.
Build a custom length cable. This Is required If you need a cab le lo nger than
10 fe et (3 meters) . See the IC693C BL327 1328 data s heet In Chapter 10 for
d etai ls on bllllding custom length cables.
GFK0356P Chapftr 7 Inpllf alld Oucput Mociults 79
.....
Analog Module Features
Analog Modules have Ihe fo llowing basic features (refer 10 the following ngure) :
Removeable Terminal Doard . You ca n remove the terminal board from the modu le
In o rder to wi re It, If d esired. Then, when you are nnl shed wiring It, you ca n easily
reinstall It on (he modu le. However. some prefer to leave It on the module whe n
wi ring If yol! ever need to replace a modu le, you don't have to do any rewiring If
your old terminal board Is still In good co ndition . Simply remove the w ired termi na l
board from the old module and Install It on the new module Ifu is good condlUon,
T he terminal board screw terminals arc also convenient points for measuring
voltages w hil e tesllng or Iroubleshootlng.
Hinged Frollt Cover. The cover Is easily opened to access the ter m inal board
connections. For normal operation. It Is kept closed to protect personne l from
accidentally touch ing a hOl lermlnal. NOIe In Ihe foll owing Ogure tha t the back side
of the front cover Insert con tai ns a sc hema llc diagram of the terminal board
connections. T he module catalog number (IC693ALC3911n thiS example) Is printed
o n the bottom of the front cover Insert . T he m odule catalog number Is also printed
o n the label on the s ide of the module, However. In order 10 see Ihl s side label. the
module has to be removed from the PLC
On the front side of the front cover Insen are lines tha t correspond to the module's
(10 pOints. You can lemporarlly remove the Insert and w rite Ihe signal name for
each point on the ap propriate line to aid In testing or troubleshooting
Also on the front side of the front cover insert. running verllcally on the left edge of
the Insert, is i! colored line th at IdenUfles the type of module' Blue - DC. Red - AC,
and Gray _ Analog.
Module Len s Cap Located o n the top fronl of (he module. It covers the LE D (Light
Emitting Diode) OK status light. This light Indica tes the basic status of the mod ule,
For normal operation, the OK LED should be on .
710 SUitS 9030 PLe Inst.1/Jatiofl and Hardware Manual - Ocrobf!r 1999 CFK0356P

- MOduIeQKLED
.."".
ModlAetYIHI
.....,eo..
- ~""_Nble
R_ellllli T.......... &o.tCl
eorr.c:tlon DlflQr.m
H"7HlII2.o21AOI
FMUSEwnH
tCSglA.LG3g1 .... MDllUIe CelalogNo
Figure )5. Example of Series 90-30 Analog Current Output Module
Wiring Methods lor Analog Modules
1\" isted, shielded Instrument ation cable Is strongly recommended fOf analog module
Input or output signal connections Proper groundIng of the sh ield is also Imponarll
For maximum electrical noise suppression, the cable shie ld should only be grounded at
o ne end o r the cable. For Input modules, grou nd the end thaI Is In the noisiest
environment (w hich often Is at the neld device end) . For Output modules. ground at the
module end , See CFK0898. Series 9030 PLC I/O Module SpecJncatlons. for more shield
grounding Inrormatlon.
Analog Input Module Wiring Methods
Correcti ng electrical noise problems ca n someti mes be a trla landerror toutlne
However. In general. It is general ly best to ground the cable shield as close 10 the source
or the noise as possible. w h ich is usually at the device end In troubleshooting noise
problems. sometimes It is benencial to experime nt wi th the shie ld grounding point
location. Remember, the cable s hield should be grounded at one end only. Also, It Is best
to keep the length or st ripped cable leads as short as pOSSible to minimize the length or
unshielded co nductors that will be exposed to the noisy environment. See the Strles
90-30 PLC I/O Module SpeciflcaliorlS Manual. CFK0898 for additional details,
Direct Met hod. Run a shielded cable rro l1lthe Oeld device (transducer.
potentiometer, etc.) directly to the module Con ncct the conductors 10 the
GFKOJ56P Chapter 7 Input and Ou tput Modules
---...,
o [2)
applicable screws o n the module's termina l board . Grou nd the sh ield atllle
neld device end, exposing a minimum amount or conductor to the noisy
environment , Do nOI connect the shield at the module end (Insulate It with
shrink tubing)
Termina l Strip Method. Mount a terminal strip Inside the control enclosure
and nm a shielded cable from the terminal strip to the module's terminal
board termi nals. Connect the sh ield to the metal panel next to the terminal
Strip. Do do not connect the shield at the module end (Insula te 11 with
I"",..
shrink tubi ng) . Wire the neld device to the terminal stri p with a shielded
cable , grounding the shield at the device end only (Insulate the other end or
the shield with shri nk tubing) . Also, keep the length of exposed leads at Ihe
terminal strip and device ends as short as possible,
Note
TBQC - The Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly Is not
recommended ror use with IInalog mod u les d uc to cab le shieldi ng
requirements.
Analog Output Module Wiring
Each ou tpu t should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with Ihe shield
grounded at the module end only See CFK0898. StrJes 9030 PLC 110 Module
SpecIncaliolls. for more information ,
1/0 Module Power Supply Current Draw
These values are found In Chapter 12 or this manual . w hich discusses how to calcu late
power supply loading. The Inrormatlon Is also round In CFK0898 , Series 90-30 PLC 110
Modu/eSpecJncarlons
I/O Module Wire Routing
To reduce noise coupling among PLe wires, It Is ret:ommended you keep elect rically
noiSY wiring. such as AC power wiring and Discrete Ou tput Module wiring. physically
separated from lowlevel signal wi ring such as connections to DC and Analog Input
modules This can be accomplished by grou ping separately. where practical. the
rollowlng categories or wiri ng:
AC power wiring, This Includes the AC Inpu t to the PLC power slJpply, as
well as other AC devices In the con trol cabinet.
Analog Input and O u tp ut Modu le w iri ng. TIt Is shou ld also be sh ie lded to
runher reduce noise coupllng ,
Discrete O u tput Modu le wiring. These ofte n switch Inductive loads that
produce noise spikes when SWitched orr
DC Input Modu le wiring. Although suppressed internally. these low-level
Inputs should be rurther protectcd against noise coupli ng by observi ng
these wiring pracllces,
711 7 12 Series 9030 PLC Installation and Han:J\\'a~ Ma'lIIa! - Octobtr 1999 GFKOJ56P
 "'
QJ [2]
Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated IC693DVM3DD Digital Valve Driver Module
If practical, grouping simI lar modules together In the PLC racks can help keep wiring This 4channel digital valve driver module Is capable of driving loads of up to 1.6 Amps
segregated. For examp le. one rack could cOlltaln only AC modules and a dtrrcrcnt rack at 2~ VOC . Although It mounts In a standard Series 9030 PLe slot. It does n Ot connect to
only DC modules. with further grouping In each rack by Input and output types. For the PLe backplane. Its control power and output power come from an external supply.
smaller systems. as an example. the left end of a rack cou ld contain Ana log modldes, the (The CE Fanuc IC690PWRI24 standalone power supply would be a suitable choice.)
middle could contaI n DC modules. and the right end cOllld contaIn AC modl,lles. Where Th is module Is designed ror TIL (S Vdc) Inputs.
t>C or Output wirIng bundles must pass near low level signal wiring bundles. avoId
running them beside each other. Route them so that. If they have to cross. they do so at
a right angle This wI ll minimize coupl! ng between them.
~ 't! <:,3
~
PWRO

.....lva)IIIU
IMI.VlOUT
v......VII lIIlT

Figur. 7-6. IC693DVM300 Digital V.lve Driver Module

Indicator LEOs
DI G CH: 1 4: TIlese I1ghl whelllhclr corresponding Input Is at a Logic 1 level.
PWR: Lights to Indicate the presence of .,.26 VDC (nominal) Input power on
terminals I and 2.

CFK0356P Chapter 7 Input alld Output Modules 7 13 7 14 Series 9030 pte InstaIJalJolI and Harol't'art Manual - October 1999 CFK0356P
 ~

......"

[!J o
DVM Specifications DVM Connections

Table 72. IC693DVM300 Connections

Table 71. IC693DVM300 SpecifICations
Pin Signal Name Connection Description
OUTPUT CHARACTER ISTICS No.
Outputs (Channels) per Module
I .28V.lN Module Con trol Power ... Input terminal (common on pin 2) .
4
- - - - - - - --
isolation 2500 Vrms (optical Isolation)
Supplies power to module's signal-level circuits and auxiliary
. 15 and - 15 Vol! power supplies (pi ns 2. 3, and 4). Requires
external 26 VDC (nominal) power supply
Nominal Output Vultage 24 Vdc
Power S upply for Output Channels 26 Vdc nom inal. 21 Vdc minimum, 35 Vdc 2 .28V.RET Com mon terminal for Module Co ntrol Power (pin I),
maximum 3 AUX .OUT. I + 15 Vdc @' O.3A AuXi li ary power ou tput for external circui ts.
Outp ut Currellt I.G Amps maximum per challnel 5 Not Isolated . Developed from Input power on pins I and 2.
6.4 Amps maximum total per module 4 AUtXOUT- 1 - 15 Vdc @I O.lA Auxiliary power output for external circuits.
-- - - - -;,--- 032Vdc
Output Voltage Drop (full y loaded) _. -- 5 NOllsoialcd . Developed from Input power on pins I and 2
Off state leakage cwrent 26 ~A at 2G Vdc operating voltage 5 DICITAL.UN Channel I TIL Input connection (common on pi n 9)

Thrn -on response time < I ~S w ith resistive load

Turn -offresponse lime
Output protection (per channel)
INPUT CHARACTERIST ICS
Input Voltage
< I ~S with resistive load
Reversed-biased zener diode for
(reewheellng Inductive current Also 36
Volt transorb for ESD and su rge
protecllon.
5 VDC ("TTL) nominal . '12Vdc Maximum -
6 DICITAL.2.1N Cha nnel 2 TTL Input connection (com mon on pin 9)
7 DICITAL.3.1N Chan nel 3 TIL In put connection (common 011 pill 9)
8 DICITAL.4 .1 N Channel 4 ITL In put CO,lnection (common O,l pin 9)
9 DICITA L.RET Common con nection for Dlghallnput Channels I - 4 (pins 5-
8)
10 ... 28VI.IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels I and 2
(common on pin 12). Requ ired externa l 2G VDC (nominal)
power supply.

Lugl c I Level Logic I: V > 3.5 Vdc

II .28V2.1N Power Supply connecOon for Output Channels 3 and 4
(common o n pin 12) . Required eXiernal2G VDC (nominal)
Logic 0: V < 0.7 Vdc
Input Cu rrent
- - - --- ---
3,8 IllA nomi nal
power supply.

Input protection
-- -
13.3 Volt transorb
-- 12 28V I&2.RET Common connection for both Output Channel Power Su pply
Inputs (pins 10 and 11)
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS 13 VALVE I.OUT Cha nnel I Outpu t connectio n (return on pin 14)
Voltage and Curre nt ~: VDC O.3A and - 15 VDC OP 0.2A 14 VALVE I.RET Return con nect ion for Channell Outpu t (pin 13)
-
Isolation
---- -- Not lsolaled- - - -- -- - 15 VALVE2 .0UT Cha nnel 2 Output connection (return o n pi n 16)
MODULE POWER REQUIREMENTS 16 VALVE2.RET Retu rn connection for Chan nel 2 Output (pin 15)
Power Consumption (Does not consume 5.6 Watts (wit h all ou tputs on) from 17 VA LVE3.0UT Channel 3 Outpu t connection (return on pin 18)
any power from PLC backplane.) extcr nal supply co nnected to termina ls I
18 VALVE3.RET Return connection for Cha nnel 3 Output (p in 17)
and 2 (does not Include power consumed
19 VA LVE4.0UT
- - - - - --;;:.
by o utpu ts)
_. - -
Cha nnel 4 Ou tput connection (retu rn on pin 20)
Input Voltage ... 26 VDC nomina l. 35 VDe maxi mu m 20 VA LVE4.RET
--
Retu r_'~~?_~ne~t1~l fo! C han~~L4 9~tput (J~~ 9L ________
continuous -- ~

Fuses
QUallt lly I - Module contro l power. I Amp. Buss COB- IA

Qua ntity 4 - Onc for each output. 2 Arnps. Llttl efu se 239002 .

CFK0356P Chapter 7 Input alld Ou tput Modules 7 15 7 16 Serles 9030 PLe Insral/ar lon and Haniware Manual - Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 [!]
Table 13. Series 90-30 Discrete 110 Modules

C.calogNurnbf,

IC693MDL2lO
ICG93MDL2Jl
I C693MDL2 ~ O
IC693MDL241
IC69JMDL6lO
Points

""
Dlsatte Modulu Jnput
120 VN:; Isollul'<l
240 VAl:. 1 50 Iau~{1
IZOVAC
24 VN:.
24 Voc J't),ltlvtLoglc
DescriptiOn
I ChB,er IOp'ion Modules
IC693MDL632 8 125 VDC J'usl tlvp / Negatlv'-oglc
IC69JMDl 613 8 24 VDC Nt'S_tl"e Logic
ICI59]MOL634
IC69JMDL640 24 vee PtnI1Ive / Ntg;u\ve
24 VDC Fbsillvel.ogir
IC693MOl641
IC693MDL6U
"" 24 VDC NtglUIVt Logic
24 VDC Jmhlve Logic. FAST
IC693MDL64~
IC69JMDl645 "" 24 yoe Negallve Logic. FAST ThiS chapter provides an overview of Series 90-30 Option modules. For detailed
IC693MOL646
IC693MDL652
16
32
" 24 VDC Poslllve/Negllllvl oglc
24 VDC Po~I'lve / Nt8al1vft..oglcFAST
24 VDC PosillvI' /Nt81111vl oglr
Information. the applicable user's manual shoul d be consullcd (lhesc ma nu als are listed
for each module at Ihe end of lis section).
IC69JMDL65J 3l 24 VOC Po'illvI.'/Nt'gllllvel.oglcFAST
IC693MDL6S4 32 5/ 12 VDC (lTl.) Ptn'! IVI'/N'g.ul"t.oglc Third.Party Option Modules and the Accompany Program
IC693M01.655 3l 24 VOC Po~I'JvI!/Nf'gilll\ "'08Ic
IC693I<CC300 16 Il1putStmulltOf In addi tion to the modules discussed In this chaptcr, numerous thlrdparty option
modules (and other hardware and so rrwa re products) for the Series 90-30 PLC are
DIJCftttModulu -Output available to meet a wide varlcty of needs. Third-party compa nies that meel GE Fanuc 's
IC693MDL3 10 t ZOVAC,OSA
I C693~ t D1l30
I C69JMDL3~ O
"
16
IlO/ 24()h\C.2A
120V/oC.OSA
standards may apply ror recognlUon under the GE Fanu c Accompany Program . Details
on the Accompany Program are found In the GE Fanuc Au tomation Solu tlons Cata log or
IC693MDU90 5 1ZO / Z((),IAC lsolluf'd. 2A on the GE Fanuc web slle. oolh listed below. For information on third -party modu les,
IC893MDL730
lC893MDL131
8
12124VDCPu511h eLoglc,2A
12124 VDCN~H.llveLoglc. 2A consult the roll owlng:
IC69JMllL732 8 I 'l/ Z( VDCPmII\\'~ LogIc, 0 5A Your GE Fanuc PLC d istributor or sa les engi neer

IC693MD1733 12 / 24VDCNtKMtlVtLogic
IC693MDL734 125 VOC ru,lltve/NrjllltV8..081c.lA The GE Fanuc web site at Itrcp:llwww.gefanuc.com
IC693MD1740 16 I 2/24 VDCPuslU ve Logic. a.SA
IC693MDLHI 16 I 'l/Z 4 VDCN~Bllll\'tLU81c.O SA The GE Fanuc Automiulon Solutions Catalog, CFW-0067
IC69311.-IDLH2 12/24VDCPos. Logic, Ell.'ClronlcShut1 CirCUli Prole"
I C69l"IDL 7~
IC693MOLfS i
"
3Z
3Z
I 'l/2 ' VDCN~8all\'1'Loglc
I 'l/UVDCPoslllvl' logIc
Option Modules Discussed in this Chapter
IC69lMOL7S2 3Z SI2 ( VDC (TTL) Nt8111IVe logic IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM)
IC693MDL153 12 I'l/2 4VDCf'uslllvt/ NI'8Kt1vl'l.oglcD SA IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Com munications Module (GCM+)
IC693MOL930 8 Rtl.y, ~ Abolattli
IC69JMOL940 16 Rtlay,2A IC693BEM33 t Genius Bus Controller (GBC)
lC693MDL931 8 ReIly, tsoliled. N C lind Foml C. 8A
lC693DVMlOO 01811111 VIIlv!' DrIver modulI'. 1 6A. Z( VOC

IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controlle r (FB C)
IC693BEM330 FIP Remote 1/0 Scanner
DlMNltModuluCnmblllltf /onlnputlOutput lC693APU30 1/302 MOllonMateAxlsPosltlonlng Module (APM)
IC693MI\RS90
IC69JMDR390
."
818
120 VN:. lnpul. Rl'll1yOUlIlUI
24 VDC Inpul, ReillY Dutrul
- - - --
IC693DS M302 MoUon Mate Digital Servo Modul e (DSM302)
IC693DSM3 14 MOllon Mate Dlg II<t1 Servo Modu le (DSM 314) - Preli minary
Table 1-4. Series 90-30 Analog UO Modules IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module
IC693BEM320 1/0 Link Imer fa ce Module
Cl!IlIIlogNull1btr Channtls Descrlpllon IC6938EM321 1/0 Link Masler Modu le
A olliotfo'odu/u
lC693A PU 30S 1/0 Processor Module
IC69JALG220
lC69JALCZZ I
Analog lnpul. VOltllgt
Allillug Input. Curr"n!
IC693CMM 32 1 Ethernel irHer fa ce Module
IC69JALG222 Analog Inpul, \IoIIl'g'" I l1gh Dl'n~lty IC693PCM300 /30 1/ 31 Program mabl e Coprocessor Module (PCM)
I',,
'6
IC69JALG22J Anlllog inpul. Cu rr~nl. High Or.n!IIY
IC69JALG390 AnalogOI!l[lut. VOltllSt IC693CMM3 11 Comm unications Control Module (CCM)
IC69JALC391 Anl'log Output . CUtrl'nl IC693AOC3 11 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) Module
IC693ALG39'l
IC693ALC44Z
4111 1l0uI
Anlilog Oulput, Currenl/~ltllg".lllgh Drnllty
AnalngCurrl'nt / VlltliStCOnlblnlllonlnpul / Ompul IC693TCM302 Temperalure Control Module (rCM)
IC693PTM1OO Power Tra nsducer Modllle (PTM) - Prelimi nary

CFK0356P Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules 71 7 CFK-0356P 81

 ,.,-...
...-
o o
IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module
The Ethernet Interface module (IC693CMM32 1) provides an Inlcrface that allows you to
attach the Series 90-30 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via an eXlernallranscelver and AAUI
cable. and to communicate wllh hosts and olher conlrol devices on the network.
The Ethernet Interface for the Series 9030 PLe has cllentlservercapabllity. As a cflellf II
can Inhlate communications with other PLCs containi ng Ethernet Interfaces, This Is
done from Ihe ladder program using the COMMREQ Function Block . As a server It
responds only to requests from olher devices such as a HOSI computer running a HOSI
Communications Toolkit application or another Series 9030 PLe acting as a client.
The Ether net Interface allows you to:
Directly atlach your PLC to an Ethernet network
Ini tiate transfer of data to the PLC from another device
Conlmunicsle slmultancously to multiple devices wllh up to 16 server connections
Interface with other GE Fanuc devices, as well as with devices from other vendors
Commu nicate fr om a Host compu ter (or other control device)
Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools
The Ethernet Interface dots nor support theSerles9030/ 20/ Mlcro HandHeld
Programmer. Either one or two Ethernet Interface modules can be Installed In any Series
9030 baseplate.
'"'"
Four LEOs are located at the top of the board . The Restart pushbutton Is located
Immediately below lhe LEOs, The RS232 serial port with the RJ t I connector Is the
Station Manager port. The RS485 seria l port Wllh tile 15pln D connector located below
the Station Manager portis the module's Oownloader port . The 14pln AAUI connector,
facing downward. Is the Transceiver port. The Default MAC Address label Is allached to
the outside of the plastic housing.
Board Indicators
There are fou r LEDs on the Ethernet Interface: OK. LAN. SER. and STAT. These LEDs
can be ON, OFF. BLINKINC slow. or BLINKING fast. They Indicate the state the
Interface Is In. traffic on the Transceiver port and Downloader port. and when an
exception event has occurred.
Restart Button
The Restart bullon serves fOllr fun ctions: LED test. Restart. Restart and Reload, and
Restart and Enter Maintenance Utility. The Restan bunon Is Inaccessible when the front
cover of the Ethernet Interrace Is closed.
Serial Ports
There are two serial ports on the Ethernet Irnerface: lhe Stallon Ma nager Pori and lhe
Down loader Port.

The Ethernet Interface connects to an Ethernet network through an external SQE The Station Manager Port
enabled transceiver (GE Fanuccatalog no. IC649AEA102 or JC649AEA 103 or equivalent.
This RS232 portis used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Stallon
See Appendix L) . The following ngllre shows the layout of the Ethernet Interface.
Manager software on the Ethernet Interface. This port uses a (i. pin. RJll connector.
"~ I A
The IC693CBL3 16 Station Manager cable Is Idea l for connecting 10 th iS port (see Chapter
10 fordetalls) .
CM'ol HI ()oI
ETHERHU
II./TER'ACe:
The Firmware Upgrade Port

u The 15pln , Otype. RS485 port Is used to connect to the PC Downloader In case the
communications software In the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated . Use Ihe
IC690..ocC901mlniconverter/ cabie kit for this connection (see Appendix F for details) .

AAUI (Transceiver) Port

The 14pln AAUI port connects to an external Ethernet compatlble transceiver via an
......-1 - ,
I IEEE 802.3 transceiver cable. CE Fanuc catalog number IC649AEAIOl (for 10Base T) or
I IC649AEA 103 (for 10Base 2) are suitable transceivers (see Appendix L for details) .
I
I
I Default MAC Address Label
I
I The Default MAC Address label lists the Ethernet MAC address to be used by this
-~ module.

Serial Number Label

The Serial Number Labcllndlcates the serial number of this Interrace .

Ethernet Interface Module Documentation

Figure 8-18. Ethemet ~terflC. Module For delaU, refcr to GFK- 154 1. Series 9{).3O TCPIlP EtJ,cmct Communicarions User's Manual.

830 Str/cs 9030 PLC Installatloll and Hardwart Mallual - Octobtr J999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapttr 8 OptlOf} Modults 831
 -...

IT] o
IC693PCM300/301/311 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) PCM Module Location
The Programmable Coprocessor Module (peM) Is a high per forma nce coprocessor for A peM can be Installed In any slot In the CPU baseplate only. except slot I (labeled
the Series go30 Modular CPUs (will not work with Embedded CPU models 311. 313, or CPU / I), which must contain the CPU module, A peM will not work In Expa nsion or
323) The peM supports the Modbus RTU and GE Fanuc CeM protocols. as well as the Remote racks or In an Embedded CPU (CPU31 1, 313, or 323) rack .
MegaBaslc and C programming languages. A free program for USing this module as an
RTU Master can be downloaded from the CE Fanuc website. The peM has (wo separate
ports, both accessed on one front pa nel connector. Protocols Supported
The reM Is available III three versions. Each version Is listed below with the lotal Modbus RTU and GE Fanuc CCM.
memory all the board and the nominal user-available MegaBaslc program memory size .

PC M Cata log Number Tota l Me mory User Mcgabaslc memory LED Indicator UghlS
IC693PCM300 lOOK 35K OK -Norma lly ON. Ind icates the basic condilioll or the module.
- IC693PCM301 192K 47K US I aud US2 - By derault. LED US! nashes to Indicate activity on Pori I. and LED
IC693PCM3 11 640K 190K US2 nashes to Indicate activity on Pori 2 Both LEOs stay OFF when there Is no POrt
activity, However. the runctlon or these two LEOs can be custom conOgured by the
user, Please see GFK0255 ror custom connguratlon detai ls.
!t0l31)1

PCM]OO OK Resla" Pushbutton

COPROC US1
Used to place the module In either Iht" RUN mode or the PROGRAM mode Please sec
US2 M

-PCM Operation Modes In GFK0255, Chapter 1.

Memor y Backup Battery

The Lithium battery for backup of RAM memory Is Insta\1ed In a banery moullUng clip
on Ihe Inside of the PCM faceplate. This battery Is disconnected ror shipment rrom the
factory and must be connected prior 10 Installation of the module. When the PCM Is
stored ror e)1tended periods or time, the ballery should be disconnected , unles:; you wish
BATIERY to relaln the program In RAM memory, Order replacement ballerles using catalog
number IC693ACC30 1 (package of two)

Cables
00
00
00 IC693CBL304130S - These Wye cables split out the two rCM port connections rrom the
0 0
00 single connector on the rrolll of the PCM modules. One of these cables Is supplied with
00 PORTS I &Z each PCM module. The IC693CBL304 Is ror the rCM300. The ICG93CBL305 Is ror the
00
0 CONNECTOR -+- - --1 PCM301 and PCM31 1. Please see Chapter 10 for details 011 these cables ,
0
00
0
og IC690C BL701n 021705 - These cables provides a direct RS232 connection between the
PCM and various programmers' seria l ports. These cables are not supplied with the
o PCM modules. Please see Chapter 10 ror detai ls on these cables.

Programmable Coprocessor Module Documenlation

figure 819. Programmable Coprocessor Module (pCM)
Applicalions
These modules are used ror communicati ng wit h programmi ng terminals, cms, bar
code readers, scales. printers, ASCII devices, RTU master devices, etc.
CFK-0255. Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Mooule and Support Soflware User's
Mallual
GFK-0256, MegabaslcLanguage Refcrenceand Programmer's Guide ReferenceMallual
CFK0487, Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCDP) User 's Mantml
GFK077 I , C Programmer's Toolklf (or Series 90 PCMs Ustr 's Manual

832 Series 9030 PLC Instal/ar/oll and Hardware Matlual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter80pr/cmModuJes 833
 --."

o o
IC693CBl300/301/302/312/313/314 Connecting the Cables
va Bus Expansion Cables ConneCi the single male cannetlCr to the 25-pln female connector on the right side
o f the CPU baseplate .
Connect the male con nector on the dua l connector end of the cable to tht 25-pln
femal e connector o n the first expansio n baseplate
~ncludes Instructions for Building Custom length Cables) Connect the unused 25p[n female con nector on the dua l connector end o f the cable
to either the single male connector o f a seco nd I/O bus expansion cable 10 continue
the I/O bus expansion chai n. or to an l/ O bus Term inator plug I(t h ls Is the last cable
Description in the expansion chai n.
\,0 bus expansion cables (IC693CBL300. 301. 312. 313. 314), called MWye cables,M have a
single male 25- pln 0 connector on one end and a two-headed (one male. one remalc) Imporlanl Noles AboulllO Bus Expansion Cables
25pln 0 connector on the othe r cnd as shown In (A) of th e fig ure. TIle 50 root (15111)
(IC693CBL302) cable has a single male connector on the CPU baseplate end and a single The maximum nu mber of cables that ca n be Included In an I/O expansio n system Is
terminated male connector all the ex pansion baseplate end The 3 foot cable seven, and the total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last
(IC693C8L300) can also be used as a WYE adapter cable to simplify building custom length expa nsion baseplate Is 50 feet (15 meters) . The total maximum cable length between
cable!. (see the section MCable AppUcation Suggest lons~ later In thls Chapter) the CPU basepla te and the Ia!>t remote basep late is 700 reet (213mctcrs) . Failu re to
FE WolE observe these maxlmllm cable lengths could result In erratic operation or the PLC
CONNE C TOR ~l'" system.

A ~,~
2. CPUs 350 - 36,1 support a maximum of seven 1/ 0 expa nsio n cables. CPUs 33 1 - 341
support a maximum o rrour 1/0 expansion cables

~.~,~oo'~
The 50 foot (15 meier) 110 bus expans ion cable (IC693CBL302). which has a male
conneClOr on each end . has the 1/ 0 bus terminati ng resistors buillin lo the end
connector o n the cable If this cable Is used. you would nor Install a separate terminator
M.... l MALl
COhNf:CTOIII CO""CT()II: block

B
~
~F~
~a~' ~
Caulion I
110 6us Expans lun cab les s hould NOT be connected or disconnected
MAlE IoW,.E wll h power applied to the VO expansion baseplate(s). Unexpected
CON"-lCTOR COH '<ECTOR PLC opera tlolll1lay result.

Figure 1015. Dot.il of I/O Bus Expansion Cables
Cable Lenglhs
c IC693CBL300 3 feel (1 meter). com/nuolls slJitld
o IC693CB L30 1 6 feet (2 meters). continuous shield
CI IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL3 14 50 feet (15 meters). comJlluousslilrld
C1 IC693C BL312 0.5 feel (0. 15 meters). comilluousshleld
u IC693C8L3 13 25 feel (8 meters). conrlnuoussllfeld
Funclion of Cables
The 1/0 Bus expansion cables are used to extend the 1/0 bus (0 ex pansion or remote
baseplales In a Series 9030 1/ 0 system w hen additional 1/0 s lots are needed or
baseplates are required some distance from the CPU basep late. The prewlred I/O bus
ex panSion cables ca n be used for connecti ng either expansion or remote baseplates.
When' required cable length Is not ava ilable In a sta ndard cable. a custom cable must be
bllilt (see the sectlo n ~ 8ulld [ lIg Custom Length lIO Bus Expansion Ca bl es~ for detailed
Illstrucllo ns).
Cable Applicalion Suggeslions
In general. ills advantageous to use standard. factory bullt cables. where possible. to
save time and avoid wiri ng errors.
Using Standard Cables
For co nnecting bet'lveen baseplates (either between a CPU and expansion baseplate.
between two expa nsion baseplates or between two remote baseplates) In the same
cabine t when a sta nda rd length (0.5, 1. 2. 8. or 15 melers) will fit the need
As a \Nyc jllmper for custom built poln tlo -po lnt cables (l C693CBL300 [s often used
ror th is). Thi s combi nation saves time since a pol ntlo-polnt cable can be bu ilt much
faster than a Wye cable. An example or this Is s hown In Figure to23.
Using Custom Built cables
When you need a cable length not ava ilable In a sta ndard size.
When a cable must be routed through a conduit Ihalls not large enough ror a
slandard cable's connector to nt throllgh

CFK0356P C/lapter J 0 Cables 10-23 /024 SerIes 90-30 PLC InstaJJaifoli and Hardware Manual - October 1999 CFK0356P
 -....

~ ~
Building Custom Length VO Bus Expansion Cables Expansion Port Pin Assignments
This section provides details needed to create custom length 110 Bus Expansion cables The follow ing table lists the expansion pOrt pin assignments you will need when
building remote cables. All connections between cables are point-to point. that Is, pin 2
of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end , pin 3 to pin J, etc.
Two Types of Custom Built Cables
The two lypes arc: Table 102. Expansion Port Pin Assignments
Pol nt-ta -Polnt - these have a single male connector on one end and a si ngle female
Pin N um ber Sig n a l Nam e Functio n
connector on the ot her end . These are usually used wUh the IC693CBL300 which
supplJes the \Nyc connection. This COlllblnatlon saves lime since a polnt -lD-polnt 16 DlOOT I/ C6erlal Data Positive
cable ca n be built much faster than a Wyc cable. 17 OIOOTI I10Seriai Data Negatt ve
Wye . these have a single male connector on one end and two connectors (one ma le 24 OIOCLK I I OSertalClock Posttlve
and onc female) un the other end . 25 OIOCLKI I I OSertalClock Negative
20 OR5EL Remote Select Positive
21 ORSELI RemoteStlecl Negative
Components Needed to Build Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables 12 ORPERR I t'arlty Error rosltlve
IJ ORPERRI Parity ErrorNegatlvt'
Note. the specia l twoheaded Wye connector used on the s tandard Wye cabl es Is not
available as a separate component.
8 I uKMRUN RemOteKun t'Osttlve
9 DRMRUNI RemoteRunNegatlve
Item Description 2 I u,RAME Cycle t'rame l'Osltlvt
3 DFRAMEI Cycle FrameNegatlve
Cllb le: Belden8 107 only (no substitutes)
I FGND Frame Grou nd ror Cable Shield
Compu ler cable, overall braid over rol lsh Icld.1wlsted -pair
1 OV LoglcGrolind
3OI011 / 80 "C (l16"F)
24 AWe (.22 mrnZ) tinned copper, 1 x 32 stranding
Velocity o r propagation .. 70% t
Nomlnll l Impedance .. lOon
110 Expansion Bus Termination
25 PlnMaleCon nector: Crimp Plug .. Amp 207464-1; Pin .. Amp 665069 When two or more baseplates are cabled together [n an expansion system , the I/O
Solder Plug .. Amp 74791 22 expansion bus must be properly terminated. The I/ O bus must bt terminated al the last
25 Pin Fema leConnector: Crll11p R&eptacle. Amp 2074632: Pin .. Amp 66504-9 baseplate In an expansion system. Each signa l pair Is terminated with 120 ohm. 1/ 4 watt
Solder Receptacle - Amp 747913-2 resistors wired between the appropriate pins, as foll ows (see the above table. also) '
Connec lor~hc ll : Kit-Amp 7458335-
plns I6 17: 24 25; 20 2 1: 12 13: 8 -9, 2 - 3
Metal-plated plastic (plastic with nickel overcopperl t
Crimp rlna Amp 745508 I. spllt rim! ferru le Tilt! 110 bus It!rmJlIstlon can be dOIlt! one of rile (ollow/llg ways:
t Crlticalinrorrnaiion o By Installing an JlO 8us Terminator Plug, catalog number IC693ACC307. o n the last
:I: ~ncbr part nUOlber'S listed ror user assembled cables are provIded for reference only and do nex expans ion baseplate (local expanSion baseplate or remote baseplatelln the system,
suggest or In1>ly thai they are prererred. Any part meeting the same sptClf'lollion can be used The Terminator Plug has a resistor pack physically m ounted Inside ofa conncctor.
The I/ O Bus Terminator Plug Is shipped with each baseplale: only the last baseplate
In the expansion chain can have the 110 Bus Termit1alor Plug Installed Unused 1/ 0
Bus Terminator Plugs can be discarded or saved as spares.
o If an expansion system has only onc expanSion baseplate, the I/ O bus can be
terminated by Installing as the last cable, the 50 foot (15 meter) 1/0 Expansion cable,
cata log number IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314. TIlese cables have the term ination
resistors Installed III Ihe end Ihat connects to the expansion baseplate connector.
o You can also build a custom cable wllh termination resistors wired to the appropriate
pins for Installation at the cnd of the bus.

CFK-035GP Cltnpltr 10 Cables 1025 JQ.Z6 Strles 9030 PLC Il1stallar/otl and Hardwart ManuBI - October 1999 CFK0356P
 """'-
o ~
Shield Treatment
AliCE Fanuc fa ctory made cables are made with a conrlrwous, or 100% s hield . Th ts
means that the braided cabl e shield Is connected to the metal shell of the connector
arou nd the entire perImeter of the connector. ThIs provides a low Impedance path to
frame ground fo r any noise energy Ihal Is coupled onto the ca bl e s h Ield .
For custom length cables made per FIgure 10 -\ 8, the best noise Immunity Is achi eved
w hen usi ng a metallzed connector cover that makes contact with the cabl e's braided and
foil shielding and with the co nnector shell on the termina ti ng end ,
Note
Ills not SlImcientlo only solder u,c drai n wire to the connector shell. It
Is requ ired that the cab le's s h Ie ld be continuous across the entire length
of the cable. Including at the terminati ons. The Ogu re below s hows the
recommended method ror fold ing the braided s hi eld back before
Inserting the cable Into a metallized cove r.
" M2'
Fall & Braid
(1 0 be folded back
SM 'Aler1 for U.erl of e.rly Remote aaseplete Verslons' lor
description 01 when 10 .tlach dr.ln wi .... to pin 1
Figure 10-16. How to use Splij.f!ing FemJleS lor Fall and Braided Cable Shield
For Iyplcallndustrlal applications. all expa nsion and rem ote baseplate cables can be
made with pl astic s hell covers a nd s ho uld be wired as s hown In Figure 10 19. [n eit her
case. pin I s hould be wired Into both ends o f lhe custom length cable and the
recoll1mendatlons listed be low shou ld be followed for the \Nye cables treat ment In the
remote (IC693C HS392/399) baseplates.
When using 100% shielded ca bles aU loca l (CPU and expa ns io n) baseplates In the system
must be solidly referenced to the same ground poi nt or a potential difference between
base pi ales could disturb s ignal transmission.
Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions
In early retllote baseplates versio ns, IC693C HS393E (and earlier) a nd IC693C HS399D
(and earlier). It Is necessary to remove pi n I of the mating cable w here the cable plugs
Into the baseplate. This means that when using a fac tory made Wye cable, such as
IC693CBL300. you mu st brrak pin l out of the male end w here It plugs Into the remote
GFK0356P Chapter 10 Cablts
.-..,.
baseplate before using II with one of these baseplates . Cusrom bulle Wye cabltS {or ehtSe
bastpJatts should bt built using Figure 1020.
Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC69JCHS399E (a nd later) have a
change Inside the baseplate which eli minates the need to remove p in I from the mating
cable, When usi ng factory made Wye cable with these baseplates, It Is nor necessa ry to
remove pin I from the ca ble. Custom built \Nye cables for these baseplates can be made
lIs lng either Flgu rc 1020 or Figure 1021. Figure 102 1 shows how the sta ndard (factory
made) Wye cables are made.
By rem ovi ng pin I In custom built Wye cab les made for the earlier versions of remote
baseplates, the p in 7 toV) signal reference origi na tes in the main (CPU) basep late. In
th ese earli er versions o f the remote baseplates, pi n I was tied to pi n 7 (OV) and also AC
coupled to the remote frame ground. When using these baseplates In combi nation with
the 100% shielded Wye ca bles, the pin 7 (OV) reference would be Improperly DC coupled
to the remote frame ground th rough the Dsubmlnlature connec tor s hell . w hich Is DC
cou pled to the remote frame ground.
In the remote baseplates IC693C HS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (arld later) , the
pin I s h ield s[gnllli s DC coupled to the remote fra me ground and flOt attached to pin 7
(OV) , This allows the best noise ImmunIty by providi ng a good co ntinuous cable s h ield.
and stili allows the pin 7 (OV) signal reference to o riginate In the C PU baseplate wllhout
the need for remOVing pin I In any factory o r custom built cable The D,sllbrnlnla turc
cOllllcctorshellls still DC cou pled to the remOle fra me ground.
Making a 100% Shielded Cable
Use the fo llowi ng s teps to build a 100% s hlclded cable:
I, Stri p approx imately 5/ 8 Inch of insulation from you r custo m cable to expose (he
s hield .
Remove the male Pin I from any connector plugging directly Into an older version
remote baseplate (lC693CHS393E, IC69JCHSJ99D, or earllcr)
3. Put spllt rlng ferrule over cable Insulatloll (Figu re 10 17) .
4. Fold the shield back over top of the cable Insul ation and ferrulc.
5. Place the colla r o f the metal hood over top o f the folded s hield and securely cla mp
the hood
6. Test you r ca ble for continu ity bel'Neen both connector s hells, Conncct an ohm meter
between the shells and nex the ca ble at bot h ends. If the metallzed conncctor hood
Is not making pro per contact with the cable s hi eld al either end. the connecllon will
show Intermittent conti nui ty o n the ohmmeter,
7. Plug the metal hooded cable onlO a remote baseplate ex pansion port connector or
Into a C E Fanuc WYE ca ble and securely lighten the two strews. Insta lling and
tigh tening the screws will electrically connecll he s hield to the remme baseplate
frame ground. w hich s hould In turn should be connectcd to earth ground as
Ins tructed In the "Installation" chapter, under the headi ng "Baseplate Sa fety
Grou nding. M
1027 1O.Z8 Strles 9030 PLe Insta/lslloll and Hardware Manual - Ocrober 1999 GFK0356P
 "'

@] @]
Wiring Diagrams T\'o'tSTlO St1IE.1.DED ""07S

r----- _ " PIN

r- ~-; II -- ~----------t----------..rr..- - " ~;o; --I

PAIRS PI>,I

r;:--- --:
The following wiring diagrams show the wiring connguratlon for 1/0 expansion system
cables. Wiring diagrams art provided for both polnt-lo-polnt cables and Wye cables. I
: CAlLI
=.'
;:.: I
I 010011 II
:~~:
I I
t I I t
11 0I00TI
~ ~ I~':
I~ " I
I

PIN
TWlSTEO PMAIl. SHIELDEO
('PIlot,,!) PIN
"'5~1~
~~~AM ~
= =~ ~~ ~12 g:::t :- :: :
-.,.....-t--,..,.-- -,e ----,IF': I :: : I I : :

=" ==:
r----- i= r- -- f- -----, I
I
Ill.ACI!
::. I
'0 I DIU''l1Ut 12 I
' 'II II P
DfU"M
1 ... 0
1.
- ... ,
(lIfIII.NSIOHI
REo,ooTI I
I F 0: OfODT ,e ,J.. I I OIOOT I I 011 ;::OOImu>lilltlllU '1 1)DRIi.~"'Ii-00J.AS!""""E I
I ~ " OIOOTI 11 I I I I U OIOOtl I ~'o SlAlU I I TtIW_nQOl ;; :: I I ' I : g=~~~ I ~ :! 0
toNNe (;1 " :

: E::
t

g: ~~ tIt I ~ ~ :=:: Lt.S~TE : I

:
~UG
;;; ' :
I Df'f'1WA
: 0I"'1IAAIfJ)
2 tt
I I
l I
I I
2 DPfIWol[ I : : ,0
) OPfI't.WEJ: .: :
I e'. DRSl 20 I 1'0 DR3E~ I ~ 0 EXPANSION I
I WVE C
~
'. DMElI 21 21 ORS(U 1 :::"0
c::
POItT I : ~ :: I av I ..c;: t : I Nt 7 av ::: !: :
I CA8ll
Cc:i~~~OA E '.
00 D"AEM!2 " DPREAR I
~'o
0 I
:. . _____ ;;', L_'~:, 'Y;C ~ _' :".::~ __ i'F " ____ JI
1\ '"
I OPREAA' 11 U oPfI!ARI : 011 :
I ~HO l- 00 O/WRVN' O~RVN ~'.
I =0, OIt!.lAUk' , II I' 'DI'IMRU... I ~'. W'I'[ I
I'i~ ~.
omv~.'[ ~ ti.u~E : "'......,.... ,
.......,,,. j I
MALt: '[1h'\LE ,.tAU 'UtAU
: ;;; : I J , t I I 1 DPfAAM! : : 0 ,oci'''''' INClS .... I I ...... U ... ,.... ............ ato.II
~ ~ ~ evo~" .ttf~fl~
II to(Ico-rC't'fD lo~I'1oC10f11v .. lOtW1Ic-.::J
I ....
I O. OHAAMEI l::::a:::I 1 OP1fW,O/ I .0 CO'o"ECTOR I
I e.: Oil , ,,"C I I I I '<C 'DV I ~.: END I IU!lLOtllV.HW ... il 'U)DI\.OI .. WIf!E

L_____ ~ " L __ ~O ~ ~~---~ ~ F~N2 __ J f- '0 _____ J I

I
II
I
~~::Oi'0~~(~::"~~~~!., I
~:~ :~~ ISHIELDOAAINYt1~tl '~~ ;t:1~ I I
,.,.n. . . .llED 8HELL. ~E1ALllI!O SHill I I
NOTE : I I
Bold da,Me line shOWS conllnuous (100%) Shielding when melaHiled ,hell connectors ale pluggee logethef I
~

Figure 101'1. PointYo-Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom length Cables

TWISTED P",IRS. SHIELDED "5521

(1 PAlRS)
IN 1 ~N
r----- p
I f= ~, D OIOOf
OIooTI
IS
\7
,...,-+~
I I I I
IS OIOOT
17 OIODf!
L-..
F ,
0,
-----,
1
I
1-',
~ "
OIOCLI(
0I0CLr<J
2'
25
I
I I I I
I I 2' OIOCLI(
25 OIOCLKI
~
F :.
0.
~~

II
I
WYE
CABLE
F-'
P:'
~
DRSEl
ORSEV
ORPERR
2021
12
-rT
...:.....:..
.....:.
...:.....:..
2021 DRSEU
ORSEL ~.'
!-- "
12 ORPERR ~ 00
SERIES
00-
BASEPLATE
------------- _-w::= JI>-P.H

I
I SINGLE ~
P :. ORPERRJ 13 !l ORPERRJ
I ORMRUN ~ .0
F o. EXPANSION
PORT
.~,

........ I' ... SNI

1.
ORMRUN I NOTE :
I CONtlECTOR p '. ORMqUNI ' I I ~ II ORMRUNI F .'
F" F ' OR Bold dashed Ilnflshows contlnuoul ( 100%) Ihleldlngwhen meta ll ilea shllll COnnec.IOI'I 'fll plugged 1090lhllf
I
I
:
END
F:'
~ .:
[)FRAME
DFRA.MEJ
ov
2
3
1 NC
I I
::
..!.-.:..

I I NC
2 [)FRAME
)
7
OFRAMEI F
(N
:
~.:
wv,
CABLE
IL _____ ~:.0
1= FGND I I~---~ ~~ I FeND r-:'
i=" 0 _____ J j Figure 10-19. Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram
2S--PIN 2S- PIN (sHIELD ORA.IN WIRE 25- PIN 2S- PIN
FEM,o\lE M.'.LE MALE FEMAlE No1e

In remote basep lales. IC693CH S393E (and earlIer) and IC693CHS399D (and earl Ier). It Is
Figure 10-18. PolntToPoint Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise necessary to remove pin 1 of the matIng cable where the cable plugs Into the baseplate.
tmmun~y This means that when using a factory made Wye cable. lC693CBL300. you must break
pin l out of Ihe ma le end w here It plugs Into the remote baseplate before using II with
o ne of these ba!>eplates Cusrom built Wye caules {or fllrse ba~platessliollid he built USing
Figurr 1020. See the seclion "Alert 10 Users of Early Remote Baseplate Verslons~ fOf
more detailS

CFK0356P Chapter 10 Cables 10-29 10-30 Serlts 90-30 PtC Iflstal/af/on and Harol\arr Manual- Occobtr J999 CFK0356P
 -...

QEJ ~
Remote baseplates IC693C HS393 F {and later( and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a Application Examples
change Inskle the baseplate which alleviates (he need to remove pin 1 from the ma ting
ca ble, When using fac tory made Wyc cable w ith these baseplates, It Is lIor necessary to
remove pin I from the cable. Custom built \Nyc cables for these baseplates ca n be made Expansion System Cable Connections
using cUher Figure 1020 or Figure 102 1. Figure 102 1 shows how the faclory made Wyc The following example shows cable connections In a system that has expansion
ca ble arc made. baseplates but no remote baseplates.
twl5TED 5111[1.0(0 .. rOl/
PI'" ".\IRS PI ..
r-= p . ,--~~~" - :rr..----------r-- --- ----'7""\""-- ~I;o; --I ~ -----1, II

: ~:: ::;! I ;:= II ~:: ,, .. ,Q5'

I
~'o
CMLI
f:=>
TO
1~
0
O<OClo(,l
DllSiL M
I.
I
~o ,, I I
I
25
2D
DfOCL.MJ
DtIIiSlL IF- 0.
: ~;E-E :o DllIEU" 'I : ~:. I I 11 OltSlU 1'1110'01' I
I ~oo DII"IM '~ II
''''''"''''" , II !lOR"'''-1I. , :;.' NOTE
:

I
I
F::
t::
011

'lUG
0'
=:'~
DII~'
I rt.1l1oO'",,","Of-I
6 o O"fW,I~
pO: D"'''''~ 1
2 I
g=~~ ,' - ::
'~U""
I'

II
I
o
O:
,,,
I

I
II
I

I
':

2 DPfRAME I::: ,0
JOf'FRAMEI:::
= I"-SfPlAJE I
CONI-IECTOR , lOTAL WJCIMUM
DISTANce FAOM
CPU BASEPLATE

,,
TO LAST EXPANSION
: ~ !: ov , '"\; : : : : ,ov : ~ :: lOt
eASEPLAff.IS

~ _____ F '. L_'~O 17::D" U:::_' :~~ __ d;;' 0. ____ J 50 FEET 116 METERS )

~~ 2~.P1N II I~
![ ,.... --,
;>iN"
t.lALE
"'t''',,,", S,..,
fEMALl
"'-t......, 5,.,.., ,
.,
I I
IAAl.l
........00 ' ....1 _
'fo,w,f
.., .....

I>tI(lD OIV-N 'If II;' I I =r.:I;"-11 110 EXPANSION CABLES

Ia&lCBL300. l n II MET ER)
, iI I
I ' 011 ~I ..on .t.M.~"'TIl ~"'Hl'.
oU' 'lll~ ~1'V&OId 01 tACH,
I IC48JCBl301, IS FT [1.1 MET ERS)
IC69JCBLlO2f.l 1~ . 50 n . (1 5 METER!
I IC&DlC1Ll12. 0.5 n
I 15 METERS)
ICailCIII.3IJ, 2S FT IS MET ERS)
I o SMNOTE
I
I~
""1
,." I
I
"" I
' NOTE

"
l' CAlILI I Each lignal pair on the 110 bu. must
': ~: I
I
btllolTTI!nated at the and of tha 110
but .....Uh120ohm ,.1,I0I'l ThIIl.,-
I mlnadon can be doni wHh the 110
I BIJI rermlnatorPlug (IC693ACC307).
byu.lng tha 50 1001 (15meter) cable
I
___ J (IC693CBl302131 A) with bulnln terml-
lUlling resJslars, or by btJlldJng. cus- 110 BUS
--------------- ~~~!I- tom cable whh tha raSblc,. Installed TERMINATOR
. ~. ","",'00 _
'EIAALf. _ In the connector al (hi end of the bus PlUG (5.. NOlE)
1,1 ..... "'''' ''"-1 ICeg3ACClOT
NOTE:
Bold dalhed hn. shows continuous (100%) shielding When metallized shell connectors 8r. plugged together

Flgu", 111-20. CUlTent Remote baseplate OC69lCHSl931l99) Custom 'Nye Cable Wiring Figure 111-21. Example of Connecti1g Expansion Baseplates
Diagram

CFKOJ56P Chapter J0 Cabll's /OJ I 10J2 Series 90-30 PLe Installallon and Hardware Manual - Oerober 1999 CFKOJ56P
 ---
@l
Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection Example
The followi ng exampl e shows cable connections In a sys tem that Includes bot h remote
and expansion baseplates A system can have a combi nation of remote and expansion
basep l ate~ a~ long as the dista nce and ca bl e requirements are followed

RA~ITirrrr II "+)- ~. .
CPU
BASEPLATE
tC693CI-1S39 11397

EXPANSION
<2)
BASEPL ...TE
IC693CHS3921398 EXPANSION BASEPLATE

MTnmlm+o~
MAXIMUM DISTANCE
FROM CPU= 50FEET
(15METERS)

REMOTE BASEPLATE ror 0

MIIIIIIIII~I+b(~ CD
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393f399

ro
a +6
+-0
REMOTe
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393J399 Y-CD

r!
+-f2I
REMOTE \:,.J
BASEPLATE
IC693CHSJ931J99 REMOTE BASEPLATE 0
F~~~~~!~!i~r~~T M 111 11 1111 ~I + I-- ~
(0 Standafd W'll Cllbll

o Custom Buijt Polntla-Polnt Cable

CD 1C693CBLJOO Standard W'Ie Cable, Used 85 W'l8 Jl,Impttr

o 1C693ACC307 Bus Terminator

Figure 11)22. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote aaseplates

CFK0356P CllaplU 10 Cablts 1033

 .......

~ ~
IC693CB l304/305 Wiring Infonnalion
Port Expansion (wyE) Cables for PCM, ADC, and CMM The rollowlng figure shows the pin connguratlon for each of the connectors 011 the WYE
cable.
.."'u~,

Function of cable SHIELD

R5-232 TO ( PORT 2 )
A WYEcabie (lC693CBL304 for PCM300: IC693CBL305 for PCM30lllii. ADC311. CMM311 . ( PORT 1 ) R5-232 TO
AD693CMM30 I. and SLP300) Is supplied with each PCM,ADC. and CMM module_ TIle RS-232 CTS ( PORT 2 I
( PORT 1 I R5-232 RD
WYE cable Is used to separate two pons avaUable on a single physical conneCtor; the cable R5-232 RO (PORT 2 )
separates the RS-232 from the RS48S signals. In addlUon. the WYE cable allows cables used ( PORT 1 ) R5-2J2 RTS
with the Series 9070 PCM (0 be fully compatible with the Series 9030 reM. The WYE RS-232 OTR ( PORT 2 )
( PORT' I R5-232 CTS
cable and cable COllnectkms are shown below and on the following page R5-232 DCD { PORT 2 I
NO CONNECTION
Each WYE cable Is I foot In length and has a right angle male connector 011 one end that R5-232 RTS ( PORT 2 )
connects to the PCM module. The ot her end has a dual female connector with one SIGNAL GROUND
connector for port 1 and the other for port 2.
... ,~
( PORT 1 I R5-232 DCO
(PORT 2) RS-485 SO I A)
R5-232 DTR (PORT 1 )

RS-485 SO (8) (PORT 2)

R$-485 RTS ( B ) I PORT 2 )

R5-232 (PORT 2) R$--ot85 RTS (A I

1 FOOT
(.. 20 INCH, -0 INCH)
25-PIN FEMALE
CONNECTOR 10 1 (PORT 2) RS-485CTS (A')

( PORT 2) TERMINATION (CTS)

Rg......t85CTS (8')( PORl 2 )

TERMINATION ( RD) (PORT 2)

PORT' ,.
I i (PORT 2) R5-485 RO (A' I
R5-485 RD ( 8 ') ( PORT 2 )

PORT 2 ..

MALE CONNECTOR

PORT 1 PORT 2 .... nse

SHIELD SHIELD
R5-232/RS-485 PIN 1
2>PIN FEMALE R5-232TO RS-2J2TO
CONNECTOR
R5-232RO R5-232RO
figure 1025. Wye Cable
RS-232RTS RS-2J2RTS

RS-232CTS RS-232CTS

Cable Specifications
SIGNAL GROUND SIGNAL GROUND
RS-2320TR R5-232DTR
CabieLen8111 I rOOt (0.3melers)
~
RS-232DCO RS-2J2OCO
R5-485 SO (8)
25 Pln Ma leConneclor: Crimp Plug . Amp ZOH64 I: Pin . Amp 665069
@ RS-485 SO (A)
R5-485 RTS ( 8)
Solder Plug . Amp H191Z 2 R5-485 RTS ( A )

Z5 Pin Fe",aleCOllneclOr. Crimp Receptacle. Amp 20H63Z: Pin. Amp 6650"9

RS-485 CTS (8' )

Solder Receptacle . Amp 141913Z

Rs.-.485 CTS (A')
TERMINATION (RO )

ConnectorShell: Kit Arnp2019087

@) TERMINATION ( CTS )
R$--ot85RO( B')
R5-485 RO t A' )
Separate Shell- Amp 207345 1.
Male Screw Retainer. Amp Z059S0 1 DUAL FEMALE CONNECTORS
Cable1)-pe Z7 conductorcable. ZSAWG (.09 ",fIl 2). whhoveraUshleld. extra
nexlble
figure 10-26. Wye Cable Comcc\ions

1036 ~rltS 9030 PLe Installallon and Hardwarr Manual- October 1999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapler 10 Cables 103/
 --..

~
The WYE cable Is I foot In length and has a right angle male connector on one end thaI
connects to the PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector w ith o nc
connector for port 1 and the other for pon 2.
In order to usc an RS 232 cable on port 2 of the Series 9030 PLC. eit her a special cable
must be made (ollowi ng the serial port pin assignments shown above or a WYE cable
must be used The WYE cable allows use o f sta ndard Series 9070 cables
(IC690CBL70 111021705) for the peM or ADC. When Installing the CMM module. use the
WYE cable In cOIlJunclion with cables thaI you build for the CMM module accordi ng to
directions In Cha pler 8 of CFKQS82. the Strles 90 pte Stria} Communications Manual.

1038 Series 9030 PLe Installation iflld Hardwifrt Manual- October 1999 CFK0356P
 ~

~ ~
IC693CBL327/328
110 Interface Cables with Right Angle 24Pin Connector
Note: These cables replace obsolete UO Interface cable IC693CBL315. These
replacement cables have rightangle connectors to reduce the clearance space
required in front of the PLC. These replacement cables use the same pinouts as
the obsolete cables.
Description
These cables each have a rlghtangle 24pln connector on one end and a set of stripped
wire ends on the other. These two cables are Identical except for their opposite
connector orientations. This difference In the cables' connector orientations Is for the
purpose of matching the oppos ing connector orien tations on the dualconnector type of
IS'poull modules that are equipped with the TBQC 1..0 faceplate adaptor. See
Appendix J for Informa tion on the T8QC (rermlnal Block Quick Connector). Use the
IC693CBL328 right side cable for this application.
If a d(ffcrcnt length cable Is required. you can build your own cable. but only straight
connector kits are currently available. See ~Bu l1dlng Custom Length Cables~ below.
Specifications
10 reel (3 meters)
FujltsuFCN-365S0Z4AU
Connector Depth for Cables IC693CBL327/328
T he followIng ngure shows that these cables exte l1d 2 ~ out from the face of the modules

r--
32polnt I/O modules. Ihey are connected to. TIle depth of the cabinet that the PLC Is mounted In should allow

'0 FeeI(3Me,e,,1 ---l for the 2~ depth added by this connettor.

Series 9030
1/0 Module

Figure 1037. IC693CBL327/328 Cables

Note
Each conduclOr In these 24conductor cables has a currelll rating of I 2
Amps If using these cables wit h a 16-polnt Output module wit h a
h igher output current rating. you must use the lower vaiue of 1.2 for the
maximum load currcn t rating [f you have neld devices that require Figure 11).38. Oimonsion for Depth of Connector for IC693CBl327/328
more th an 1.2 Amps. do not use a TBQC assembly. Use the standard
lermlnal Board Instead.

Applications
11lese cables are for use wit h Series 9030 1,0 modules that have the Fujitsu 24-pl." user 1,0
connector nlcre are two categories of these modules
32 po int modules with two 24pln connectors (lC693MDL654. IC693M0L655.
IC693MOL752, and IC693MDL753) The IC693CBL327 cable is for the modules' lell side
con nector (fron t view). and the IC693CBL..328 cable Is ror the modules' right side
connector. The modules' right side conneaor Inter races with 1,0 circuit groups A and B:
the modules' left side connector Interfaces with groups C and D. See Chapter 7. "Input
and Output Modules for a drawing of these modules. See CFK-Q898. the Stries 9(}-3O
PLe I/O Module Specifications Manual. for detaUs about these mocillies.

CfKOJ56P C/lap/tr J0 Cables /057 /058 $tries 90-30 PLe Ins/allar/on and Hardware Manua/- Oc(oiJrr 1999 CFKOJ56P
 ~

~ ~
Building Custom Length 24-pin Connector Cables Table 10-11 . Wire Llsllor 24Pin COI1neclOrs

Cables connect ing the modu~ to field devices can be buUtto length as required for
ind ividuAl appUcations. You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24pln Pi n Number Pair' WIre Color Code Pin Nu mber Pair' Wire Color Code
connectors. The 24'pln connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from CE Fanue.
Catalog numbe rs for these connectors and their associated parts are listed In the following AI I BROWN BI 7 VIOLET
table TIle list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin , crimp pin. AZ I BROWN / BLA::K BZ 7 VIOLET I BLA;K
a nd ribbon cable EnciJ accessory kit remains tnough components (DamoectOfS. backs/lel/s, contact
pillS. tCc.) (0 iJS5tmble rtn slng/HtJded c~bles of Ute typt spified (or each kll.
A3 Z RED B3
WHITE
A4

A5
Z
3
REDIBLICK
ORANCE
B'
85

9
WHITE/BLPCK
GRAY
Table 10-10. calalog N...,bers lor 24-Pin CooneClor K~ s
A6 3 ORANGE / BL'K 86 9 GRAY / BL.cK

CE Fa nu c Vendor A7
YELLOW B7 10 PINK
Calalog Num ber Ca talog Number Description A. 't'ELlOWlBlPCK B. 10 PINK/B L/ICK
IC693i1CC316 FCN-361j024 -AU Solder eyelet receptacle A9 5 DARKCREEN B9 II LIGHT BLUE
(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN-360C024B Backshell (for above) AIO 5 DARICREEN / BLACK BIO II LIGHT BLU E/ BL.(;K
IC693i1CC317 FCN363j024 Crimp wire receptacle All 6 DARK BLUE 8 11 12 Ll GHTCREEN
(Crimp lYpe) FCN363jAU Crimp pin (for above. 24 needed) AI2 6 DARK BtUE/BLPCK BI2 12 UCHTCREENIBLACK
FCN360CO/4B Backshe ll (for above)
IC693i1CC318 FCN 367j024AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle. closed cover
(R ibbon or IDC Type) FCN 367jO/4AUH lOG (ribbon) receplacle. open co~ ... 5 1400
321
+++++1-+++++ CO NNECTOR
Add iliona l tools from fujitsu are required 10 properly assemble the crimped contact and +.,.+++++ ++ ++
ribbon cable Iype con nectors Tht solder tytlet conllectors (as provided In lC693ACC3 IG) do 321
nOf requIre any special cooling

Crimped Comaci Cormeclors (as provided In l C693ACC317) require :

Hand Crimpi ng Tool FCN363T-TOO5/ H NOTE
Contact Extractlon Tool f CN360TTOO I/ H
Each wire pair has a solid color w ire and that samt'
Ribbon Cablt' CO/l/1tCIOtl (as provIded In IC693ACC318) rtqu fre :
color wire with a black tracer For example. Pai r I has
Cable Cutter FCN 707TTOO I/ H a solld brown wire paired w ith a brown wire wit h a
Ha nd Press FCN 707TT10 Il H black tracer.
Loca tor Platc FCN367T-TO I2l H
These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu d istributor. Three of the
largesl US distributors for fuj itsu connectors are Marshall al (800)522-008 4, Milgray at
(800)M ILCRAY. and Vanlage at (800)8430107 If none of these d istributors service your
area . then contact Fujitsu Mlc roeleclronics In San Jose. Californi a, USA via telephone at
(408) 922 -9000 or via fax at (408) 954-06 16 for further Informalion

It Is recomme nded that you order any necessary connector toollng with su fficient lead Ume
to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally nol
stock Items and can have slgnlncant lead times from dIstrlbuUon. If you have any furth er
quesdons about lhls Issue. please feel free to contact the CE Fanuc PLC Technical Su pport
Hotline al 1-800-CE FANUC (1-800-433-2682). or Internallonal dial direct 8049186036.
Pin connections with color codes al'e shown In the roUowlng table. Cables are made or 12
(wisled pairs; wire size Is _24 AWG(O.22mm2).

CFK0356P Chapter 10 Cables /059 1060 Strfts 9030 PLC Installarlon and Hardware Mallual - Ocrobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 [IqJ
Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables
Because custom built cables usc a straigh t connector, they require more space In front of
the PLC than Is required for a factory buill cable. which has a right-a ngie connector. The
following flgure shows the space required In front of the PLC w hen th is cable is
connected to a module. The depth of the cabinet thaI the PLC Is mounted In should
allow for the depth added by this con nector

PLC (Side View)

Figure 10-39. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front or PLC for Custom Buih Cable s
Possible Uses for These Cables (Factory or Custom Built)
Co nnecting from the 24pln connectors on a 32-polnl module to either a
usersupplled lerminaistrip/ blockordlrectly to \/ Ofleld devices (switches, lights.
etc.).
Conn(,(ling from the 24 pln co nnector on a 16-point module that has a TBQC 1/ 0
faceplate adapter to eit her a user-supplied termlnalstrlp/ blockor dlrectlytollO neld
devices (switches, lights, etc,)_ Use the right side cable, IC693CB L328, for this
purpose, See Appendix J for Information about TBQC (lerm lnai Block Qu ick
Connect) options,
Connecting from the 24-pl n connectors on a 32-po!m module through a conduit 10 a
l erm lna i Block Quick Connect terminal block, This can be accom plis hed by
auachlng one of the op tional 24-p ln con nectors to the stripped end aft er pulling the
cable th rough the cond uIt. See the section "Build ing Custom Lengt h Cab les" for
Information on the connector options, See Appendix J for information about TBQC
(Ter mInal Block Qu ick Connect) optIons.
Connec tIng from the co nnector o n a 16pol nt module that has a TBQC lID faceplate
adapter through a conduil to a TBQC term inal block. This can be accomplished by
attac hing one o f the optional 24 pln connectors to the stripped end after pu lling the
cable through the conduit . Use the right side cable, IC693C8L328. for this purpose.
See the section "B uilding Custom Length Cables" for Information o n the connector
options. See Appendix J for information about TBQC (Termina l Block Quick
Connect) options

CFK0356P Chaprer 10 Cables /06/


Chapter I System Design
12
Introduction
Thi s chapter does not pretend to cover every possi ble aspect of deSigning a Series 9030
system. bu t It does provide you with basic product selection guideli nes and with help In
fin di ng the InformatiOil you need . You will also nnd the C Fafluc AUlomallonSoJutions
Calalog to be a valuable tool for system design.
Step 1: Planning Your System
Planning Is an Important part of design ing a system . The better y ou plan the system, the
less trouble you wi ll have Installing alld Implementing II. The following list discusses
some basic things to know or have when planning your system :
Expectatio ns. If a new syste m. w hat is It expected to do? If ret rofitting an ex isting
system. what does It do now. and w hat Is It expected to do a fter It is retrofitted
Speclncatlons (preferably In wrltlng). These Include such things as operati ng
environment Information. speed. accu racy. repeata bility. size, conformance to
stand ards. cost restrictions. time reqlJlrements. etc.
Technical docull1entatlon . If retro fi tting existi ng equipment. you can refer to Its
documentation (layout drawings. schematics. etc.). If the documentation Is lost.
perhaps a copy Is available frolll the manufac turer. Additional infor mation may be
gat hered fro m discussions with the equi pment ope rators and maintenance
technicians. For a new d eSign. there are probably mechanical or process draWings of
the eqlJlpmcnt.
Step 2: Determining VO Requirements
This step comes next because other Series 9030 component choices are dependent on
the number of 1/ 0 points required . In particular. the number of modules required . and
their loca tions. determines what ly pe and how many basep lates are needed and also Is a
major factor In CPU selecrlon. Note that there are some res trict ions 011 the maximum
number of ccrtain types of modules (Analog 1/ 0 and Option) that ca n be supported In
olle PLC system. See the table ~Maxlm um Number o f Modules Per Sysl e lTl~ fo r data.
To start . determine how many 1/ 0 points. both analog and discrete. are needed for
you r system . If retronttlng an eXisting system. use the schematic diagrams for the
system . If designing a new system. use the mechanica l drawings or specincatlons to
de ter mine what Inputs and outputs are needed . LIst these on a piece of paper (or on
CFK0356P
..... ,
@)
your drawing soFtware screen) . Separate them Into four type, to corres pond to the
four types of modules you will use: Discrete Input. Discrete Output. Analog Input,
Analog Output. If there are any special requirements. such as fast response. etc"
mAke a nOte of them on the page. Also. If parIS of your system are physically
separated from other parts. meanIng you will probably be using Expansion or
Remote Racks. create a separate list for each location.
When you have nnlshed devcloplngyour 1/ 0 lists , determine how many lI D
modules of each type you need. Ah hollgh there Is an abbreviated ~I / O Modules ~
chapter In this manual. you should refer [0 publicatIon CFK0898. Strlts 9030 PLC
1/0 Module SptciflClu/ons User 's Manual for complete deta ils. If you are using Remote
Racks. crea te a separate list for each location.
Addilion.1 UO Module Seleclion F.clo<s
Voltage/CurTent Requirements - A wide variety of possible operating voltage and
current requirements ca n be met with Series 9030 1/ 0 mod ules.
Positive or Negative Loglt - The applicable ty pe can be selected to match sink or
source Signal rcqulremerHs. See GFK0898. Series 9030 PLC lID Modu/eSpeclficarlons
Ustr 's Ma/ltlal. for details.
Isolation Requirements - Isolated discrete lI D and relay ou tput modules may be
selected to meet Isolation requirements.
Hard Contact Requirements - Relay o utput modules ca n be applied .
C0.51 - The selecllon of certain modules ca n pOSSibly reduce the number of racks
required In your system . For example. 32'polnt discrete I/ O modules can save rack
space compared to lower density modules
Standardiza tion - Sometimes a compa ny wi ll standardize on parllcular types of
modules to simpli fy training or stocki ng of spare parts
R~spo n se Time and Noise Immunity -110 modules have different response time
a nd no ise Im mun ity capabilities. TIlese factors should be considered w hen se lecti ng
lI D modules. In general. higher response speed Is usually attained at the sacrlnce of
some noise Immunity. There fore , If high response speed is not a requ irement. It
would be better to selett a slower 110 module that has higher noise Immunity.
However. all 110 modules. rega rdless of their response time rating. have a
reasonable level of no ise Immunity. Note that the IC693APU305 (/ 0 Processor
Opt ion module . with lis 500 us update time. can handle I/ O signals that are 100 fast
for the CPU to handle directly (see C FK J028. Strlts 9030 I/O Processor Module UStr's
Manuab .
Step 3: Selecting Option Modules
There 3re several application requirements that determine Option module selection.
However. note that there are some restrictions on the maximum number of certain types
of modules (Analog and Option) that ca n be su pported In o ne PLC system . See the table
"Maximum Number of Modu les Per System" for data.
Interfacing with a Particular Protocol or Standard - CCM. Et hernet. F1P. Gen ius.
RTU , SNP. etc.
Interfacing with GE Fanuc CNC controls- Use the IC693BEM320 and
I C693BEM32 11 /0 Llnkmodu l ~.
12 1 12-2 Series 9030 PLe Inseallatlon alld Hardware Manual-October 1999 CFK0356P

~ @l
Distance - Genius co ntroller modules can commun icate at distances up to 7.500
feel (2.286 meters) . Serial communications using the RS 485 standard can cover up
104,000 feel (1.219 meters) . FIP networks are rated for 1.640 feet (500 meters) ,
Modules with serial ports communicating via modems and telephone lines or
satellite links can cover unlimited distances
High speed Inputs - The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter can be used with
encoders to count high speed pulse trains. The IC693APU3051/0 Processor module
Is an Intelligent module that can satisfy high speed Input and output req uirements
Independent of the PLe scan.
Motion needs - The IC693APM301 /302 and IC693DSM302 (and the future
lC693DSMJ I4) are motion control modules that work with servo motor controllers
and other motion devices, The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter module can count
high speed pulses from encoders for use In measuring mOllonrelated data ,
Temperature contro l - The IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Mod ule rrCM) has
thermocouple Inputs and PWM outputs
Extended fealUres - Where there are two or more Option module choices for a
particular application, o rten an extended feature requirement determines which one
to choose, For example, there are two Ethernet choi ces, the IC693CMM3Z 1 and the
IC693CPU364, but only the IC693CPU364 has Et hernet Global Data (EGO) capability
Another exam ple: There are three Genius controller modules, the IC693CMM301
Ge nius Com munlcallons Module (GeM) , Ihe IC693CMM302 Enhanced Gen ius
Communications Module (GCM'1") , and the IC6938EM33I Genius Bus Controller
modulr (CSC) . While al l illree are capable of basic Crnlus cOlnmllnicallons, only
Ihe Genius Bus Controller module can co ntrol Genius Blocks.
Remote or distributed VO needs - One distributed 1/ 0 solution Is the use of GE
Falluc's Genius Blocks, which ca n be mounted at the point of usc and connected
wit h a PLC 's GenIus Bus Controller (CSC) module via a twisted pair cable , The
Ge nius Bus Controller Is the only Series 9030 module that can control Ge nius
Blocks. Other modules (GCM, CCM+) can read Input data broadcast by Genius
Blocks, but cannot send commands to them. By sc l~Ung the applicable bus
Interface unit (DIU), you ca n use GE Fanuc Fi eld Control distributed 1/ 0 to Interface
to Series 90-30 WorldFIP, Pronbus, and Genius buses.
State Logic - These products allow ~ Nalural Language progra mmlngMas an
alternative to ladder logic , This makes program creation, documenting, and editi ng
easier for Ihose not trained In ladder logic programming. Industries that are
required by law to thoroughly document any changes to lhelr system nnd State
Logic to be especially useful
Cost - Sometimes an Option module choice call be made based on the basis of cost.
This Is the case where either of two modules are capable of mllng a need , For
example. lr you only need the capabilities of the IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius
Communications Module (GCM). you wouldn't have to purchase the more capable.
but more expensive, IC6938EM33 I Genius Bus Controller modu le (GBC) ,
Pe rrorman ce - Higher data transfer rate or amount of data o ftcn dictates which
Option module will be used For example, the IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius
CommunlcaUons Module can transmit and receive many limes more data than the
IC693CMM30 1 Genius COllllllunlcatlons Modulc, and it transfers data to the PLC
CPU at a faster rate. A comparison table for these two modules Is found In
Appendix A o[ C FK0695.
CFK0356P Chaplfr 12 System Design
- ..........
Standardization - Someli llles a company will standardize on particular types of
modules to simpli fy training or Slack ing of spa re parts.
Disp lay requirements - Several options are available for Interfaci ng with GE Fanuc
Human to Machine Interface (HMI) devices.
Thlrd ' partysolutlolls - Many automation solutions result from combi ning GE
Fanuc product with thlrdparty products, There are dozens of thirdparty modules
and other products that work with GE Fanuc PLC products. Example s o f
thlrdparty Series 9030 modules arc Profibus, Device Net. SOS, LonWorks.
interbusS, RTU/ Modbus, ASCII Basic, RTO. and M IIl1voh /S traln Gauge input
Contact you r GE Fanuc distributor ror fu rther [nformallon, or check the CE Fanuc
Web site for thl rdparty product Information and links
Step 4: Selecting a CPU
Once you have dete rmined how many a nd what type of 1/ 0 and Option modulesyoll
require, you can select a CPU . Many of the fa ctors that app ly to selecting Option
modules, such as performance, cost. standardization, elC, also apply to selecti ng a CPU
Details on CPU capablUlies are rou nd In the ~C PUs~ chapter.
Number of modules required by the system - Embedded CPUs come In 5s101 or
10s10l sizes a nd they do not s upport Extension or Remote baseplates, Therefore. If
a system requires only a few modules, these may be an option, If more than 10
modules arc required. you must select a Modular CPU . The CPU331-341 C PUs
support up to 5 total baseplales, and the CPU350-36 4 CPUs support up to 8 total
baseplates. If you need more than 49 total Option and lI D modules, you w[\I need
to use o ne o f the CPU350-364 group o f CPUs.
Moduies with Quantity Rcstrlctlons- Many modules are restricted as to how many
may be used In one system, This number also varies by CPU. For example. In the
case or an a channel Analog Output module, the maximum number pcr system Is'
41fuslnga311.313.or323CPU
8 If usi ng a 331 , 340,or 341 CPU
19 If using a 360-364 CPU
Please see the sectio n MMaxlmlim Number of Modules Per Systelll~ ta bl e for data
TypesorOplloll Modules - The PCM , ADC, CMM, and SLP modules can only work
In a Modular CPU baseplate. Use of these modules would, therefore. rul e out the
use ofElllbedded CPUs (311 , 313. 323). See the section ~ Locatlon of Modules In the
PLC Ra c ks ~ for more Information.
Perron llance - as shown In the ~C PU s~ chapter. the CPU350 - 36 4 CPUs use a more
powerful microprocessor than the lower numbered CPUs. For applications w here
higher performance Is required , one o f these would be a good choice. For
mathl ntenslve applications, the CPU352, with Its bulhln math coprocessor. would
give the best perrormance. For Ethernet applications, the CPU364 with Its bulltln
Ethernet Interface. provides fa ster performance than separate CPU and Ethernet
modules because they have to communicate over the PLC backplane. which Is
slower than the CPU364's Internal path , For serial communications, the CPUs 351.
352. and 363 (using Ports 1 and 2) perform faster than an IC693CMM311 module.
Extended features - The IC693CPU364 has a bulltln Ethernet Interface which
would eliminate lhe need for a separate Ethernet module, This would save a PLC
123 124 Series 9030 PLe Irlslal/atton and Hard",a" Maflual-October /999 CFK0356P.

~ @l
slol. The CPU351. CPU352. and CPU 353 each have two additional built-In serial
ports w hich elimi nate the need for a separate serial communications Option mod ule.
The CPUs 350-364 have extra features and capabll Hies that the other CPUs d o nOI
have such as, Floating !\lInt Math. SequenUal Even t Recorder. and Memory Protect
Key Swllc h. Also, CPUs 351-364 have larger tota l memorys!zc. as well as
connglJ rable analog and register memory
Me mo!), requirements - The CPU3S J-364 CPUs have conngurable ana log and
register memory. This makes them mo re capable of meeting the needs of (I) Option
modules that req uire this type of mc mory and (2) user programs thaI require larger
a mounts of register or analog memory. The CPU360 does not have configurable
memory and has a lower base me mory size than the CPU351-364 CPUs. The
CPU360-364 CPUs have standa rd Flash PROM for user data storage. This Is not
available in some o ( the other CPUs. See the ~CPU Firmwa re and PROM
Co nn guratlons~ table in the ~C PU SM chapter for details.
Expandabllily and Upgradeabliity - The Embedded CPUs do not su pport
Expansion or Rem ote racks and do not a llow changing CPU type . Therefore. they
have limited cxpa ndabillty o r upgradeabil ityoptions. Modular CPUs can be
upgraded to more powerful CPUs. The type of modular CPU determines whel her a
system can have a total of 5 o r 8 baseplates. w hich can have a d irect bearing on the
future expansio n capabilities of a syste m. For exa mple , if you only need 49 total
Option and 1/ 0 Mod ules. you could lise o ne o f the CPU331-341 CPUs. However,
you would be at the maximum modu le limit and would nOI be able to add any more
to Ihe sys tem wit hout cha nging tile CPU . If you used . Instead, Ollt' of the
CPU360-364 CPUs. you could laler add up to 30 more modules w hile keepi ng the
same CPU. Th is would simplify expa nding the system .
Cost - If some of the other factors suc h as performance or exte nded features are
not major Issues, one of the lower cost CPUs can be ap pl ied. However, sometimes
purchas ing a more expensive CPU with extended fea tu res ca n be less costly than
purchasing a lower cost CPU and an additional Option module to cover the feature
needed . Besides the direct cost o f the mod ules. using th e si ngle CI'U would save 8
PLC slot which could help eli minate the need for. and cost of, an extra Baseplate.
Power Supply. 1/ 0 Bus Expansion Cable, etc. Since prices are subject to change. It
would no t be practica l to give an exa mple of this. Please check with your distributor
(or current pricing Information.
Disp lay requirements - The CPU351. CPU35 2. CPU 363. and CMM311 have seria l
ports that are oft en used to com municate with Human to Machi ne Interface (HMO
or O perator Inte rface (Ol) d evices.
Time o f day (TOO) clock requireme nts - The Embedded CPUs do not have o ne.
the Modular CPUs do.
System s ize limitatIon - If you a re close to the maxImum number of modules
limitatio n of YOllr system. y ou can use mod ules that have dua l functions to conserve
rack slots. For example, the CPU364 has CPU a nd Ethernet communications
ca pability In one module. The CPUs 351 .352. and 363 have CPU and Serial
Commun ications capabill lY In one module. There are dlscrele and analog
combination 110 modules that provide a limited number o f both Inpu ts and outputs
In o ne module. Also. the 32 -polnt discrete 110 modul es conserve rack slots
compared wit h lower density (16polnt and less) 110 modules. You may also be able
to use Gen ius Blocks or Field Control distribu ted 110 to acconlllloda le the need for
addltlonall /O, since these d o not require a PLC sial: they communicate with the
CFK0356P CJraptt!r 12 SYSltnJ Design 125
.......
PLC over a commun ications bus. Genius Blocks comm unicate over a Genius Bus.
and Field Control can communicate over Genius. FIP. or Pro nblls busses.
Protecti on against unauthorized changes. CPUs 360 - 364 have a keylock switch
that ca n be locked to protect agai nst unauthori zed ch anges to the PtC. CPUs 31 I -
341 do not have a key lock switch. However, all CPUs have lhe capability of
password protection for the applica tion program.
Step 5: Selecting Baseplates
The requ irements determined In the previous steps will largely dictate w hat baseplates
to select. Please refer to th e ~ l3 ase platesM chapter for additional deta ils.
Embedded CPU baselJlate - If the previous selections dictate the use of an
Embedded CPU. you have lhree cho ices. The CPU3 11 and CPU31 3 are 5-5101 sizes.
and the CPU323 Is a IO-s lot size. The CPU3 l J has 6K Bytes of memory and the
CPU3 13 has 12K Bytes.
Modular CPU Baseplate - If you need a modular CPU. you mUSI use a Modu lar
CPU basep late. There can be only one CPU base plale per system There are jusl
two types. 5-slot and 10-sI0t. If you only need a 5s101 size, yOll may wa nt to
conSide r whether the extra slots that a 10-slot size would provide would be
advantageous for possibl e fUlure exp.lIlslon. On the other hand. the 5s101 size
requ ires less space.
Expansio n and RemOie base plates - TIlese also come In 5-5101 and 10-slol sizes In
general. Ills best to use Expansion baseplates w here possible Instead of Remote
baseplates because of the better speed performance o f the Expansion baseplates
Where a 10Iai cable dista nce of over 50 feet Is required. Remote baseplates mu st be
used In cases w here you o nly need a 5-s101 size. you may want to consider whether
It would be advantageous to use a 10-s lot size In order to have open slots for future
expa nsion That fa ctor sho uld be weighed agai nst the fa ct that the 5s10t size
requires less space and costs less
Phys ical size - For locatio ns w ith size limitations. one or more 5-slot baseplates Illay
be a good cho ice. See the - Baseplales~ chapter ror baseplate dimensions and
clea rance requirements.
Number of Modul es Requ ired - The number o f modules need at each location will
have a bearing on the sizes of racks required . You may choose to use a smaller rack
(5 ' 5101). If possible. to save cost and space. However, as noted be low. a larger rack
(IOslot) with unu sed slots will leave some room for fu ture expansion, If desired.
Expandabllity - For future expa nsion, you m Ight w ish to leave some unused slots In
certa in baseplates.
Step 6: Selecting Power Supplies
The following factors will affect you r Power Supply se lection decisions. See the - Power
S upplies~ chapter for additional details.
Power capacity - All Series 9030 Power Supplies haVe th ree Individ ual ou tpulS:
+5VDC . ",24Vnc (Relay), and ... 24VDC (Isolated) . Althoug h all or these Power
Supplies arc rated at 30 Watts maximum tota l outpu t. the ra ti ng of the +5VnC
output varies from supply to su pply. as shown In the following table. For
applications requ iring heavy loading of the ... 5V n c supply. choose o ne of the MHlgh
Output " power supplies: IC693 PWR330 or IC693PWR331 .
126 Sult!S 9030 PLe Installatlotl atld Hardware Manual-October 1999 CFK0356P
 -...

~ @l
Input voltage - As see n In the next table, l10llllnallnpul voltage choices are 24VDC. VersaMax
48VDC, 120VAC,I25VDC, and 240VAC.
VcrsaMax 110 modules ca n be used as distributed 110, commu nicating with a Series
9030 PLe over one of three bus types: Genius. ProObus. or Device Net. This
Table 121. Power Supply Fealure Comparison Table arrangement wou ld require an Option module ror the desired bus type In the Series
9030 PLe as well as the app licabl e Network Interface Module In the VersaMax system
Catalog LNd Nomina l For more Information on the Versa Max products, please see CFK 1504. \kflsMax Modules.
Number Cllp.clty Input O utputCapac:ltles (VoltlgelR;wer 1') Powtr Supplies. alld Carriers Manual
IC693PWR32 I JOWaus lOOlo2 40 VACor .. 5 voe +24 VOC Isolated +24 VOC Relay
125 voe ISwaus 20 waIlS ISwaus
IC693PWR3JO JOWatlJli 100 to 240 V/t or -5 VOC .2 4 VDC lsolatw ... 24 VDC Relay
Designing For Safety
125 VDC 30wens 20 watts 15wetts
A good design should not on ly function properly and ernclent ly. but OIusl also proteci
IC693PWR322 30WatlJli 240r 48 VDC ... 5 VOC .24 VOC Isolated ~ 24 VOC Relay
personnel and equipment frol1l h arm . Although some basic guideli nes are found In the
15 wells 20watls 15walls
~ Installatlol1 ~ chapter ofthls manual. It Is not possible to cover every aspect of sa fety
IC693PWR3JI JOWalls 24VDC .5 VOC .24 VOC Isolated ~ 24 VDC Relay because of the diversity of applications Addlliona lly. II is not practical for this manual (0
30 wailS 20watlJli 15wans try to cove r all the possible codes a nd regulations that may apply to your locality or type
t Total of all outputs combined cannot exc~ 30 walts of equipment. You have the ultimate respons ibility to consult apl,lIcable safety codes
for your locality. or that I)eftain to the particular Iype of equipment you are des ign ing.
and ensure Ih al your design complies wllh these slandards. In the United States. the
Reducing PlC Module Count by Using Other GE Fanuc Products Nallonal Eleclrlc Code (NEC) has been adopted by many loca lities. Tht United States
If system s ize IImllations (more than 79 mod ules are needed) are 8. problem In a system Occupationa l Safety and Health Admlnlstratlon (OSHA) regulations also contain many
using Remote racks. a possible solution could be the use o r CE Fanuc Genius Blocks. safety regulations that apply to all Industrial equipmen t In the United States . In the
Field Contro\. or VersaMax prod ucts. These distributed 110 devices can be used Instead abse nce of local regulations. the NEC and OSHA regulations should be followed when
o f Remote racks In remote locations In some cases. and their usc would not add to the designi ng your syslCm. In addition to the Informallon contained in this manual. OSHA
Series 9030 module counl . regulations ca n be accessed on-line at www.osha .gov. Some key safety Issues are
outlined below:
GeniusBlocks
Proleclion From Electrical Shock
These a re Intelligent distributed 1/ 0 blocks that are panel-mounted at Ihe pOInt of use
They co mmunicate with a Ce nl us Bus Controller (CBC) modu le In the PLC via a Proper wiring design. Including groundi ng and circuit protection Issues, should be
shielded . twisted-pair cable . They are not Included In tht PLC module counl, but do followed . Personnel s hould be prevented from aCCidentally coming in contact with
requlrellOmemoryallocatlon. A single GBC module in a PLC rack can control up to 31 hazardous voltages. Also. unauthorIzed personnel should be prevented from gaI ning
Geni us Blocks . Ge nius Blocks come In discrete and anal og 1/ 0. high speed counter. RTD. access to high voltage cabinets and panels. Interlock circuits are oru~n used for thIs
a nd thermocouple hllerface types. For mort!' Information on using Cenl us Blocks. see purpose.
GEK90486 1. Genius VO Systtm and Communications User's Manual. and GEK904862.
Cenlus 110 Discrete and Analog Blocks User's Mallual. Fire Prevention
Field Conlrol The guidelines In the NEC and OSHA regu lations prOteCI against fires . especially those
caused by faulty electrical design
These arc Intelligent distributed 110 units that mount atlhe point-ofuse on a 35mm x
7.5mm DINrall. They can communicate over Genius, FIR o r Pronbus buses. They are Proleclion From Mechanical Hazards
not Included In the PLC module cou n t, but do require 110 memory allocatio n. A Field
Co ntrol un It consists of a 8us Interrace Unit (DIU) that Interfaces to the applIcable bus. Personnel shou ld be protected from physical hazards. such as moving mechanisms like
frolll one to eIght 110 modules, and cabling. 110 modu les come In various discrete. conveyors or Index tables or mechanical pinch polnlS. The use o f Interlocked safety
analog. and RTD types. A \oca lloglc processor module (MFP) Is also available . For gales. light curtains. safety mal switches. dual hand bUllons. physical barriers (guards) .
further Information on Field Corltrol. see the following: elc. can be used ror Ih ls purpose . See the applicable secllon of the OSHA regulations for
details.
C FK-0826. F1~/d COTllrol Dlstrlbured 110 and Control Sysf~m VO Modules Ustr's Manual
C FK0825. FJeld Cotltrol Cenlus Bus Inttrface Un/t Ustr's Manual Prolection From Electrical Failure
CFK1 115. Fltld COllfro/ F1P Bus Inttr(act Unll Ustr'S Manual
In the evellt or a system component failure. the design s hould be an acceptable
G FK 129 1, Flrld Contro l pronbtls Bus Jllftrfacr V /lit Vsrr 's Manual Mfailsafe" one In which the failure does not cause a safety hazan.l such as a runaway

CFKQ356P Chapter J2 System Dtslgn 127 128 Srries 90-30 PLC J/lsCaffation and Harriwa~ Manual-October 1999 CFKQ356P

@J
condition or a disabli ng or eme rgency stop circuits. Emergency stop and other sarety
circu its shou ld consist or hardwlred components thallcnd to rail In a harmless manner.
For example. In a Master Control Relay (MeR) circuit use series-wired, normalty closed
Emergency Stop pushbunon swllches and Interlocks to conlrol an electro mechanical
Master COlurol Relay (see next ngure), Thi s relay shou ld directly disable motor sta rters,
PLC outl>ut circuits, etc. This type o r circuli tends to fall "open, ~ w hich disables the
equipment For exa mple, If a wire breaks or a contact wears ou(, the circuit opens and
the MCR drops ouL lr solid slate devices fall, I hey tend to rail "shorled," which In the
case or PLC OOIPUI circuits wou ld cause the controlled device to turn on or stay on ,
In the circuit below, the MeR Is an electro mechanlcal relay, It Is energized by the
application o r power to Its solenoid call w hich magnetically pulls the con tacts to their
energized states. When deenerglzed. the contacts move to thei r normal. at rest states
by Ihe pull or a mechemlcal spring. When the Reset pushbutton Is pressed. a nd Ir all rour
orthe E-Stop and Gate switches are closed, the MCR relay will energize and "latch" In
the energized state through Its MCR contact In parallel with the Reset pushbutton, Its
mher MCR conI act applies power to tht> lIIotor starter and PLC output circuits, Ir any
o ne or Ihe E-Stop o r Cate swHches opens, or Ir a wire breaks In this circuit, or [( the MeR
coil becomes derectlve. MCR will deenerglze and open the circu it to the motor starters
and PLC output circu its.
As shown. lhe PLC 's main power and Inpul circuits are nOI cOlltrolled by the MCR since
Ihey do not directly contro l any out pu ts, Keeping these circuits energized Is desirable
because this a llows the PLC to continue gat hering data, recording rault Inrormatlon , and
controlling communications. even If Its Output module outputs are disabled by the
MeR
Ir an additional margi n or safety were deSired , two MeR relays could be used . Their
colis would be wired in paralle l, their normally ope n contacts wired In series. and their
normally closed COlli acts wired In parallel. This would help guard against the possibility
or a welded con tacl" on a single MCR relay_
Relel EStopl E-Stop2 Gate 1 G.te2
M.lterCOflllol
ReLay (MCR)
PLC Main Power and
InPIJI Power Circuits
To MOlor S"f'ler.. PlC
Output Module Circuits. ete
Flgu.. 121. H.rdWi.. d MCR Clrcu~ Eumple
GFK0356P Chapter 12 System Dts/&11 I l9
-
@l
Prolection From Design Changes or OvelTides
Only authorized personnel shou ld be allowed to make changes that could Impact the
safe operation of the equipment. Passwords and lockout circuits may be used to
accomplish this. Some Series 9030 CPUs have keylock switches to protect against
program changes (see MCPUSMchapter ror keylock switch details) .
Safely Documenlalion
PLC Program Oocumelltatlon , Thorough documentation will help you and others
who work on the equipment remember and understand how the sa rety circuits and
reatures work , (In some Industries, appllcable regu lations may require this type of
documentation) The PLC programming sortwa re gives you extensive
documc rHaUolI abilities
For example, you can create Nicknames suc h as "PSTOP''' Descriptions such as
"Program SlOP Call. " and Comments such as ~Thls collis used to stop the program
cycle, but It does not turn orr power to the main hydraulic circulI. However. if the
operator opens the sarety g,ne , the Sa rely Cate Interlock switch will open and shut
ofT the hydraulic pump_~ These Nicknames. Descriptions, and Comments become
pari or the PLC program and can be viewed wit h the applicable sortware
As an alternative to ladder logic programming, the State Logic programming
language makes It casler to documenl l)LC program design because It uses "Natura l
La n guage~ expressions Instead of ladder logic symbols.
Electriul and mecha ni cal prints should contain notations pertaining to sarelY
issues,
Written operating and rnaintenallce Instru ctions as well as traini ng should be
provided to operators and maintenance personnel , These should address any
applicable sa rety Issues.
Guarding Againsl Unaulhorized Operalion
Keylock switches and passwords are rrequently used ror this purpose
Labeling. Guarding. and Lighling Issues
Labeli ng. Operator devices such as pushbultons. switches. or on-screen (software)
butlons s hould be clearly labeled as to their runctlon ,
Guarding, Operator devices should be guarded . w here applicable. to prevent them
rrom being activated aCCidentally, Recessed pllshbulion designs or pushbuHons
with surrounding guard rings might help prevent the pushbutton rrom being
depressed Ir, for example. a tool were d ropped or laid upon It. Mounting
pushbutton stations to venlcal surfaces also may help avoid this problem .
Lighti ng. illumination levels In the workI ng area shou ld be adequate so that all
labels can be clearly seen_
Equipmenl Accessibil~y Issues
The equipment shou ld be laid out so as to give operators surnclent room to perrorm
their lasks sa rely. Also. surncle nt clearance should be provided so that maintenance
personnel have sare access to electrical panels, control boxes. etc These minimum
cleara nces are speclOed In the NEC and OSHA requirements.
Il IO Series 90-30 PLC Instal/atloll atJd Hardware Manua/-Ocrober J999 GFK0356P
 ~

@] @]
Number of Modules Per Series 9030 PLC System Calculating Power Supply Loading
The followi ng table Ilsls the maximum number of each type of 1/0 and option modules The load placed on a power supply In a Series 9030 PLC baseplate Is the sum of the
that can be Installed In a Series 9030 PLC system. The number of modules that ca n be Internal and cxternal10ads placed on \I by all orthe hardware components In the
Installed In a system depends 011 several factors, Including available references for each baseplate (backplane. modules, etc.), as well as external loads connected to the Isolated
CPU model. the current rati ng for each module lO be Installed In the system. and ot her ... 24 VDC supply. Use of the Isolated +24 Volt power supply outpu t is optlolla i:
Installed modules. Before Installing modules In a baseplate , verify that the total current however, this output can be used to drive a limited number or Input devices The
rati ng of all of those modules does not exceed the power raUng of the power supply. maximum total power output rating or the Power Supplies is 30 waUs: however. the
individual ... 5VDC outputs can be rated for either 15 or 30 Watts, depending on the
Power Supply calalog number. See Table 12 ', ~Power Supply Feature Comparison
Table 122. Maximum Number of Modules Per System
Table, ~ for details.
CPU CPU CPU
Module1}'pe ModcDII /3131323 ModeD311340134J Model 350 - 364
Load Requirements for Hardware Components
tnp ut lind Output, Discrelt 5 (5slot bueillatt) G1IIJ40/3 ~I ) 19

Input ModulI'. Anlllog , 'Chftnnel

10 (IO,s]olbMeplar.)
5 (5-slotlJK~Il]atr)
8 (IOslot hRsepllueJ " .. TIle following table shows the DC load required by each module and hard\'yare component .
ALI ratings are In milliamps (except where noted) . Input and OutPUI module current
rati n gs al"!: with all Inputs or outputs on. Three voltages arc listed In the table:
Input Modult. Analog. 16Channrl
8 (ModrllJ I)

Output MlJd ult (VultIl8t), Anllo8. ZChllnntl 5 (5slot bawplltr)

6 (IO-tIOl biIo~fplllteJ
IZ(Modt1140/ J41j
16 (Model 3JIJ
30(Mode1340/ 34 I)
.."

... 5 VDC provides primary power to operate most Internal circuits
... 24 VDC Relay fbwer provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay
modules
Output Mudult IC unrnl) . Analog. ZChllnnrl 115.\lot ba.'tpillt)
] (10 slo. bllsrpllltt)
IS(ModtI331)
15(Model]4D/ HI ) " ... 24 VDe Isolated provides power to operale a number or Inpu t circuits (I nput
Output MUtlule. Anlllog. 8Chllnntl 8 (Modtl ]]11
32('10.<10(11,1340/ 341)
19 modules only). and any external circuits connected to the 24 VOC Output termi nals
on lhe power supply termina l strip.
COll1btmu,un h'IlU1/0uIPUI ~ lodule. Anllog 5i5sI0.hil~ \lllltI':1 Zt:ModrB31 / .0/ 341 )
Clinl2Ch QUI 10 (IO.,lolhueplllt") " Note that the ngures Itsted in the foll owing table are maximum (worsl case)
ProgrRn,rnabltCOrrOCf!L'lorModulr n/ .
requ irements, nol typical requlremenls .
Alph.,.,,'m~rl r OI\plily CflflrlXtuorModul'
Cvmnrunlclltluns Control ModulI'
nJ.
nJ,
9 ,
Sll1t Lo8te f'l'ocusorModule nJ. Rdtr lt11htSIlIt LOfIk: UJff s Gufdt. GFK0126
Cf"lu~ Cormnu nl elllons ModulE (I ) I I I
Esrhan~1 GenIus Commun lr./ll lon~ M(Xlum (I) 2 2 2
Il lgh S~I Counttr 4 i5AG-)!(lt bH:iI:plAtt) 8 (MOOtl ]]1) 79

J/ OLlnk Imtrfllce Modult

I/ QPrucr!L'lorMocIult
S(S/ IO.slotbaHpllltr)
2 (55101 bIlHpla.e) 8(ModtI331 )
..
32(Mudl':l340/ 341 )

..
79

Genius Bu~ Controlltl (2 )

4 (IOslot bauplllle)

16(Moorl]40/ ]4t)

,
E.htrnrt Im tr rl ceModule Rrfulo lilt Suits 90-30 TCPflP ElIltrrlfl CAmmunlaliaru U~ 'sM'/)u'l,
GFK 1084 fordm/lJ
Mo'ion ~Iftte APM300 Module Rf'fer l tllht ,.,rOllon M,lt APMJOO UItr 's "" ,nu.dl, CFK 0840 or CFI<-018 1
fordtlllls
Motlo nMllf OSM302 Modult R~ftrl0 1M Mol/on Mil" DSM302 User'JM.flu,'. CFI< 1464 , forM/.lIs
MOllon /l.hue OSM3 14 Modult Rrff'r 10 IfIt MOI/Ofl M"" DSM31 4 UJf" 's M,nu,l. (;FI< I742. fordmlls
TemprtllturtControl Module Rtftr 101M 'nmptrllolf' ConlrTH Uw 's M,nu./, CFI<1466 fordrullf
Power TrllnsducrrModul1! Rtftr /0 lilt "'141" 7I".nJd!lcrr Module Vstr ', AI.mlll. GFK-1134 , fordwl/s
(I) TIle Enhanced Genius Corrunu nlca tlOns Module and tlte Genius Communla'ltlons Module cannot be
tnstalled In the same PLC ba5eplate, however. batk modules can be presenl on the same bU5-
(2) Rerer to CFK I034 , Series 9O30Ctm/u5Bu$ ComrollerUser 's Manull/fordetalls.

CFK0356P Clmpter 12 System Deslgt! 12 /1 12 12 Strlt.'s 9030 PLC InslsJJalJon and Hardwarr Manual-October J999 CFK0356P
 @] @)
Table 123. Load Requirements (in milliamps) ~.II'OB .~. ~""
Number Descrtptlon +5 VDC Relay Power I~~(~t~
.~It".08 _"v u e I C69~E1~O 49'
R:~~~~er
State LogIc CPU Modulr
Num ber Description -5 VDC Isolated IC69305M302131" Motion Milt D5M30l or D~M3 14 Module 1.3A
A0691SlPJOO ~.l/'
Logic Procu.sor Madult m
ICIi9JN.:C1OO Input ~lmul.lor.81 I 6 Polnu 12'
C693MAR590
IC693MDllJO
120 VN:.lnput . fl'lay Output, 81n / l OUt
120 VN:.lsol.ltd. 8 f'Ulntlnput
"60 "
IC691fCC]01
690tCC900
IC690t<..C901
llicpantlon BUI Termination I'lug
RS~ 22 / RS (8SIClIlS . 2J2Con"frtef

RS 4l2ISNP) to RSZJ2, MlnlcnnvtnN KII\VI'nlonA)

I~trslon D, Of '''rt)
12
17'
'"
'00
IC693MDLl31
IC693MDI.Z 40
1C69JMDLZ41
240 VAt:. Isoilltd. 8 fblm Input
120 VAt:. . 16 Polnl Input
24 VAC / OCPM / Nrglogl, . 1&1'oInt
..
60

!O 115
C693AOU II Alph~ nu"" rk Ollpl' yCoprOtU.lor ModulI' '00
IC693MOL310
IU93MDL.33O
120 VIII:. . 0 SA 12 Point Outpul
12O/24!WAC. IA. 8 Point OUlpul
."
10'
/(.693AL(;220
[C693I\lC22 .
Anlloglnpul, Vo1118', ' Chlnntl
Analo,lnpul , CU(f'nl, , Ch'nntl "
2S "
.00 IC693MDU40
1(;693MOU90
120 V/IC"O SA. 16 ~Inl QUIPUl
120 / WWAC lsoilled. ZA. S Point DUlpUI
JI5

tC69)ALC2l2 Anllogl"l"'l. \'oIUl8~. 1 Ugh Oen)u), (16 ekronnl'll

"'.10 " "'
""
..'"
1(.693MOL63O H voe I'millv, l.oa' c 8 Polntlnput
IC6!lJALC221 A"11081"l'Iul , CuUtll'. tUgh Den!!lY (16 CM"nell
IC693MOL632 125 voe 1~, / NtgL081C.8rot" t Input
IC6931\("(.;39O AnalogOut!"ul, VOII~8t , h.;tUlnMI J1
ICUJALG39 1 AI\.108 Output , CUrfl'n! 2 Ch.lnntl 30 "'
115 IC693MOL633
I(69)MOL6J4
24 VDC NrB.llv~ Lotlt. 8 Polnllnput
24 VDC Pen / Nrg Loglc.8Polnl Input ..
5
'15
IC69JAlG192 AnII08Curl~nl / 't!It.~ Outpul, 8 Channel
"'
IC893MOL640 24 VDC Positive !.oak. 16 Potmlnllul 5 12'
IC691ALlA42 Arlllk:l8 UfTrnl / Vlllase Comblnallon 4 Ch Inl2 Ch 0,11
" IC69)MOL641 24 VDC Neg.ulve Log\('. II Polilt nput 5 '10
IC893ArU300
IC691AI'UJOI
H1ah Spcrd Countt'f
MotlOII M.rt APM300. I Ads '"
BOO IC691MOL643
IC693MOL64 4
24 VOC Poslllvt LogIc. FASt 16 J'olntl"llur
24 vee ilh'glllvf Logic. fASt 16 Point Input
5 110
5 12'
IC693APU302
lC693APUJ05
MoUan Mllr A 'M300, AxIJ
1/ 0PrnuuorModulc ""
J60
IC693MOL6(5
1C693MOL646
24 voe Pm / Nf81.oglt. 181'olnlinpul
24 VDC fIos / NfBLosIC.FAST 16 Point Inpul .." 115
125
1(;693U/o.1320 I/ OLlnk lottrfarr Modulr [sla\'rj 105
IC693MOLUZ Z4 VOC l'oi / NtgLogle32J'nlnllnput 5
J 10 link loll" r. MUl to' Modulf lw 10 opr It.l.d.per ll

...'"
IC691BEM321
I...... h Opuc.1 Ad'~f'r) OIl IC69JMOL6SJ 24 VI)(. ~ / N"gLogk.FA5t 12 Polnl Inpul 5
IC69JUt.M330 fIr H,mol~I / O 5uno" IC69J,.. tDL&~4 5/ 12vo(.; (ITL) PosINf8 Logic. 32 Point 19S144(J
IC69JUEM311
IC69JU~M340
Grnlu, 8\11 Conilolic.
flP 8m CorllrolJ.e1 (mulmum)
lO'
IZA
1(';693MOL&55
le693MOL130
l( VDC Pos / Nts .12Polnl [nplli
12I2~Voc.:Po~ltlv. Logk. 2A. 8 PoInt Outpul
195
55
."
(typh:all 800 1(.:693MOL73I 1 2I2~ VO(.;Ncg.llvt LogiC. lA. 8 Potnl OUIPUI 55
IC693C115391 10 \101 Modula,CPU 8'.M'pl.te
'" 1<..693MOL132 12I 24VOCP\:nlrlv. Logk. O 5.... 8 Inl Ch'lpln 50
1(;693CI15]92
IC69J(.H~191

IC693CI15397
10,lnl xp.",lon UIl'fpl8tr
10 ,Ioe Remote B~pl'lf'
5,101 Modul.,CPU Burplalt
15'

."'"
IC69JMOL73)
IC69lMOLl34
[C693MOL14O
12124 VUCNcg. ll vtLo8Ic .0.5A.BPOlrll QUlpul
125
IUHV
vee ~ / NegLoslc. 6~In. OUlpUI
JllIvtLoglc.O.5A. 16f'oll1l OutpUI
..
50

'10
IC&9JCI IS398
IC69lCHSJi9
1C69J(;MMJOI
5,loe Exp.nslon 8utl.lml,
5 'lot Mtmole 1S'''p .It
c;..nlul Comnlun lcal lonl M octult
...
17'
.00
IC693"[OL741
IC69JMOL1H
1212 4 VD<.N"Sltl\-tLoglc. O.SA IIiPoInl Oulpul
121Z4VOCf'os logic ESCp. IA 161'nlnl OulpUI
110
.30
IC69JMOL1S0 12/ 24 VDCNrSRllvt logic. 32 ~Irlt OUIIIIiI 11
1C69)CMM302 Enh.,lCf'C! Cenlu\ Communications Modulc lOO
IC693MOL151 12I24VDCf'osJllvtLogk 32 Point OUIllul
1t:69lCMMJII Communlt.tlnrll Con trol Modul' ' 00 IC69JMDL1Sl 5/24 VDC rTTLj Nfgluvf Loglc. O SA. 32 Point
.""
IC69lCMMJlI
IC693CPUJ I I
C&91CrUlI3
Elhf,r\otllnl"r.tpMndulp
: ;)tritJ 9030 5SIot Embeddtd CPU flmp "
s.r1u 9030 S Slot Embfddtd CPU 6upplale
150
."
43'
C69)M LIS3
lC693MDL9JO
12/2~VOCJ'n\lItVt
Rei.)! N.O . ~ A
LosIc. O SA. J2 Poln l OUtput
1",lltcd. 8 Point Ou l put
.'"
0 10

IC693CPUm
IC693CPUJ31
SP,In 90 30 10 Sial
CPU (Modtl ]31)
Em~dded epu B''''plalto 43'
J50
IC693MOL93 1
1(.;693MOL940
ReI.)' N.C . IId fOlm C. 8A 1)OI.ttd. BPolnt Oul
tl.~ NO. 2J\ 16 Polnl Ch.ltput ,
0
"'
115

IC693CPU140 CPU [Mod ..1 340) 49'

lC1I93MOR390
lC693PCMJOO
2' voe Inpul. R.. layOulpUI, ! In / iOut
Prog'lmmable CoprocfiSOr Module . 6SK " "
'C693CPU3~ I C PU(MO<1elHI) ' 90 IC693 I'CMJOI Progrlfllrnable Coproctssor Module. 85K '"
1C69JCPUnO CPU (Modtl 350) 670 ;
1C69JI'CMJII Progrlmrnabl,. CoprOCtuor Module . JIDK '"
' 00
IC693CPU1S I CPU IModrl 3$1) 19" ~lInd .Hdd Progrllmn""
lC69JCPU1Sl
lC893CPUJ60
CPU IModr11)2)
CPU lModrll60J
910 t
870 l
IC693PRC300
IC69Jf'TMIOO' t'o~tr TI.ruductr Modult "'
' 00

1C693CPU361 CPU (Modrl 3&3) .90 I

IC693TCM302 Ttmjlffl lUreConlro\ Module
R4~r /0 m odul~ s~clflcations
15'
(n Gf'K081)8. Srrirs 9030 I/O Modulr S/JI'c/jicot/olls Manila/ for mOfl'dl'tuils
1C69lCPU364 CPU (ModrI36') lSI A f No" t!wl Ihr mo<ltI 3JO-J6-f CPUs du lI()t SUPl10rttltr A l'f!fSlon (lC690ACC90IA) oflh, MIII/r:onl'UItr'
1C69JCSEll3 S~.tf' !.oglc CPU. 5s10l. b.upll~r ' 30 NutI' 'hal/his Is pf'f!fjmr'ltof)' fn/orTIlmlo" Tile IC693DSMJ J4 and IC693PTM /00 ....1II "0/ bl' fll'ollable UIJlII Jolt 1099.
IC69J Em S~lIt Logk CPU. 10 siD( ba,eplltt 43"

GFK0356P Chapter 12 System DeslBtI 1213 12 14 Stries 9030 PLC IIISfallatlon alld Hardwaf! Manual-October J999 GFK0356P
 - ...

~ @)
Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples Scan (Sweep) Time Calculation
Following are examples of calculations for determining the lotal load placed on a Series
9030 PLC power supply by the Series 9030 PLC hardware. AU current ngures are Scan or Sweep time Is the lime It takes the PLC CPU to perform all of Irs tasks one lime
expressed In milliamps. Note that although each outpulls rated at 15 or 20 wailS (with the Sca n time contribution Is the amount of time added to the PLC scan by the software and
excepUon that the +5 VDC output (or the High Capacity power supply Is rated at 30 watts) , hardware components of the system. For systems that may be tlmesensltlve, this factor
the total combined ou tput can be no more 11\3n 30 watts. The power requIred by external should be made part of the design speclOcalloll. To he lp avoid timi ng Issues. the
circuits connected to the 24 VDC OlJfPLrr termInals on the power supply terminal strip thcoretlcalsciln time should be calcu lated so that appropriate solutions can be designed
should be added to the calculation Into the system upfront.

Exa mp le 1: Series 9030. Model 323 Embedded CPU (IOslot baseplate)

Major Design Factors Affecting Scan Time
Com ponent .5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay
Size of ladder program
IC693CPU323 Embedded CPU 430
Baseplate 'TYpe of CPU. Some CPUs have faster clock speeds and archllecture than others.
IC693PRG300 HandHeld Pro 170
Types of Instructions used In ladder program
grammer
IC693ALC390 Ana log Ou tpu t 32 120 Number of modules
IC693AlC220 Analog Input 27 98 lYpes of modules. Some modules. such as several of the Option mod ules. have a
IC693APU300 HS Cou nter 190 much greater Impact than others such as discrete 1/ 0 modules.
24 VDC Inpu t (16 points) 5 120 Locallon of modules. This refers to the type of rack (CPU . Expansion, or Remote)
IC693MDL3 40 Input Module 5 120 that they are Installed In.
IC693MDL740 Uutpu t Module 110
Connections to other devices such as an HMI . or to other systems via
IC693MDL2 40 Input Module 90 com munications modules or ports.
IC693MD L310 Uutpu t Modu le 210
IC693MDl940 Relay Out . Mod. 7 135 Cable types. Cable lype can have a slgnlncanllmpact on scan time. especially w hen
connectlng Remote rac ks or commu nicati ng over 10llg distances Propagation time of
IC693MD L930 1!.lay Dut Mod . 6 70
data shou ld be minimized to ensure proper system liming and margins. Suggested
Totals (m illiamps) 128 1 458 205 cable types for lI D Bus Expansion and commu nication cables are documented In the
(Watts) 64 1 10.99 4.92 "Cables chapter Any dev iation In cab le types fro m those recommended may
l b tal W... tts 22.32 ~ -- result in erratic or Improper syste m o perati on.
Exallll)le 2: Series 9030. Mode l 351 Modular CPU (IOslot baseplate)
Where to Find Scan Time Information
Com ponent .5V +2 4V bolated +24V Relay
IC693CHS391 Mod ularCPU 250 For Information on calcu lating scan time. please re fer to the ~Sweep Tlme Calculatlon
Baseplate section ofCFK0467. StrJts 9O30/201Mfcro PtC CPU /mlrucfion Str RtftrenceManual.
IC693CPU351 CPU Modu l. 890
IC690ACC90 1 Ml nlconverter Kit 100 Calculating PLC Heat Dissipation
I IC6931'CM30 1 PCM Mod ule 425
IC693ALCJ90 Analog Out put 32 120 The amou nt of heat dissipated by a PLC mounted In an enclosure can be an Im portant
IC693ALC220 Analog Input 27 98 factor In determining the enclosure size needed for the system. This Is because the
enclosure must be allie to adequately dissipate the heat genera ted by all of the
IC693APUJOO HS Cou nter t90
componen ts mounted Inside so that no components overheat PLC heal dissipation Is
IC693MD L340 In put Module 5 t 20 also a factor In determining the need fo r enc losure cooli ng options such as fa ns a nd air
IC693MDL740 Output Module t lO conditioning. Enclosure ma nurac ture rs genera lly consider enclosure heat dissipation as
IC693MDL240 In put Module 90 a raClor In their enclOSllrc selection g uidelines. Instructions ror ca lculati ng Series 9030
IC693MDL310 u utput Module 210 PLC heat dl~lpatlon can be found in Appendix H. Serles 9030 Heat Dissipation.
IC693MDL940 Relay Out. Mod. 7 135
Totals (milliamps) 2336 338 135
(Watts) 11.68 8.11 3.24
1btai Watt s. 23.03

CFK0356P C/lsprtr 12 System Design 12 15 12 16 Sules 9030 pte Jnsra l/arlon alld Hardware Manual-October 1999 CFK0356P
 --..,

@] @]
System Layout Guidelines Location of Modules in the PLC Racks
Because of the differences (rol1l one system to another. Ills not pracUcallo try to discuss There are several (aclOrs to consider when when laying out your PLe racks.
every possible layout. Instead, this section o ffers guideli nes and an example to help you
location resttlctlons - Although most modules can be located In any type of
layout your system .
baseplate. a few or tile Optlon modules (peM . ADC. CMM . SLP) will only work In a
CI>U baseplate. The next ngure ldentJnes where you ca n locale the modules In your
Benefits of a Good Layout - Safe, Reliable, and Accessible system .

The layout of your system has a lot (0 do with how reliably your system will operate. Power Supply capacity - Since some modules draw considerably more power than
how easy It will be 10 Install, how well II will look, and how easy and safe It will be to others. Ills possible 10 overload the power supply by placing many of the modules
requiri ng higher power In one rack . There fore. before nnallz.lng your rack layout
maIntain:
you should calculate the power supply loading to ensure that you will nOI overload
SafelY and Maintenance - A good layout helps mlnhlll7.e the chance of e lectdca l the power supply. See the section Calculatlng Power Supply Loading.
shock to personnel working on the system, It lets maintenance techniCians easily
Noise Reduction - Croup I/ O modules to keep Output modules separated from
access the unit to make measurements. load sort ware, check Indicator lights, remove
sensitive lnput modules. This will facilitate keeping noisy wiring separated frOI1l
and replace modules. elc. It also makes It casler 10 trace wIring and locate
sensllive wiring, as recommended In a previous Se(llon
components while troubleshootIng.
Rellablllly -Proper layout promotes good heat dissipation and helps eliminate
electrical noise from the system. Excess heat and noise are two major causes of
electronic component failure .
i nsla ll alloll Ernclency- A well designed layout allows sumclent room to mount
And wIre the unit. This saves time and frustratIon .
Appearance - A neat and orderly layout gives others a favorable Impression of your
system . It lets others know that careful thought went Into the design of the system.

PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement

The following list provides PLe rack mounting location guidelines. For an example
I"yout. see the ngure MSerles 9030 Example Layout ~ laler In this chapter.
Locate PLC racks away from ot her components that generate a lot of heat. such as
transrormcrs. power supplies, or power resistors.
Locate PLC racks away from components that generate electrical noise such as
relays and cOlllactors.
Locate PLC racks away from high voltages components and wiring such as circuit
breakers and fUS ible disconnects. transformers. motor wiring. etc. This not only
reduces electrica l noise. but makes It safer for personnel working on the PLe.
Locate PLC racks at a convenlenl level that allows technicians reasonable access for
maintaining the system.
Route sensitive Input wires away from electrically noisy wires such as discrete
output and AC wiring. This can be facilitated by grouping 110 modules to keep
Output modules separated from sensitive Input modules.
The PLC racks each require a 4 clea rance space on all four sides (6 Inches on the
right end Ifuslng I/O Bus Expansion Cables) (oensure adequate ventilation/cooling.
See Ihe ~Baseplates' cha pter for baseplate size and clearance requirement
Information .

GFK03S6P Cllapter IZ System DtsJg" 1217 12 18 Ser/el 9030 PLC InsrallaCforl arid Hardwaf? Mat/ual-October 1999 GFK03S6P
 ~

@] @l
Allowable Module Locations

MOOfLlll/lU
IS-SLOT I
OISCRETE ''''UY /OUTJl'\JT
"""'ALOO INPI,IT/OUTPI,IT
IiIGit sPUD COUNTER

GEHIUS alB CO>ifIl:OlUII:

ETHtllNETINTEI'I',,"CE
f!""'f.llATUflECONTII.Ol
'"
- .-
Series 90-30 PLC Layout Example

CD

M11.I11.nn]
OISCI'II1." IPPUTIOUn>UT
AHALOO INPUTiOUTPU'
HIOH sPEED COlJOjT~
IIO PIltOCSSOR
MOOEll " OE .. IV5 COMt.lUNICAflO"lS
I,O-llOTI ENI*""..cEO GENIUS w.w
MOTION MArIE A.Pt.II.)OOI()S "' lG~
110 LISIIINTERF"CE
@
GENIUS !IUS CO"flROll EA
ETHERNET 100lE"ACE

w
T[MPfJ'AflIRE CO .. tAOl

MODE L ll'~OI~1
, nd '501)$11"21)001
,asl ltool 5-5 101 CPU
t] IIIIIIIII~ CD

M!II II jill jI
OISCIUTlINP\lTIOUTPUT
"'''''lOG I~UT/OUTl'\l T
@
1'110/1 SPEED CaUNTlR
"OOEL13Ifl.&O~1 IIOPI'IOCESSOII
. ndUOIUlflUIJIOI OE"IUS CQMUIlN!CAflQr.,
f.">l"'~ lO DINIUS coo.w
lUI"'" 100SIoI CPU M~ON "'A1 APMJOOro5M lO2
110 U.-I( ' ''TlA'",C[
GENIUS IUS COH'AOClllt
ETUEAAlT Itflll'l'ACE
TEMPlItATUAICONTAOl
PCM I " OC I CMM I SLP
OISCAETllNPlIT/OUTPU T
At.ALOO '''''V'liOU TPUT
OJ
D
MOOf L 33 I1340/l<"
' lid 3 ~)511l5Vl'Oi
HIGH !!PUD COUNTf.JII

~~'0~l~3~N'CAnO'IS
ENIWK:ED OE'IIIJS COMM
l Ull60I 5-1101 flpe ... lon :'[I~I~~~:"~JOOIO~
GENIUS BUS CONTROlLEII
][ ,--, ~'l@fijlmpma:lGm!:!!mu!:mt#CI!I3:!M!Brtoou

1 _________
ETHlIIHET INTERlACE
TEMI'l""'TUIIE CONTROl

MOOELl ll/looi O/lA l

a ndlSonSlIlU/lfOI
lUna. 10.SIoI E.~n .la n G'NllJS PUS CONTROllER
ETHERHETINTVtFACE
TWptft,<,TUAECON'TAOl

r O'Ioca!lonO!'!P_ I"~1H

Figure 12-2. Allowable l.oc.1tion of Modules

MlfrlTJ llTI
-.I.. lOtroeoopp.caobIIFIPrro:Iu.....,, ...."u.
I

3

Figure 12-3. Series 90-30 Example Layout
Series 9030 PLC, IO-slot rack
2. Wlreway (Wire Duct)
Field device con nection terminal block
o

4. Motor CO llnection lerminal block

5. Motor starters
6. Ci rcuit board
7. Power supply
8. COlllrol transformer
9. Fusible d isconnec t or circuit breaker
10. Control relays

GFK-0356P Chllpter J2 System 06/8" 12- 19 12-20 Series 90-30 PLC JnstaJlatlon and Hardware M anual -October 1999 GFK-0356P
 ~,

@]
PlC Mounting Position
Power supply load rating depends on the mounllng position of the baseplate and the
ambient temperature.
Chapter I Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Recommended Upright Mounting Orientation
13
The load rating w it h the baseplate mou nled upright on a panclls'
100% at 60'C (140' FI
Troubleshooting Features of Series 9()'30 Hardware

Indicalor Lighls (LEOs) and Terminal Board

The following ngure shows how the Indicator LEOs correspond to the circuit connection
points on an 110 Module 's terminal board. The termi nal board termi nals are numbered
from the top. wit h the top termlna l ln tht' len row beIng number I and the top term In Al
In the rIght row being number 2 The numbers alternate between rows with even
numbers on the right and odd !lllmbers on the left. as shown in the circuli diagram on
the back or the hinged cover.
LEO M COtTUPO"'lk 10 drWCI Ae
Figure 124. Recommended PLC MotOlting Onenution

FliIllndielltor LED
Derated Horizontal Mounting Orientation
Power supply load ratings wit h the baseplate moullIed horizontally are;
temperature a125 C (77F) - full load
temperature at 60C (140 F) 50% o f full load

ClrQlkMCllM4lCt.
10 19f1flln11II

Figure 125. Derated PLC Mounting Orientation

"'lOfI2t!1

Figur. 131. Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections

CFK0356P C/rapfer 12 Sysltm Des/gil 12-21 CFK0356P 13 1


@]
Module LED Indicators
Inpol Module LED Indicalors
When a discrete Inpu t device closes, the correspond ing Inpu t LED s hou ld light to
Ind icate that the signal reached the module . If the light does not turn ON. 8 voltage
check ca n be made on the module's termi nal board or block.
If the correct voltage Is present at the terminal, the corresponding In put bit can
be checked In the PLe wllh your programming softwa re. If the sortware s hows
that the Input bit Is at logic I. the module's LED circuit Is defective.
If the corree! vall age level Is not present at the terminal. a check can be made al
the Input neld device 10 determl"e If the device or Interconnect ing wiring Is
defectlve,
If none of an Input module's Inputs are working. It may be that the external (neld) Inpu t
power su pply Is defective. Is fl O( powered up. or Is not connected properly. (As Indicated
In the connections diagram In the previous ngure. Input and output devices are powered
from an external power su pply. not from Inside the module) . Input modules a re not
fu sed. so t he Fuse Indicator LED In the previous plcUl re does not app ly to them .
DUlpUI Module LED Indicalors
When a discrete ou tput address (%Q) Is turned o n In the laddcr program. the
corresponding ou tput LED should light to Indicate that the signal reached Ihe module
Ir the light does not turn ON, the module may be defective or the LED light Illay
be bad.
If lhe light lurns on but the outpu t device doesn' t operate . a voltage check ca n
be made on the module's terminal board or block, If the correct voltage level Is
present there. a check could be mad e of the output device or wiring.
If nOlle of an output module's outputs are working. II may be thai the eXlernal (neld)
output power supply is defective. Is not powered up. or Is not connected properly. (As
Indicated In the connection diagram In the previous n gure. Inpu t and output devices are
powered from an external power supply, no t rrom Inside the module) . If the output
modu le Is a type that has buUt-ln fuses (some have electronic short circu li protection
Instead). the Fuse Indicator LED (labeled -F -). shown In the previous picture. will light If
a fuse blows.
Power Supply LED Indicalars
The power su pplies have four LED Indicators. Their functions are explained In the
"Power Supplies chapter.
CPU LED Indicalors
T here are several dlrrerent LED arrangements o n the various CPUs. These are explai ned
In the -C PUs chapter.
Oplion Module LED Indicators
There are numerous LED arrangements on the various op tion mod ules. The -Option
Modules " chapter has some Information on this subject. It a lso directs you, for each
module. to further Inform ation In the "Docu mentation " headi ng for each module. Also.
Appendix I contains a cata log number to documenta tion cross reference.
JJ2 Series 9030 pl.e Illstal/ar/oll and Hardware Manual- October 1999 GFK-OJ56P
.--
@]
Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software
Detailed Information about the following Items are found in GFK-0467 . ~rles
9030120/Mlcro PLC CPU InstructlOIl Set Reference Manual. and CFK0466. Strles
9030/20n..,lIcro Programming Softwa re User 's Manual.
ladder Screens
Contacts. connections. and colis displayed on the ladder screens that are ON (passing
power or encrgizcd) are displayed In enhance brightness. allowi ng the tracing of signals
through the prugra m. Addresses that refer to physical Input (%1Clnd !)bA I) alld output
signals (%Q a nd %AQ) ca n be checked against module status lights. voltages. etc . 10
verify thalthc hardware Is worki ng propcrly.
Configuralion Screens
Normally. the followi ng Information Is obtained from the system documentation.
However. If Ihey arc lIot avatlablc. the confi guration screens ca n be used 10 determine:
If the software connguratlon matches the actual hardware . Sometimes, while
troubleshooting. a module Is Installed In an Incorrect slot by mistake. This wil l create
a fault In one of the tWO fault tallies. The correct connguratlon can be determi ned
from the Conngurarton Scree ns.
The memory addresses that a particular module Is using.
Faull rabie s
T here are two fault tables, the - PLC Faull Table: and the -110 Fau lt Table. The fault
M
tabl es can be viewed using the PLC programming so ftware. These fault tables wi ll not
report such things as a de fective limit sw itch. but wllI ldenlify system faul ts such as'
Loss of or MiSSi ng Modules. System Connguratlon Mismatch
CPU hardware failure . Low Battery
PLe Software Failure. Program Checksum Failure. No User Program, PLC Store
Failures.
Syslem Slalus References
T hese d iscrete references (%$. %SA. %S8. and %SC) can be viewed In the System
Reference (Slatus) Table. or onscreen If used In the ladder program . for determining the
status or various conditions and faults. For example, the %SCOOO9 bllturns on If a fault
Is logged In ei ther fauillable. Another example Is that bit %SAOO I t will turn on If the
CPU memory backu p battery Is low. The Series 9030 PLC CPU Instruction Set Re(mnct
ManuaL GFK-0461.l ncludes a -System Statu s Reference Table. M
Reference rabie s
There a re tWO types o f re ference tables. standard and mixed. 111CSC tables show groups
of memory addresses and their status. For discrete addresses. the status of these will be
shown as either logic I o r logic O. For ana log and register ad dresses. values w ill be
displayed. Standard tables display only one type o f memory address. s uch as all of the
%1bl lS. Mi xed refere nce tables are crea ted by the user. w ho selects w hat addresses to
display In the tables. T hese mixed tables ca n conta in discrete. analog. and reglstrr
GFK-OJ56P Chapttr J3 Maintenance and Troubleshootlns JJ-J
 -

@] @]
references all 10 one table. This makes them useful for gathering numerous related Module Fuse List
addresses a ll o ne screen w here Ihey can a ll be viewed or mon itored 81lhe same time.
This saves time compared wit h searching or scrollIng through the ladder logle screens to
Ond these addresses. I Warning I
Override feature
This feature must be used wllh ca ution 10 ensure th e safe lY of personnel and Rep lace fuse on ly with the correct s Ize and Iype. Using an Incorrect
equipment. Normally. the machine sho uld not be cycli ng. and all condillons shou ld be fuse can result In harm to p ersonnel. d amage to eq uipment , o r both.
s uch that the output de vice can be turned on without any harm being d Olle. This
method can be used to check an output circuit from lhe ladder screen al\ the way to the
device being controlled. For exa mpl e. when overrid ing and toggling a %Q ou tput to an Table 131. Fuse List for Series 9().30 Modules
ON state, the relay. solenoid. or other device beIng contro lled should turn on or pick up.
Ir 1\ does not. the status Ught o n the output module could be checked. then voltage Module Currenl QuanUty CEF.nucFu~ Third Pany Sou/Cel
chks coul d be made al the module term Inal board. the system termInal strip, the Catll og Modulll1)'pe Rating onModul e Pin Number and I'an Numben
machinery terminal strip. the solenoId or relay con nections. etc. until the source or the Number
rault Is rou nd. IC693C rUJ64 CPU Module wllh IA 1 HA72S2 U -OOI Uuldu5t' R~54 001
I'rnbcd<led Elhern~t
Sequential Event Recorder (SERI, 0010 functional instruction Interrace

These can be set up to capture the stailis o r speclned discrete addresses upon receiving a IC693[)\1M300 Dlgltll Valve Driver IA 1 Nt A BUJ~m!ln GoB IA

trigger signal. They may be used to monitor and capture data about certain portions or
2A
NtA LlCtlt-ru~ 219002

IC693MDL3 10 120VAC,O SA 3. 2 HA724627 1110 ) B\I~~mBn . GMC3

the program. even w hen unattcnded. They ca ll be userul ror locating the cause or an
UttllfuSt- 239OO3
Intermittent problem . For example. a contact In a string or contacts that maintain power
to a ca ll may. rrom time to tI me, momentarily open and interrupt normal operation . lC693MDLJ30 120/241WAC. 1A SA 2 HA724627 114(1) Bus,mlll ' CDCS
Bussml\/lS5065
However. when maintenance personnel attempt to locate the problem. all or these
IC693MDU40 120VN:..0 SA 3A 2 HA724627 III/I) 8u~~mllll' GMCJ
contacts may test OK. By using the SER or 0010 Instruction, the status o r all or these
lUtldusl" 239003
co macts ca n be ca ptured with in m ill Iseconds or the time the fault occurs. and Ihe contact
thaI opened will show a status or logic 0 at the moment or capture lC693~ IDL3!Kl 120124(),1AC.2A 3A , HA7246Z7111(1) Buumlln GMC3
Lluleruse 239003
IC693MDL730 12124VOCPusltlvl' 5A 2 2S9A9S78P16(1} 8U5smlll\ ' AGeS
Replacing Modules logIc. lA Uuleru,e JI200S
Modules do not contain co nnguratlon switches. The slot In each baseplate (rack) is IC69lMDL131 12l24VDCN'.glt1Vf 5A 2 259A9578P16(1) BUJ~mllll.ACC S
con fi gured (u si ng the conn guratloll softwa re) to hold a particular module type (catalog Lagle. lA LIUI~run312005

number) . This connguratlonlnrormatlon Is Slared In CPU memory. Thererore. when IC893PWRJ21 120124IWAC or 125 2. 1 ~4A 124621 109(2) Bu"m~n 21S.()(I2
replacing a module. you do not have to make any hardware settings on the module ,nd VDC ril pIA 30 Wlln IGDC2 or GMCZi
Itselr: You do. however. have to ensure that you Illstall the correct module type In a IC693PWRJJO PowerSupply LUtll'ruSl' 239002
partlcu larslol . IC69JPWRJ22 24/ 48VDClnput. SA 1 HA7Z46Z711~(2) Bussmlln MOLS
30 Wall Power Su pply Llulefusl" J 13005
Be aware that some "Intellige nt ~ modules, such as the CPU. peM, A PM, or DSM302,
IC69JPWR328 48 VDC Input 5A 1 HA124627 114(2) Bussman MOL S
may contain application programs that will need to be reloaded after the module Is 30Wal! Puwt!rSupply UuleNst 3lJOO5
replaced . For s uch modu lcs, mAke sure that up-lo-date copies or the application
IC69JPWR33 I 24 VDC Inpul, SA 1 44A724G21 114(2) 8ulSmAn MOL5
programs are maintained in case they have to be restored la ler. 30 Willi Power Supply UttltfuseJI3005
For 110 modules with terminal boards, you do not have to rewire a new termi nal board
In order to replace the module. If the old lermlnal board Is not derectlve. It can be
IC693TCM302 Temperlnure Cmnm! 2A 1 N tA Uttlefu5t' 273002
removed rrom the old module and reinstalled on the new module wit hout removing Modult!
any o rlhe w ir ing. Procedures ror removing a nd Insta1ilng modules and termi nal boards ---

are round In Chapter 2, ( I) Moumtd In clip Acce,.,\;,lble by ffmovlngclrcult baird from modulI! hou~lng
(2) Line fUJI! Mounted In clip IICCU1lbit by removing module trom

Series 9030 Product Repair

The Series 9030 products are, ror the most part, not consIdered to be neldrepalrable.
The one major excep tion are the rew modules that have replaceable fuses, The ne)(t
section. ~ Module Fuse LIst. ~ Identlnes these modules and their applicable ruses.
CE Fanuc offers a repair/ product warranty service thro ugh your local distributor,
Contact you distributor rordetal ls.

134 Series 9030 PLe /nstal/arion alld Han:Jwitrt Manual- Ocrobtr / 999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter /3 Maintenance and Troubleshoorlng 135
 -..

@) @]
Spare/R eplacement Parts Preventive Maintenance Suggestions
Two kits (I C693ACC3 19 and IC693ACC320) provide mechanical spare parts for Series
Seri es 9030 PLC Preventive Maintenance
9030 modules. One covers lID CPU, PCM. and other modules: the olher Is for power
supply modules. These kits provide parts such as module levers, froot covers, cases, etc, Item Description Recommendation
The followi ng table describes the contents of cach kit. No.
I Safety ground Check frequentl y to ensure that safety ground connections
and electrical 3re secu re and thaI electrical cables and conduits are secure
Tlble 132. Sp.reIRepiacement Paris system and In good condition.
2 CPU Memory Replace annually or as appropriate for your application:
Spare Pans Contents backup battery Check C ha pter S for Instruction s on how to avoid loss of
memory conterll5 w hen rep laci ng battery.
IC693ACC319: (q<y 10) I/ QCPU. PCM case lever
Spllrc parts kit fot 110. (qly. IO) Spring pins cap 3 Option Module Replace a nnually. Check u ser's manual for additional
CPU.8ndPCM modules (q<y. 2) peM module rront tover backup battery Instructions. Check Chapter 5 fo r Instructions on how to
(q<y. 2) peM Icnstap avoid loss of memory contents when replacing battery.
iq<y 2) CPU module case
4 Ventilation If using ventilation fan In enclosu re, check for proper
IC693ACC3l!O: (qlyl!) Powersupply lever operation. Keep Ongers and tools away from m oving
Spare parts kit ror power (q<y 2) Spring pin forpo..... er supply lever fans. Clean or rep lace ventilation air nller. If using one. al
supplies (qly l!) Spring for power supply lever [east monthly.
(q <y. 2) fuwersupply lens cap
(q <y. 21 Power su pply termlna Icover 5 Mcthanlcal With power OFF. check that connectors and Illodules arc
(qly 2) Memory backup banery (or CPU and peM tightness seated securely In their sockets and that wire COllneclions
IC693ACC30 I (see Note)
M~mory Backup Batlery moduh~s
are secure. For low vibration Installations. perform
annually. For hig h vibration Inslallallons. check at least
Fuses See ~ Fuse Lisl ForStrles9030 Modules" table In Ihls quarterly.
chaptet
6 Enclosure Check annually. With power OFF, remove manuals. prints.
Modules You may wish to lIlairHa ln span! PLC modules Many or Oil ier loose malerlallhal could cause s horts or
systems have more than one of a partlcularc8lalog ventilation blockage, or that are narnmable, from Inside of
numbel; such as powersupplles (each tack haSOnl~) and enclosure , Gently vacuum dust and dirt that has collected
110 modules. In lilesecases. one of eachlype would ser ... e
as backups forseveral modules. on components. Use vacuum cleaner, no\ compressed air.
for this task.
IC693ACC3 11 (qty 6) RemovabletermlnalboardsusedonmanyllO
RemovableModulf! modules and sorneOplion modulf!S 7 Program backup 00 this Initially after creating any application programs.
TermlnalBoard such as the ladder logic program. motion programs, elc.
Then. any lime a change Is made to a program. make at
44A7367S6-COI Kit contains 3sets (6 keys) . Same keynlSal lapl)llcable least onc (several Is bener) new backup copy. Keep old
CPU (CPU350 364) Key KII crus copies (clearly marked) for a reasonable period of time [n
case you need to go back 10 the old design.
Not,' TIll' IC69JACCJO I baLtrrles lillY' 1\ "Iu'lfllfe Drs yrlln (SI!l' Chapttr 6 for In51ructlulll on how ttl reid
blltlrry dllf codts) F'forlodlcally DUld.,M baufrl,.' 5hould bt! rf'move<! from sud: lind dl,p05ffi of Document each backup copy as to what equipment It Is for.
IIccordlns 10 th,. bauerymanufllcluru'sfKomlllendltlons date It was created or modlOed. version number (if anyl.
and author's name.

Keep master backup copies In a safe place. Make working

copies available 10 those responsible for maintaining the
eqUipment.
"See ~FaclorsArfecting Battery Ufe~ In Chapter S.

136 Sf!ritS 9030 PLC JnsralJalion and Hardware Manual - Octobu J999 CFK0356P CFK0356P Chapter J3 MaltJltnanct and Troubleshoot lOB 13-7
 --- ,---."

@)
Getting Additional Help and Information
There are several ways to get addilionai help and Information:

GEFanuc Web S~e

There Is a large amount of Information on the Technical SUPPor! seellan of the CE Fanue
Web site. SectIons such as Technical Documenlatlon, ApplicatIon NOles, Revision
HistorIes, Frequently Asked Questions. and Field Service Bulletins may have the exact
Information you need. You ca n access this sIte at

ht tp://ww\.gc(anuc.com / slipport /

Fax Link System

This system leIS you choose technical help documents to be sent to you on your Fax
machine . To use this system follow these sU'ps:
Call Fax Link at (804) 9785824 o n a touch tone type phone (rotary dial phones will
not work for thiS application)
Follow the Instructions to have a master list (called ~ Document 1 ~ ) o r Fax Link
documents Faxed to YOli . A master Fax Link list Is also available on the GE ranoc
Web site In Ihe Technical Support section (see the ~ GE Fanuc Web Slte ~ section
above) .
Sel ecl desired docull1ent(s) rrom the master list. then call Fax Ll llk and sp(.'Cl ry the
document number(s) you W3111 to be Faxed to YOli . Up to th ree documents can be
ordered per cal1.

GE Fanuc Telephone Numbers

1r you need to speak with a CE Fanue technical help person, use the applicable
telephone number rrom the rollowlng list.

locatloll Telephone Number

North America. Canada. Mexico (Technical Slipport Toll Free: 800 CE Fanuc
Hotline) Direct Dial: 804 9786036
latin America (ror Mexico . see above) Direct Dial: 804 9786036
France, Germany. Luxembourg, SWitzerland. and Toll Free: 00800 433 268 23
United Kingdom
It aly Toll Free: 1677 80 596
Other European Countries .352727 979 309
Asla / PacIOc Singa pore 65566 4918
India 9180 5520 107

/ 38 Strles 9030 PLC imr.Jl/afion and Hardwart Manual- Octobtr 1999 CFK0356P
 r...

Appendix Ethernet Transceivers

L

IC649AEA102 Ethernet10BASET Transceiver

Comp liant with the IEEE 802.3 Et hcnlet speci ncaUon for IOBASET
Connector o n tra nsceiver body Is standard RJ-45 type for connection to unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) Ethernet cable
This unit has an attached 40 " (I meIer) cab le with sta nd ard 14-pln AAUI connector
for connecting to a Series 9030 Ethernet modu le (lC693CMM321) or CPU with
Et hernet interface (IC693CPU36 4),
SQE option Is enabled .
Power and Link Integrity LED Indicator lights.

'H
(2Smm) r 3S ' (89mm J - + --- 40 Inches (1 meter)

-r~
:i:
18' -0

10

Connector

Figure L1. IC649AEA102 Elhemet 10BASETTransceiver

Power Requirement
This unit draws 60 mA tp 5Vdc fro m the Ethernet Interface v ia the AAUI con nector.

LEO Indicator Lights

T hese are located on the end o f the unll nex t to the RJ-45 connlor. The one labeled LI
slays on as long as Link IllIegrlty Is maintained . The o ne marked wl lh a -Jagged arrow "
sYll1bollndlcales the presence of 5Vdc power 10 the unit .

CFKOJ56P L/
(

(
 (

User Manual for the

HE693PBM1 011HE693PBM1 02

PROFIBUS MASTER
Third Edition
12 October 2000

MAN0219-03
 ( 12 OCT 200.,.,0'--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-'-
P-"'
Ac>:
G"'E'-"3

PR EFAC E

COPY"!Jill I C) ;' JOO, florner Af-'G LLC., G,\Il Norlh Sherll1,m Dllve, Il\(jl~l\"poils, IniJldn;, 46201 All 11'Jllts
rescrvl.'u Nu P;1I1 o' tllI~, publication rn,1Y be reproauGed, traJlsPlltied, tri1l1,Cnbeu, storcd 111 a rdne'Jal
SYSttHll, or IU11lsinted Into lJllY I;-)rlguag p or conlputer lallgu.Jqn. III nlly form by ilny means. nk:ctrollic.
IlleCI1<llllL.J1 flJ<1Uneilc. optlcill. chcmlcal. manu,,1 or otherwise. 1'111110111 till' prior ilgr881T1unt il'1d wrdten
[Jt'IIlI' sII,n of Horner APG, Ill(

All sofiwdrc described 10 [IllS doclJInclll or media IS nlso copyngl1tmf mnterldl SUbj8Li to the terms ,1I1d
conciltioJls of th,' HOllier Softw31Cl License Aljfcemcnt

Illformiltlonill Ihls dUCUlIlcnt is subjec l to cildnq'c without nullce ~lIld ducs nut rep[f,s'~lll i1 CcllT1l'1ltll1cnt on
till! pal1 of HC,III!r APG, Inc

Versal'ro ,mtl SvrH's ;)0<,0 I'LC me Irademarks of GE: f >1nuc

Winnow> N 1 is:] IrildRIT1,lIk of Microsoft Corpomllon

,\fSPel !lOOO and P8 ;lfe tri1c!l'rTlilrks of CEGE:LEC.

(
For user manual updates, contact Horner APG, Technical Support
Division, a t (317) 916-4274 or visit our web site at www.heapg .com.
 PAGE 4 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03

LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

Horner APG, Inc. ("HE-APG") warrants to the original purchaser that the Profibus Master manufactured
by HE-APG is free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The
obligation of HE-APG under this warranty shall be limited to the repair or exchange of any part or parts
which may prove defective under normal use and service within two (2) years from the date of
manufacture or eighteen (18) months from the date of installation by the original purchaser whichever
occurs first, such deFect to be disclosed to the satisfaction of HE-APG after examination by HE-APG of
the allegedly defective part or pa rts. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLI ED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR USE AND OF ALL OTHER OB LI GATIONS OR LIABILITIES AND HE-APG
NEITHER ASSUMES, NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR HE-APG , ANY
OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THIS Profibus Master. THIS WARRANTY
SHALL NOT APPLY TO TH IS Profibus Master OR ANY PART THEREOF WHICH HAS BEEN SUBJECT
TO ACCIDENT, NEGLIGENCE, ALTERATION, ABUSE, OR MISUSE. HE-APG MAKES NO
WARRANTY WHATSOEVER IN RESPECT TO ACCESSORIES OR PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY HE-
APG . THE TERM "ORIGINAL PURCHASER", AS USED IN THIS WARRANTY, SHALL BE DEEMED TO
MEAN THAT PERSON FOR WHOM THE Profibus Master IS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED. THIS
WARRANTY SHALL APPLY ONLY W ITH IN THE BOUNDARIES OF THE CONTINENTAL UNITED
STATES .

In no event, whether as a resu lt of breach of contract, warranty, tort (including negligence) or otherwise ,
shall HE-APG or its suppliers be liable of any special, consequential, incidental or penal damages
including, but not limited to, loss of profit or revenues , loss of use of the products or any associated
( equipment, damage to associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of substitute products, facilities,
services or replacement power, down time costs, or claims of original purchaser's customers for such
damages.

To obta in warranty service, return the product to your distributor with a description o f th e
problem, proof of purchase , post paid, insured and in a suitable packag e.

ABOUT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

Any example programs and program segments in this manual or provided on accompanying diskettes are
included solely for illustrative purposes. Due to the many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Horner APG cannot assume responsibility or liabili ty for actual use based on the
examples and diagrams. It is the sale responsibility of the system designer utilizing the Profibus Master
to appropriately design the end system, to appropriately integrate the Profibus Master and to make safety
provisions for the end equipment as is usual and customary in industrial applications as defined in any
codes or standards which apply.

Note: The programming examples shown in this manual are for illustrative
purposes only. Proper machine operation is the sole responsibility
of the system integrator.
 I MAN0219-0 3 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE ....... ..................... ____ ............ __ ... .. __ ... __ ......... ____ ................. ... __ ......... . __ ... __ ... ............................... 3
LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY __ .. ____ . ____ .. __ . ____ . __ ______ . ________________ ... ____ .... __ ... __ ______ ..4
ABOUT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES ... ...... ....... __ ... ......... ... __ .............. __ ......... __ ...... __ .. .. ............. __ .. __ .. ..... 4
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION ................ __ ...... __ ........ __ ... .............. __ .... __ .... __ .............. __ ... ... __ ...... ____ ......... ..7
1 .1 Product Description __ .. __________ ... ________ ______ . __ .. __ .. __ .. ____ .. ____ ... __ .. __ .. __ . ______ ____ . ____ . ____ . ____ .. ____ . ____ .. ________ . 7
1.2 Profibus Overview ... __ ........... __ .... __ ... ... __ .. ..... . __ .. ...... . __ . __ . __ ...... ____ . __ ......... __ ......... ....... __ ........ __ . __ . __ 7
1.3 System Requirements and Limitations .. ____ .. __ . ____ __ __ .. ____ .. __ . __ . ______ . __ __ ... __ .. ____ .. __ ... __ .. ____ .. __ . __ .. ________ 8
1.4 Physical Layout of PBM101/PBM102 __ . ________ .. __ . ____ .. __ . __ ... ________ ... ____ . ________ __ . ____ . ____ .. ____ . ____ .. ________ . 8
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION __ ................ __ ........................ __ .............. __ .. __ . __ .... . __ ... .. ...... .. .. .. ......... ...... __ .... 9
2.1 PBM 101/PBM 102 Mounting Requirements ____ ____ . __ ________ . ____ . ____________ .. __ ... ____________ . __ . ______________ . ____ . 9
2.2 Profibus DP Connector. .. __ .... . __ . __ ......... __ ....... __ ... ......... __ . __ . __ . __ .... ...... ... __ .......... . __ ..... ... . __ ... .. ...... .. 9
2.3 RS-232 Connector ... __ ..... """""'" ............. .. .... __ .. __ ... .. __ ....... __ ..... __ .......... __ ........... __ ... ....... .......... 9
2.4 LED Operation of PBM 10 1/PBM 102 ... ________ . ____ .. __ . ____ __ __ . __ . ______ . __ . __ . ________________ . __ .......... __ . ____ ____ .. __ 9
2.5.1 PLC Status Bit Definition __ . ____ . __________ .. __ . __ . ____ . __ . __ __ __ . ________ . ______ . __ .. __ . __ __ ______________ __ . ________ ____ ______ 10
2.5.2 Determining Slave Bus Addresses and Obtaining Sl ave Status using Status Bits __________________ 11
2.5.3 PLC Diagnosis Bit Definition __ ____ __ . __ ____________________________________ . ____________ . ______ . __ . ____ . __ . ______ . ________ . __ 13
CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURATION .... ... __ .. .. __ .. .. .. . __ .... .... __ .. ... .. .... .. ..... __ ....... __ ............ ........... __ ... ... ........ .... 15
3.1 Configuring the PBM1 01/PBM 102 .. ____ ... __________ ... __ ........ ________ .. __ . ______ ..... ____ .. __ ... ______ ..... . __ . ____ ...... 15
CHAPTER 4: WIRING .................... .. .......................... ____ ..... ____ ............ __ .... __ . __ .... ... __ ...... __ .. .. ..... __ . __ ..... . __ .25
4.1 Profibus Wiring __ .. __ ..... __ ....... __ . __ .... __ .. .... __ .... ______ ................... __ ... ...... __ ............... __ ... ............. __ .. __ .25
4.1.1 Assembling Cable for Use with DP Port on the PBM101/PBM102 and PBS105 ____ . __ . __ . __ ________ 25
4. 1.2 Other Considerations When Wiring Profibus Network ________________ __ ________ . ____ __ . ______ . ______ . ____ . ______ .26
4.1.3 Recommended Part Numbers .... .... __ ....... ____ ...... __ .... __ ....... __ .................. __ ..... ..... ............. __ ...... 26
( APPENDIX A : USER WORKSHEET __ ........... ............. ..... __ ...... .... ..... __ ... ____ ...... .. __ .. .... __ .... ....... ____ ......... .. 27
 ( PAGE 6 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03

NOTES

(
 MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 7
CH . 1

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

1.1 Produ ct Description

The Horner APG Profibus Master Module (HE693PBM101/HE693PBM102) functions as a Profibus DP

network master and is capable of controlling up to 64 slave devices. The Profibus DP application
allows for the connection of 1/0 devices and simple field devices to an automation system via a
Profibus network. Emphasis is on fast transmission of small data volumes. The PBM101/PBM102
operates as Profibus DP module only and does not support other types of Profibus (FMS, PAl.

The PBM101/PBM102 function similarly except that PBM101 operates at 24MHz. while PBM102
operates at 48MHz.

Profibus uses a Master-Slave type of communication with the PBM101/PBM102 functioning as the
master device. The PBM101/PBM102 communicates with slave devices such as inpuVoutput devices,
drives, valves, and measuring transmitters via a Profibus network. The PBM101lPBM102 (when used
with HE-APG Profibus Slave Modules) also allows communication between modules located in
different PLC racks via the Profibus network. (For information covering HE-APG Slave Modules, see
the User Manuals for the PBS105 and the PBM106.)

1.2 Profibu s Overview

Profibus, a token-passing network, supports one master (Type I) controlling the network and writing to
the slave devices. Multiple masters (Type II), however, can read information simultaneously off the
Profibus network. Master devices (PBM 101/PBM102) are used to determine the data communication
( on the bus.

Slave devices are peripherals such as inpuVoutput devices, valves, drives, and measuring
transmitters, etc. Slaves devices also include HE-APG Profibus Slave Modules located in PLCs that
the PBM101/PBM102 reads or writes to over the Profibus network. Slaves do not have bus access
rights and only acknowledge received messages or send messages to the master when requested to
do so. Data from the slave devices can be read by any master. All connected Slaves have the same
priority.

Up to 32 devices (masters or slaves) can be connected in one segment without using repeaters or up
to 64 devices can be connected using repeaters.

For furth er information on th e PROF/BUS Network, visit th eir w eb site at http:\\www.profibus.com

 PAGE 8 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
CH. 1

1.3 System Requirements and Limitations

a. The PBM101/PBM102 requires a CPU350 (or higher) with Firmware Version 8.0 (or higher).
Up to 32 devices (masters or slaves) can be connected in one segment without using
repeaters or up to 64 devices can be connected using repeaters.

b. The number of slave devices on the network depends on the amount of total slave data
produced and consumed on the network. Up to 506 bytes of tota l data can be produced on
the network and up to 506 bytes of total data can be consumed on the network.

c. VersaPro Software (1. 10) or Cimplicity Control (Version 2.20 or later) are requ ired to configure
the modules. The Series 9030 PLC is limited to 25 bytes of Extra Parameter Data.

d. Logicmaster software and earlier versions of CPU Firmware do NOT support these modules.

1.4 Physical Layout of PBM101/PBM102

Lr tpHOFIUUS Of> I

Figure 1.1 - Front Cover Figure 1.2 - Side View

( MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 9
CH.2

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION

2.1 PBM101/PBM102 Mounting Requirements

The PBM101/PBM102 Module is designed to plug into any Series 90-30 local slot. The
PBM101/PBM 102 requires at least a CPU350 model or higher with Firmware Revision 8. The
PBM101lPBM 102 can not operate correctly with a lower version Firmware. Please refer to the
appropriate manufacturer's installation manual.

2.2 Profibus DP Connector

T he 9-pin Profibus OP connector is for physical con nection between the slaves and the master.
For further information on the cable and connectors, see Chapter 4 in this manual.

2.3 RS-232 Connector

The RS-232 Service Port is used to upgrade the firmwa re specific to the slave . This port uses a
standard RS-232 9-pin connector.

Figure 2.1- Pin-out for the RS-232

2.4 LED Operation of PBM101/PBM102

There are th ree visible LED's on the PBM101/PBM 102, the OK LED, RUN LED, and the POWER
LED. Various combinations of these LED's will indicate different states of the master. See Table
2.1 for the states indicated by the LED's. Table 2.2 indicates fault conditions.
 PAGE 10 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
(
CH . 2

Table 2.1 - LED Operation

OK LED RUN LED POWER LED Meaning
Off Off Off Module not receiving any power.
Yellow Red Green Module has good power, but has not received valid
configuration from CPU and is not communicating on
the Profibus-DP network.
Green Red Green Module has good power, has received valid
configuration from CPU but is not communicating on
the Profibus-DP network. This may be due to the
CPU being in STOP mode.
Grecn Yellow Green Module has good power, has received valid
configuration from CPU and is communicating on the
Profibus-DP network ,but one or more configured
slaves is not responding. Or one or more slave are
flagging that diagnosis needs to be addressed. Or
the network configuration on slave information tab is
not correct.
Green Green Green Module has good power, has received valid
configuralion from CPU and is communicaling on the
Profibus-DP network. And no slaves have diagnosis
to be addressed.
Red Blinking Yellow A faull has occurred. Refer to the following
between yellow description to determine fault.
and green

( Tabl e 2.2 - Fault Conditions *

Pul se Count Mea ning
2 An error was encountered receiving configuration from the PLC CPU.
3 An error was encountered creating the Profibus-DP network
configuration.
4 An internal error was encountered while communicating with the
Profibus hardware
10-23 Internal Error Codes. If witnessed , record value and report to GE
Fanuc.
* The blinking RUN light indicates a fault. To determine the fault, count the number of green
pulses. (The LED pauses for 2 seconds, and pulses green a number of times, and then
repeats the cycle.) Table 1-2 describes the fault as represented by the number of green
pulses.

2.5 PBM101/PBM102 Status ErrorlDiagnosis Reporting

2.5.1 PLe Status Bit Definition

The PBM 101/PBM102 has 128 bits of diagnosiS and status information reported to the PLC CPU.
64 bits are assigned as status bits, and 64 are assigned as diagnOSis bits. The 64 status bits are
by default assigned to the top of the existing memory map in the Settings tab of the
PBM101/PBM102 parameters screen (see Figure 3.4).

The following explanation describes the Slave Status and indicates the infomnation needed to
setup the Slave Status parameters in the program language being used (such as Ladder Logic or
C-Programming). The Slave Diagnosis inputs contain additional infomnation about the slaves,
which is useful for slave specific issues.
( MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 11
CH. 2

This data is contained in 8 bytes with each bit containing the system diagnosis nags for each
slave and is explained later in this chapter. The 64 Diagnosis Flag bits are by default assigned to
the top of the existing memory map in the Settings tab of the PBM101/PBM102 parameters setup
screen (see Figure 3.4).

Status Bits: These 64 bits report the communication status between the master and the slaves
on the bus. Each bit represents the slave area as set up usi ng the Slave Information tab on the
PBM101/PBM102 parameters screen (see Figure 3.5). The following table represents the area,
byte offset, bit offset, and value of each diagnosis bit.

2.5.2 Determining Slave Bus Addresses and Obtaining Slave Status using Status Bits

To obtain a slave status using Status Bits, several pieces of information are needed. The user
must be able to properly "read" various configuration screens in order to obtain the needed
information used to give a slave status. The following example uses configuration screens that
are used in Chapter Three: Configuration in this manual.

Step 1: Upon selecting the Settings Tab (Figure 3.4), determin e whi ch bit has been selected
as th e Starting Bit by the VersaPro Programming Software. In Figure 3.4, the Starting
Bit is %100065, which is the value in the Status Reference Type row.

-----~~ : $t~,,-:: p.t!~~~~ -; ~t~ I

------.~{
tt.".,
L,.-.;!' . ----,
i ~ "oJ: '1~':-. I
l
M" ~ I:Y: '!' 'l-I.~"'~ OJ ~ rrd--:-l
iJ.::f~~~ ~'z.~~ 1m:- JI_~!.!
i~l ..: .'fI ~t~ C'=rJ72l..::~ _
I 1:1:0
'.:'):((1
I S'J'l:
,.;:..r -,f"I~e;p!
___ -- C r:'l~cl
--- .:.. ~~~
- l.1I
f.Q~;_~.!~~~1!Y~ ':'}:i ."",'~,~ ,
I [Ii:.; ['': ; ~ ':'i.!\' ~ ~:H ,!,.' !'>: I
!D~;r;;-;-t;- i),;. ~~~
~ [J~:.,m):;lc ;J.:)} .::.:!'.o L~;l1 1
I .. -:(()1

; "'1 ;.jj:-n~-:: Dn .4te..: I

!Modi!- ne. . !:;:n.~~ L:r':'j
; OI!Jo~ [,~ . , ~~!I ..-l((J~
,I P~:. ['-:a ~' ~!I_l~~~b 1 c

I~rt~ 1l'''':J~~d.:.: U.;~ ~I:l

10l.Y.J Tm:-l~~~~:- l (
I Set Tu:.:t 10 Irrc:,!': ll:~ de<.!I!
; G.:.p =.:~o:ID (0 Ilf-d e: l!Oe m ~
; R(:II ~~ ~ IO ; !ir:~e !;. iJ:''!''J:' ,
: ~1" 1;.:; IO In)"le: J:06:I, ,
r "1,) ~ T~.:J P In~.!: ~ I.J :~ eel. i
i R~;~ Hc('"lcln: I) Ie Of.,::t l

Figure 3.4 - Settings Tab

 PAGE 12 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
( CH.2

Step 2: Select the Slave Information Tab (Figure 3.5). The Bus Address correlates to the
bus address that is assigned to the slave by the user. In Figure 3.5, the Bus Address for
Slave 1 is "2."

Note: A common misconception is that Status Bits and Slave Bus Addresses are
represented by the same value . Slave Bus Addresses do not represent Status Bits.
Rather, bits 0-63 are the slave status bits that are assigned by the master configuration
in VersaPro Programming Software.
his column denotes the Bus Addresses of the
This column is simply the slaves. The Bus Address is provided by the
numbers that VersaPro user.
Programming Software has This screen is read correctly as "Slave 1 (as
assigned to the slaves in its assigned by Versa Pro Software) has a Bus
master configuration. ddress of 2:

;.. :j
::.
~! ' :,

) ij

-'
lj '

., 0 1_

.) J (
,- :'l il ,.
e II l
;)
I. .1 IJ

.J.J

Figure 3.5 - Slave InformationTab

 ( MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 13
CH.2

Step 3. Finally. determine the Bit Status of the stave. The Starting Bit value serves as a
reference point for calculating bit offsets. The following worksheet depicts the Bit
Statuses for the example. Refer to Appendix A for a handy work sheet that can be used
for the user's application
Example Work Sheet: Determining Slave Bus Addresses
- Slave Bus Slave Status Reference Type Bus
Status Reference Type
Area Addr. Area Addr.
1 %100065 (Slarting Bil + 0) 2 34 %100098 (Slarting Bit + 33) NIA
2 %100066 (Starting Bit + 1) 29 35 %100099 (Startinq Bil + 34) NIA
3 %100067 (Starling Bit + 2) 3 36 %100100 (Starting Bit + 35) NIA
4 %100068 (Startinq Bit + 3 NIA 37 %100101 (Startinq Bil + 36 NIA
5 %100069 JStartinq Bit + 4 NIA 38 %100102 lStartingBil + 37 NIA
6 %100070 (Starting Bit + 5) NIA 39 %100103 (Starting Bit + 38 NIA
7 %100071 (Starting Bit + 6) NIA 40 %100104 (Starting Bit + 39 NIA
8 %100072 (Startinq Bit + 7) NIA 41 %100105 (Startinq Bit + 40) NIA

2.5.3 PLC Diagnosis Bil Definition

Note: To determine slave bus addresses and obtain slave Diagnostic Flag Bits. refer to Section
2.5.2. Although the procedures in the section cover the use of Status Bits. they are similar
to the procedures that can be used with Diagnostic Flag Bits.

Diagnosis Bits: In addition to 64 status bits. there are 64 diagnosis Flag bits used for monitOring
l slave requests to send the diagnosis. These 64 bits are by default assigned to the top of the
existing memory map in the Settings tab of the PBM101/PBM102 configuration screen (see
Figure 3.4). In order to properly configure the master to accommodate the diagnosis data from
the slaves. the Diagnosis Data Slave Address Area. Diagnosis Data Slave Address Length.
Diagnosis Flag Area. Diagnosis Flag Length. Diagnosis Data Area. and the Diagnosis Data
Length must be configured.

Note: The diagnosis bits are ordered in the same manner as the status bits.

a. Slave diagnosis is not sent to the master without being told to do so where a Flag
is. The Diagnosis Data from the slave is read at the Diagnosis Data Area only
when the bus address is set at the Diagnosis Slave Address Area . This address
must be an %AQ with a length of one word. Diagnosis data from a particular
slave is desired when the slave sets its flag. The address of that slave is entered
into the %AQ selected. The diagnosis data from the slave can be any type of
diagnosis data. Diagnosis data does not necessarily mean that the data
represents a "Fault" condition. It is. however. typically a fault condition .
 ( PAGE 14
CH.2
12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03

The following are examples of what types of data the slave might send to the
master:

Module Diagnosis:
Corrupted EPROM
Unsupported Feature
Loss of Power
High Alarm
Low Alarm
Over Range

Communications Diagnosis:
Station Not Present
Station Not in Run Mode
Freeze Mode Is Active
Invalid Response
Parameter Fault

b. The Diagnosis Flag Data is read from the address set as the Diagnosis Flag
Area . The address for this area must be a %1 with a length of 64 bits. Each bit
represents a slave number configured on the Slave Information tab of the
PBM101/PBM102 setup screen. Diagnostic flag is only valid if the associated status bit is
a "1", indicating data exchange with this device. The Master will set the diagnosis bit to
"1", until the slave puts a flag (available diagnostics) on the bus, this allows the Master to
set the diagnosis bit to a "0". Devices that do not support diagnostics will not allow the
Master to change the diagnosis bits to "0", unless the Master is not in data exchange
(Status = "0").

c. The Diagnosis Data Area is the area in memory set aside for the diagnosis data
coming from the slave. This area must be set as a %AI address and the length will be
dependent on the slave. The length must be set to the largest amount as set by a slave.
For instance; if there are four slaves on the bus and two of them send diagnosis data at a
length of five words and the other two send the data at a length of 12 words, then the
Diagnosis Data Area must be set to 12 words.

It is important to monitor both the status bits and the diagnosis bits both. It is possible to
have diagnosis data without having a problem (fault) on the bus.

For further information on how to setup these areas, see Chapter 3 of this manual.

Note: If both the Status and Diagnosis bits for each slave are AND'ed to together and the result
is a '1,' the Slave is communicating with no faults. If the result is '0,' then test the status
bit.

If the Status bit is zero, the slave is not communicating, and the Diagnosis bit is not
applicable.

If the Status is '1' then the slave is indicating that Diagnosis data is available, and its bus address
needs to be entered to the Diagnosis Slave address area to acknowledge the diagnosis and reset
the Flag.

(
 MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 15
( CH.3

CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURATION

3.1 Configuring the PBM101/PBM102

Chapter Three provides procedures for configuring the PBM101/PBM102 using Versa Pro
Programming Software. To install VersaPro, refer to the manufacturer's software tutorial and
help files included with the software.

Note: The following procedures apply to the PBM101/PBM102. The configuration example
below uses the PBM101.

1. Access the Versa Pro Screen using the procedu res described in the manufacturer's software
tutorial (refer to Hardware Configuration ).

Note: As part of the manufacturer's procedures, the user must select Series 90-30 High End
(CPU350 or higher) as the default hardware. A new folder must also be opened. After
these steps are accomplished, a screen similar to Fig ure 3.1 appears.

!!lP ::" -17;'T .. _ ~--.-- --_.- -::- ...- . "; . --- - ___~ -::. -:.. - .
Hili [lIe .Edit ~iew ~indow Iools tlelp

Main IRack 1 ] Rack 2 ] Rack 3 ] Rack 4] Rack 5] Rack 6] Rack 7 ]

Icsil3CHS391 . Base 105101

--------

Figure 3.1 - VersaPro Screen

2. If the rack type is not correct, place the mouse cu rsor (a rrow) on the rack, press the right
mouse button (right click) and select Change Rack Type .

3. Highlight the slot where the PBM101 /PBM102 is to be placed by left-clicking (or pressing) the
left mouse button on that spot.
 f
( PAGE 16 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
CH. 3

4. Right click on the highlighted slot and select Add Modul e. The Module Catalog screen
appears. Select the Bus Controller tab. Then, use the mouse to select the HE693PBM1011
PBM 102 as shown in Figure 3.2. The empty slot is now replaced with the PBM101/PBM102
module.

I
Intel6gent Opllon
I DisClete Output I Disc.ete Mixed 1Analog Input 1 3! d Pa.ty I
Disc.ete Input
UK
Analog Output I Analog Mixed I Communications Bus CantIOUe< I Motion I
Cancel
Catalog Numbe. Description
HE693PBM 100 P"Jlhus Ma,te. Module Help
HE693PBM10l Profibus Master Module PTO C.rtified
IC693B EM321 9030 I/O Link Maste.
1C693BEM331 9030 Genrus" Bus Cantrolle.

Figure 3.2 - Bus Controller T ab

(
5. The following screen appears (Figu re 3.3). Left-click the slot containing the PBM101/PBM102.
m[.J::T~--='~...::- ~ __ ~~~~ ,..:.. :-:--- -,.---:;; ..-- ..-.. ...,...'~-~-.~. -~.-:"- ---- <-

Hif Eh ,cit 'it:w ''; H>N l,,:l, U<b

Figure 3.3 - PBM101 Highlighted

\.
 MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 17
( CH . 3

6. The following screen appears (Figure 3.4).

2lt greenlights (0.4) HE693PBM1 01 1I1!If3

I I
Sellings Slave Inlormalion Dala Alea I POWeI Consumption I
Parameters Values L-J
Bus Addless: _..__.._____._..._._..__..__L._._._.____._.__..._....._... _._.. J...J
Sialus Relelence Type: %100065
S lalus Lenglh: ' .
;:-,,,.
Baud Rale: 500K
Min. Slave Inlelval (0.1msl:
,
Talgel Rolalion Time (I bils: 12000
Sync/Fleeze CmllOlp.lea %QOOOOl
Syroc/Fleeze Coroho! Alea L. '.- .,~

Diag Dala Slave Addl Alea %I>.QOOOl

Diag Dala Slave Addl Alea I 1
Diagnoslic Flag Alea %100001
Diagnoslic Flag Alea LengU' S~

Module Revision Alea %AIOOOl

Module Revision Alea Lengl -I
Diag Dala Alea %A10002
Diag Dala .6.1ea Lenglh 15
5101 Time (0 Improes use del, 200
Quiel Time (0 Implies use de 0
( 5el Time (0 Implies use dela 1
Gap FaclOf (0 Implies use d, 10
Reily Limil (0 Implies use del 1
Min Tsdl (0 Implies use dela 11
Max Tsd, (0 Implies use del, 100
Resp. MonilOling (0 10 Disat 70
-=-I
~
P,olibus Masle, Module PTO Cellliled
.

Figure 3.4 - Settings Tab

7. Select the Settings tab to set parameters for the Master. Alter the parameters using the
information contained in Table 3.1.

a. For additional information covering parameters. refer 10 Sections 2.5.1 and 2.5.2. Various
parameters involving the slave devices are discussed such as Diagnostic Flag .

(
( PAGE 18 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
CH.3

Table 3.1 briefly describes the fields on the Settin gs Tab, which set parameters for the master.

Tabl e 3.1 - Fi el ds on th e Setting s Tab

Bus Address Profibus Station Address 1 - 125
Status Reference Type Reference Type for Master Status (Must Be %1).
Represents the location of Status Bits (see Tabl e 1.3 of this
document) in PLC memory. (8 bytes)
Status Len~th Number of Status Bits (Fixed at 64~
Baud Rate Baud Rate of data transmi ssions on the Profibus network.
(ran~e between 9.6K - 12M)
Min. Slave Interval (.1ms) Smallest allowed period of time between two successive poll
cycles of a particular slave. It is in .1ms increments and has
a range of 1-65535.

..
Target Rotation Time (t_bits) Allowable cycle time in which all slaves will be polled by
Sync/Freeze Control Area
Sync/Freeze Area Length
Diag. Data Slave Addr. Area
Diag. Data Slave Addr. Area
length.
Diagnosis Flag Area
Diagnosis Flag Area Length
this master. It is in t_bits and has a range of 1-65535 .
Reference Area for Sync/Freeze data (Must be a %Q.) For
more information, refer to 3.1 , Step 7, item b.
Always 32 Bits.
Reference Area for address of desired Slave with requested
Diagnosis Data. (Must be a %AQ.) See SecUon 2.5.1 and
2.5.2.
Always one word.
Reference area for Profibus Diagnosis flags. (Must be a
%1.) See Section 2.5.1 and 2.5.2.
Always 64 bits.

Module Revision Area Reference Area for Module Version (Must be %AI).

Module Revision Area Length Always set to 1.

Reference area for address of diagnosis data. (Must be a
Diagnosis Data Area
%AI.) See Section 2.5.1 and 2.5.2.
Diagnosis Data Area Length Dependent on slave data. (From 1 to 122)
Slot Time: ** Profibus Slot Time in bit times.
Quiet Time: *. Profibus Quiet time in bit times.
Set Time: ** Profibus Set Time in bit times.
Gap Factor: *. Profibus Gap Factor (1 - 100).
Retry Limit: .* Max Number of message retries.
Min Tsdr:" Profibus Min Tsdr (station delay time) in bit times.
Max Tsdr: ** Profibus Max Tsdr (station delay time) in bit times.
Resp. Monitoring Network Response Monitoring Time. Set in 10ms units if
(0 to Disable) (10ms units) enabled.
*. These values will default accordingly for a single Master DP bus at the entered Baud Rate.
A good understanding of the Profibus timed is required if these values are adjusted. Entering
a '0' will also provide default values.
 MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 19
( CH. 3

b . The following information is provided for the Sync/Freeze function in the Master device and
is used to setup the Sync/Freeze parameters in the program language being used (i.e., Ladder
Logic or C-Programming).

The Sync/Freeze controls allow the Logic to control the data now to and from the inputs and
outputs of the slaves. The Freeze control can be used to synchronize the slave inputs, and the
SYNC command is used to synchronize the slave outputs.

The Freeze control freezes the physical input data existing on one or more slaves
simultaneously, like taking a snap shot. The selected slave(s) stay in the frozen state until an
Unfreeze control is issued.

The Sync control works in much the same way. It unlocks the physical output data existing on
one or more slaves simul taneously. This data remains static until an Unsync control or new Sync
control is issued. Additional Sync control s update the output data.

The slav es can be selected individually or in groups. To use the group functions, the Slaves must
have been configured for a group. The Slave Information dialog screen contains the Grp Mask
fields for each slave. This field can contain a group number of 0 - 8. The zero group is a global
group.

The form at of the Sync/Freeze control data is as follows:

Byte 0 = Group data

Bit 0 = Group 1
Bit 1 = Group 2
Bit 2 = Group 3
Bit 3 = Group 4
Bit 4 = Group 5
Bit 5 = Group 6
Bit 6 = Group 7
Bit 7 = Group 8
data FFH = Group 0, Global group

Byte 1 = Slave Address (7FH = broadcast, all addresses)

Byte 2 = Control type

01H = UNFREEZE
02H = FREEZE
04H = UNSYNC
08H = SYNC

Byte 3 = Transmit Control command

This can be any data - any change in this byte triggers a Control update.
 ( PAGE 20 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
CH . 3

8. After the Settings parameters are set. click on the Slave Information tab. The following
screen appears (Figure 3.5).

2'" greenlights (0.4) HE693PBM1 01 I!lIiII3

I I
Sellings Slave InlOlffidlion Data Alea Powel Consumption I
Slave 6.50 File I Bus Add. I 5~ncJllded Ide I 6.~IXlIa Pa.m Len IXlIa Pann Data l Use ~j
1 C.\W1NDO\ 2 ... 87 50 0 ,~ _ .. _ _-, 0,00.0,00.0,00.0, 1
2 C\W1NDo\ 29 , , B7 50 0 15 O:;OO.OxOO.OxOO.(h 1
3 C\WINDO\ 3 87 50 0 15 OxOO.O:;OO.OxOO.Dl 1
4 0 '. 0 0 0 0 1
5 0 _
0 0 0 0 1
6 0 : : .. :
0 0 0 0 1
7 0 ': . :0 0 0 0 1
8 0 I, .:
0 0 0 0 1
9 0 '
0 0 0 0 1
10 0 I> 0 0 0 0 1
11 0
0 0 0 0 1
12 0
0 0 0 0 I
13 0 0 0 0 0 1
14 0 ~!~"-: 0 0 0 0 1
15 0 : o 0 0 0 0 1
~
- - -
~
- -
P,O/ibus Masle. Module PTO Celilfied
.. - - - - -

(
Figure 3.5 -Slave Information Tab

9. The Slave Information tab is used to define th e DP slaves that reside on the Profibus network
and communicate with this Master. Set the parameters using th e information contained in
Table 3.2.
 MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAG E 21
( CH. 3

Tab le 3. 2 - Fields on th e " Sl ave Infonnation " Tab

Slave A number assigned to a slave by the VersaPro Software master
configuration. The assignment is not necessarily identical to the
Bus Address. (See Bu s Address.)
GSD File The GSD File contains mapping information from the Master to
the Slave. This file is imported from the GSD directory.

The GSD file is required to allow VersaPro to derive operational

parameters for each slave. The GSD file is selected by clicking
in the first available empty box under the GSD Fil e heading.
With the box highlighted, enter a SPACE followed by the
ENTER key. A Fil e Name Selection Dialog starts and allows
the user to find and open the desired GSD file. If the path and
name of the GSD file is known , the path and name can be
entered directly into the GSD File box.

Once the GSD file name is selected and entered, Versa Pro
reads the GSD data, and all pertinent parameters is used by
VersaPro to build the configuration. For slaves that have
multiple module configurations, the user is required to enter the
module specific data into the Data Area screen.

Note: The GSD Files are located at t he Horn er APG Web

site at www.heapg.com.

Bus Address The Bus Addr field refers to the bus address of the slaves that
are being mapped to this Master.

SynC/F reeze Non-editable field in slave. Indicates if the module is in the

Freeze Control and/or Sync modes. For more information about
Sync/Freeze Control in the Master, see 3.1, Step 7, item b.
Ident High The Ident High field sets the High byte Ident Number of the DP-
Slave device as assigned by the Profibus Trade Organization
(PTO) .
Ident Low The Id ent Low field sets the Low byte Ident number of the DP-
Slave device as assigned by the Profibus Trade Organization.
Group Mask The Grp Mask field sets the Bit Mask denoting group control for
Sync and Freeze Functions. Each bit identifies a particular
group. Group Control is only possible if bit 7 in the above
O~eratin9 Flags is set to 1.
Extra Parameter Length The Xtra Pann Len indicates the number of bytes entered in the
Parameter Data. Must be in dedmal and is limited to 25 bytes.
Extra Parameter Data The Xtra Parm Data provides additional data that pertains
speCifically to a particular slave. It is a string of values that can
be entered in dedmal or hexadecimal. Values must be
separated as shown:

Decimal: (1,10,0, 32)

Hexadecimal: (Ox1 ,OxA, OxO, Ox20)

--watCh Dog The WD sets the Watch Dog. The WD is set by the GSD Fil e.
To disable, set to O.
 PAGE 22 12 OCT 2000 MAN 0219-03
CH.3

10. Click on the Data Area tab, and the following screen appears (Figure 3.6).

lit greenllghts (0.2) HE6 93 PBM1 01 1!!I~13

I I
Settings Slave Information DataArea Power Consumption I

1 '""ford 6 7.100153 7.QOOO33 ByteI' ~I

29 2 Illlut Word 2 7.100249 ':;[;lll:(; Bytei' .. ,
Output Word 2 "'-:(C:~(;1 7.QOOl29 ByteI' (I o
Empty :: ,:-=, ~: ,IJ:J~::.~ " ~:;CC(IOCi~ ,,~ r
Empty Ey:~ ~:.:J(;C.C1 ';CO,j~~G~ " -' G
o E"llty !)I,'~':- ;<:SC!I_:~~~ ,":QC,~ii::~li . . :0:. CI
o E"llty ~,~Ii.~ ~,;jJGCj 6'JO:;:::.)- :'J !-=.
o Empty
Empty
t'/-::
E'/e
\,')0;"1
:;liJ.:l.:J1
tJ::(~'7i
;. 0D08~l1
- 1-;;

,I..:; "
"
r

c'
"
Empty B'.'_e \'((,:-~l ~,::-:,:r:';)1 2 :t " n G
Empty
Empty
5/_6
B"'~
.
~!L,J;::'=;i
,~1:,j-rr:
:.0":):]:::=:01 Ey';;./.
~~IJ')JC(q
-E' ,.. J
/~.
(:
oj
C

Empty 8ll,C .;~:):n ~;QcrCtO~l ;.-::,

Empty t: s ~<o[('':''L'~ 6 .. ,~:X(:: __; ~'~;':-i\ J

Proflbus Master Module PTO Certified -

Figure 3.6 - Data Area Tab

(
a. This tab completes the configuration for the mapping of the Profibus-DP network data to
the PLC memory locations. The order in which the data is configured must be identical to that of
the DP-Slave and must conform within its GSD file parameters, If configuration mismatches
exist, no data is exchanged with that particular slave.

b. To configure the slave at bus address 29, start on the next available unused line. (In
Figure 3.6. this is the second line, represented by Area 2) and enter the bus address (for thi s
example, it is 29). Enter a "1" for the module number. The module type is "1/0: so left click on
the field with the mouse and select "1/0" from the pull-down menu. The "Length Type" is the data
format (either a byte or a word) , and the "Data Length is the number of bytes or words in this
module. The remainder of the lines are used to map the inpu t from the network to the PLC, and
the outputs place updates on to the network.

c. To configure the input, tab down to the next line (area 2 in Figure 3.6). Enter a "29" for
the
Slave Address. The module a "2", because the slave is configured for both I/O and inputs. It is
looked at by the master as two modules with the same bus address. Configure the type, length.
and mapping as described by the GSD file, To assist in configuring the slave, the GSD fil e has
the necessary information needed, If additional assistance is required , please, contact the GE
Fanuc PLC hotline or Horner APG Technical Support.

NOTE : It is important to remember that an input is updated from the network, and an output
places an update on to the network.
( MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 23
CH.3

Tabl e 3.3 - Fields in the " Data Are a" Tab

Memory area being defined within the PLC. It is not conflgurable. The master
Area
currentty supports configuring 64 unique areas.
Slave Bus address of the particular slave for which you are adding a data area mapping. It
Address must be equal to a corresponding value set in the Slave n Settings tab.
Particular module ID which is being configured for the given slave address. The
number of modules used must be identical to the slave configuration for proper data
exchange to occur.
For example, if the slave to which communication is desired is a GE Fanuc Field
Module #
Control Proflbus BIU which has an input module followed by an output module, the
number of mod utes would be three. The Module II of the area mapped to the BIU
would be 1; the Module # of the input module would be 2; and the Module II of the
output module would be 3.
Data Type of module being defined. Possible types are: Input, Output, I/O (both input
Type
and output). Special input, Special output. Special I/O, and Empty.
Length T)'pe Specifies whether data is of type Byte or Word.
Length of data . This value is expressed in units according to the Length Type field. If
Data Length the Type field is set to I/O, this value is both the length of the input and the length of
the output. RanQe is 0-16. A value of 0 implies that this area is not defined.
Memory location in PLC where input data will be mapped. This field must be set if the
Input Offset
Type value is Input or I/O.
Memory location in PLC where output data will be mapped . This field must be set if
Output Offset the Type value is Output or I/O.
Consistency Option Flag. Possible choices are: "Byte/Word" and "Entire Length".
Consistency (Not used for "Specia l" Types)
Special In Data Byte used for Types Special Input and Special 110. This byte (range O-ff)
Byte represents a special input identifier as defined by a particular slave.
Special Out Dala Byte used for Types Special Output and Special 110. This byte (range O-ff)
Byte represents a special output identifier as defined by a parlJcular slave.
Mfg 1 - 15 Manufacturer Specific Data (1-15) that is sent to a particular slave (up to 15 bytes).
Although the information is usually imported in the GSD file, it is necessary to access if
modifications are required.

11 . After the Data Area parameters a re set , the Power Consumption tab can be selected
to display power consumption characteri stics of the module. No fields are editable on this
tab.

12. Save the Configuration.

13. After the configuration is completed, down load the configuration to the PLC. Consult the
manufacturer's manual for details on how to download using Versa Pro Programming
Software.
 ( PAGE 24 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
CH. 3

NOTES

(
 { MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 25
CH.4

CHAPTER 4: WIRING

4.1 Profibus Wiring

4. 1. 1 Assembling Cable for Use with DP Port on tile PBM1011PBM102 and PBS10S.

a. The PBM101/PBM102 uses a 9-pin D-sub plug connector for its DP port. The pin
assignment of the pl ug connector and the wiring are shown below (Figure 4.1).

Station 1 Station 2
{\ Line B {\
RxDfTxD-P 30 0 3
V+ 60 0 6
DGND 50 0 5
Line A
Rx DfTxD-N 8 0 Y Shieldingy 0 8
- --
-
\ /
( Protective Ground

Figure 4.1

b. It is necessary to terminate both ends of the network. Both terminations must have
power to them to insu re proper operation of the network. The following diagram (Figure
4.2) illustrates the correct connection for the termination resistors.
VP(6)

Line Tcnnination
390 Ohm

B-linc (3)

220Qhm

ALone(S) -----------1

390 Ohm

GN O(S) __ . _

Figure 4.2

NOTE: The above wiring diagram (Fig. 4.2) is for illustrative purposes only. Cabling and
connectors should be PTa-approved to achieve the desired performance results. See
Section 4.1 .3 for recommended part numbers.

(
 r PAGE 26 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
CH. 4

c. The shield braiding (and if present, the shield foil) must be connected to protective
ground on both sides and must have good conductivity via shield clamps that cover as
large an area as possible. In addition, it is recommended that the data lines be kept
separate from all high-voltage cables.

4.1 .2 Other Considerations When Wiring Profibus Network

a. In the Profibus network, up to 32 stations (master or slaves) can be connected per

segment without the addition of repeaters. If more that 32 stations are desired, repeaters
must be used. The repeaters are used to connect individual bus segments together.

b. The maximum cable length depends on the transmission speed. The specified cable
length can be increased by the use of repeaters. However, the use of more than three
repeaters in series is not recommended .

c. The following cable length specifications are based on type-A cable with a 135 to 165
Ohm impedance; less than 30 pflm capacity; a loop resistance of 110 Ohms/Km, a wire
gauge of .64mm; and a conductor area of 0.34mm 2 .

Tabl e 4.1 - Baud/Distance Rates

Baud Rate(biUsec) 9.6K 19.2K 93.75K 187.5K 500K 1.5M 12M

Distance/Segment 1200m 1200m 1200m 600m 200m 200m 100m

( d. For data transmission speeds of greater than 500 kbiUsec., stub lines (free hanging ends
of the cable) must be avoided. There are plug connectors available on the market that
permi t data line A and data line B to be connected directly to the plug connector.

4.1.3 Recommended Part Numbers

It is highly recommended that the following cable and connectors be used for high speed data
transmissions. Both cable and connector part numbers are Siemens part numbers.

Connectors: Extra 9-pin DSUB for easy

a.
cabl e stacking.

6ES7 -972-0BB 1O-OXAO 6ES7 -972-0BA 1O-OXAO

Figure 4.3 - Conn ectors

b. Cabl e: Part Number 6XV1-830-0AH1 0

 MAN0219-03 12 OCT 2000 PAGE 27
( APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A: USER WORKSHEET

If desired, the following worksheet is available to the user when determining slave bus addresses.
Refer to Sections 2 .5.2 and 2.5.3 .

User Work Sheet: Determining Slave Bus Addresses

Status I Statu s I
Slave Diagnosis Bus Slave Diagnosis Bus
Offset Offset
Area Fl ag Ref. Addr. Area Flag Ref. Addr.
Type Type
1 (Starling Bit + 0) 34 (Starting Bit + 33)
2 (Starting Bit + 1) 35 (StartinQ Bit + 34)
3 (Starting Bit + 2) 36 (Starting Bit + 35)
4 {StartinQ Bit + 3 37 StartinQ Bit + 36
5 (Starting Bit + 4 38 Starting Bit + 37
6 Startin~it + 5 39 Starting Bit + 38
7 (Starting Bit + 6) 40 (Starting Bit + 39)
8 Starting Bit + 7) 41 StartinQ Bit + 40
9 Starting Bit + 8) 42 StartinQ Bit + 41
10 Starting Bit + 9) 43 StartinQ Bit + 42
11 Starting Bit + 10t 44 Starting Bit + 43
12 (Starting Bit + 11) 45 (Starting Bit + 44)
13 (Starting Bit + 12) 46 (StartinQ Bit + 45)
47
I-~ (Starting Bit + 13) StartinQ Bit + 46
15 f - - (StartinQ Bit + 14) 48 {StartinQ Bit + 47
( 16 (Starting Bit + 15) 49 Starting Bit + 48
17 StartinQ Bit + 16) 50 Starting Bil + 49
18 Starting Bit + 17 51 Starting Bit + 50)
19 Starting Bit + 18 52 Starting Bit + 51
20 Starting Bit + 19 53 Starting Bit + 52
21 Starting Bit + 20 54 Starting Bit + 53)
22 StartinQ Bit + 21) 55 (Starting Bit + 54)
23 Startin Q Bit + 22 56 (StartinQ Bit + 55
24 Starting Bit + 23 57 StartinQ Bit + 56
25 Starting Bit + 24 58 StartinQ Bit + 57
26 Starting Bit + 25 59 Starting Bit + 58
27 (Starting Bit + 26 60 Startin g Bit + 59
61
1-~8 Startinq Bit + 27 (Starting Bit + 60
29 Starting Bit + 28 62 (StartinQ Bit + 61
30 Starting Bit + 29 63 {StartinQ Bit + 62
31 Starting Bit + 30 64 Starting Bit + 63
32 (Starting Bit + 31)
33 (Starting Bit + 32)
 PAGE 28 12 OCT 2000 MAN0219-03
( APPENDIX A